CIVIL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER V
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

CIVIL ENGINEERING

CORE COURSES – S5
COURSE
SLOT COURSES L-T-P HOURS CREDIT
NO.
A CET301 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS – I 3-1-0 4 4
B CET303 DESIGN OF CONCRETE STRUCTURES 3-1-0 4 4
C CET305
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING – II 4-0-0 4 4
HYDROLOGY & WATER RESOURCES
D CET307 4-0-0 4 4
ENGINEERING
CONSTRUCTION TECHNOLOGY&
E CET309 3-0-0 3 3
MANAGEMENT
F MCN301 DISASTER MANAGEMENT 2-0-0 2 --
S CEL331 MATERIAL TESTING LAB – II 0-0-3 3 2
T CEL333 GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING LAB 0-0-3 3 2
R/M/H VAC REMEDIAL/MINOR/HONOURS COURSE 3-1-0 4* 4
TOTAL 27/31 23/27
MINOR COURSES - S5
R/M CET381 STRUCTURAL MECHANICS 3-1-0 4 4
R/M CET383 ECO-FRIENDLY TRANSPORTATION SYSTEMS 3-1-0 4 4
R/M CET385 SUSTAINABILITY ANALYSIS & DESIGN 3-1-0 4 4
HONOURS COURSES - S5

R/M/H CET393 STRUCTURAL DYNAMICS 3-1-0 4 4

R/M/H CET395 TRANSPORTATION SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT 3-1-0 4 4
R/M/H CET397 GROUND WATER HYDROLOGY 3-1-0 4 4
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
Year of
STRUCTURAL CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
CET301 Introduction
ANALYSIS - I
PCC 3 1 0 4 2019

Preamble: The course enables the students to analyse various types of simple structures
using appropriate methods and tools. It introduces the applications of principles of mechanics
of solids to determine stress resultants in statically determinate and indeterminate structures.
Specific cases of cables, suspension bridges and arches are also discussed at length. The
course trains the students to develop mathematical models and helps to sharpen their
analytical skills. After this course students will be able to analyse structures subjected to
moving loads as well.
Prerequisite: CET201Mechanics of Solids

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

Course Prescribed
Description of Course Outcome
Outcome learning level
CO1 Apply the principles of solid mechanics to analyse trusses. Applying
Apply various methods to determine deflections in statically
CO2 Applying
determinate structures.
Identify the problemswith static indeterminacy and tackling Understanding,
CO3 such problems by means of the method of consistent Analysing,
deformations and energy principles. Applying
Apply specific methods such as slope deflection and
Understanding,
CO4 moment distribution methods of structural analysis for
Applying
typical structures with different characteristics.
Apply suitable methods of analysis for various types of Understanding,
CO5
structures including cables, suspension bridges and arches. Applying
Understanding,
Analyse the effects of moving loads on structures using
CO6 Analysing,
influence lines.
Applying

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes (Minimum requirement)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 2 2 - - - - - - - - - -
CO2 2 2 - - - - - - - - - -
CO3 3 3 - - - - - - - - - -
CO4 3 2 - - - - - - - - - -
CO5 3 2 - - - - - - - - - -
CO6 3 2 - - - - - - - - - -
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment
Bloom’s Category Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 10 05 10
Understand 20 10 20
Apply 30 25 50
Analyse 10 10 20
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration
150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question carries 14 marks and can have maximum 2
sub-divisions.

Course Level Assessment Questions

CO1: Apply the principles of solid mechanics to analyse trusses.

1. Explain the method of joints to analyse trusses.

2. Find the member forces in FH, EH and EG using method of sections.

3. Analyse the truss in figure using method of joints

 CIVIL ENGINEERING
2 kN 4 kN

600 600 600 600

CO2: Apply various methods to determine deflections in statically determinate

structures.

1. Find the slopes at A & B, and deflections at C& D of the simple beam. E= 2x105
N/mm2. I = 8500 cm4

2. Find the vertical deflection at C for the frame iin

n figure using strain energy
method.

3. State and prove Betti’s Theorem

4. Find the deflection and slope at C for the cantilever, using unit load method.
Take EI as unity.

CO3: Identify the problems with static indeterminacy and tackling such
problems by means of the method of consistent deformations and energy
principles.

1. Explain static and kinematic indeterminacies with examples.

2. Differentiate between force and displacement methods for analysing
indeterminate structures
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
3. Find the reaction at B for the beam shown in figure, using consistent
deformation method.

4. Analyse the 2D frame using consistent deformation method (EI is constant).

5. Using minimum strain energy method, analyse the continuous beam shown in
figure.

CO4: Apply specific methods such as slope deflection and moment distribution
methods of structural analysis for typical structures with different
characteristics.

1. Explain briefly on the analysis of frames with sidesway, using slope deflection
method
2. Derive
ve expressions for stiffness at the near
near-end
end for a beam with hinged far-end
far

3. Analyse the continuous beam using slope deflection method (EI is constant).

.
4. Analyse the continuous beam in figure using moment distribution method (EI is
constant)
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
CO5: Apply suitable methods of analysis for various types of structures including
cables, suspension bridges and arches.

1. Write a note on three-hinged and two-hinged stiffening girders.

2. State and explain Eddy’s theorem
3. For a cable AB, the level difference between the supports A and B is 6m, and the
lowest point is at a vertical distance of 4.5m from A. If the horizontal span AB is
24m and is loaded with 7.5kN/m throughout the span, find the length of the cable,
and the minimum and maximum tension in the cable
4. A suspension bridge with 25m span and central dip 2.5m transfers 4kN per
horizontal metre to each cable. Find max and min pull in each cable, and the length
of cable
5. The span of the 3-hinged parabolic arch shown in figure is 30m and the rise is 6m.
Find BM, normal thrust, and radial shear at a section 7.5 m from the left hinge. Find
maximum BM on the arch.

CO6: Analyse the effects of moving loads on structures using influence lines.

1. State and explain the condition for absolute maximum bending moment in a simple
beam when a series of concentrated loads is moving across it
2. What are influence lines? Draw ILD for SF and BM at any intermediate section of a
simply supported beam.What are the uses of influence lines?
3. Four point loads 30kN, 40kN, 20kN and 15kN, distance between them being 2m, are
moving across a simple beam (of span 15m) from left to right with 30kN load
leading. Find position of the loads for maximum -ve SF and BM at a section 7m
from left end. Also find maximum -ve SF and BM at the section.
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
SYLLABUS

Module – 1
Statically determinate trusses: Method of joints and method of sections (simple illustrative
numerical problems only) – 4 hrs.

Deflection of statically determinate structures: Introduction and simple illustrative examples

of simple beams and cantilever beams only on: a) Method of successive integrations,b)
Moment area method and c) Castigliano’s theorem Part I– 5hrs.

Module – 2
Principle of virtual work, Betti’s theorem, Maxwell’s law of reciprocal deflections; Unit load
method for determination of deflection of statically determinate beams and trusses (simple
illustrative numerical problems only) – 4hrs.

Analysis of Statically Indeterminate Structures:

Degree of static and kinematic indeterminacies; Introduction to force and displacement

methods.

Method of consistent deformations: Analysis of beams (simple problems with one redundant,
illustration only for two-redundant problems). Concepts of effect of pre-strain, lack of fit,
temperature changes and support settlement. (No numerical problems) – 4 hrs.

Castigliano’s theorem Part II, theorem of least work. Minimum strain energy method for
analysing statically indeterminate structures (Illustrative simple examples only) – 2 hrs.

Module – 3
Slope Deflection Method: Analysis of continuous beams and portal frames without sway;
Frames with sway (illustration only); Settlement effects (illustration only) – 5 hrs.

Moment Distribution Method: Analysis of continuous beams and portal frames without
sway; Frames with sway (illustration only)– 4 hrs.

Module – 4
Cables: Analysis of forces in cables under concentrated and uniformly distributed loads;
Anchor Cable supports – 4 hrs.

Suspension Bridges: Un-stiffened suspension bridges, maximum tension in the suspension

cable and backstays, pressure on towers – 5 hrs.

Module – 5
Arches: Theory of arches – Eddy’s theorem;Analysis of three-hinged arches; Normal thrust
and radial shear due to simple cases of loading. – 4 hrs.
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Moving loads and influence lines: Introduction to moving loads - concept of influence lines -
influence lines for reaction, shear force and bending moment in simply supported beams and
over hanging beams – analysis for single concentrated load, several concentrated loads,
uniformly distributed load shorter and longer than the span – conditions for maximum
bending moment and shear force – 5 hrs.

Text Books:

1. Gere and Timoshenko, Mechanics of materials, CBS Publishers

2. Kenneth Leet, Chia M Uang & Anne M Gilbert, Fundamentals of Structural Analysis,
McGraw Hill
3. R.Vaidyanathan and P.Perumal, Comprehensive Structural Analysis Volume I & II, Laxmi
Publications (P) Ltd

References:

1. Wang C.K., Intermediate Structural Analysis, McGraw Hill

2. Aslam Kassimali., Structural Analysis, Cenage Learning
3. Chandramouli P N, Structural Analysis I –Analysis of Statically Determinate Structures,
Yes Dee Publishing Pvt Ltd.,Chennai,Tamil Nadu.
4. Devdas Menon, Structural Analysis, Narosa Publications
5. Hibbeler., Structural Analysis, Pearson Education
6. Kinney S., Indeterminate Structural Analysis, Oxford & IBH
7. M.L. Gambhir, Fundamentals of structural Mechanics and analysis, Printice Hall India
8. Reddy C.S., Indeterminate Structural Analysis, Tata McGraw Hill
9. Timoshenko S.P.& Young D.H., Theory of Structures, McGraw Hill
10.Daniel L Schodak, Structures, Pearson Education, 7e, 2014
11.Negi L. S. and Jangid R. S, Structural Analysis, Tata McGraw Hill, 1997
12.Rajasekaran S. and Sankarasubramanian G., Computational Structural Mechanics, PHI,
2008
13.S.S. Bhavikatti, Structural Analysis II, Vikas Publication Houses (P) Ltd, 2016
14.Utku S, Norris C. H & Wilbur J. B, Elementary Structural Analysis, McGraw Hill, 1990
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
Lecture Plan –Structural Analysis I

Course
No. of
Module Topic Outcomes
Lectures
addressed
1 Module I: Total lecture hours: 9
1.1 Trusses: Method of joints CO1 2
1.2 Trusses: Method of sections CO1 2
1.3 Method of successive integrations CO2 2
1.4 Moment area method CO2 2
1.5 Castigliano’s theorem Part I CO2 1
2 Module II: Total lecture hours: 9
2.1 Principle of virtual work, Betti’s theorem, Maxwell’s CO2
2
law of reciprocal deflections
2.2 Unit load method for determination of deflection of
statically determinate beams and trusses (simple CO2 2
illustrative numerical problems only)
2.3 Degree of static and kinematic indeterminacies;
CO3 1
Introduction to force and displacement methods
2.4 Method of consistent deformations: Analysis of beams
(simple problems with one redundant, illustration only CO3 2
for two-redundant problems).
2.5 Concepts of effect of pre-strain, lack of fit, temperature
changes and support settlement. (No numerical CO3 1
problems)
2.6 Castigliano’s theorem Part II, theorem of least work.
Minimum strain energy method for analyzing statically
CO3 1
indeterminate structures (Illustrative simple examples
only)
3 Module III: Total lecture hours: 9
3.1 Slope Deflection Method: Concept and derivation of
CO4 1
basic equations
3.2 Slope Deflection Method: Analysis of continuous beams
CO4 2
and portal frames without sway.
3.3 Slope Deflection Method: Frames with sway (illustration
CO4 1
only). Settlement effects (derivation only)
3.4 Moment Distribution Method: Concept and derivation of
CO4 1
basic equations
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
3.5 Moment Distribution Method: Analysis of beams and
CO4 3
frames – non sway analysis.
3.6 Moment Distribution Method: Sway analysis
CO4 1
(illustration only)
4
Module IV: Total lecture hours: 9

4.1 Cables: Analysis of forces in cables under concentrated

and uniformly distributed loads CO5 3

4.2 Anchor Cable supports CO5 1

4.3 Suspension Bridges: Un-stiffened suspension bridges,
maximum tension in the suspension cable and backstays, CO5 5
pressure on towers.
5 Module V: Total lecture hours: 9
5.1 Arches: Theory of arches – Eddy’s theorem CO5 1

5.2 Analysis of three hinged arches-Support reactions-

normal thrust and radial shear at any section of a CO5 3
parabolic arch due to simple cases of loading
5.3 Moving loads and influence lines: Introduction to
CO6 1
moving loads - concept of influence lines
5.4 Influence lines for reaction, shear force and bending
moment in simply supported beams and over hanging CO6 1
beams
5.5 Analysis single concentrated load, several concentrated
loads, uniformly distributed load shorter and longer than
CO6 3
the span. Conditions for maximum shear and bending
moment.
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
MODEL QUESTION PAPER

Reg. No.:_______________ Name:__________________________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
FIFTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code: CET301
Course Name: STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS I
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A
Answer all questions; each question carries 3 marks.
1. a) Explain the method of sections to analyse trusses.
b) State and prove Moment Area Theorem I
c) Explain the method of consistent deformations, with an example.
d) State and prove Betti’s Theorem.
e) Explain briefly on the analysis of frames with sidesway, using slope deflection
method.
f) Derive expressions for stiffness at the near-end for a beam with hinged far-end.
g) Write a note on anchor cable supports.
h) Write a note on three-hinged and two-hinged stiffening girders.
i) State and explain Eddy’s theorem.
j) State and explain the condition for absolute maximum bending moment in a simple
beam when a series of concentrated loads is moving across it.
(10×3 marks = 30 marks)

PART B
Answer one full question from each module; each full question carries 14 marks.

Module I
2. a. Find the member forces in FH and EH and EG using method of sections.

(6 marks)

b. Analyse the truss in figure using method of joints.

 CIVIL ENGINEERING
2 kN 4 kN

600 600 600 600

(8 marks)

3. a. Find the slope at A and deflection at C of the simple beamusing the method of
successive integrations. E= 2x105 N/mm2. I = 8500 cm4.

(7 marks)

b.Find the slope and deflection at B of the cantilever using moment area method. w =10
kN/m, l = 3m, E= 2x105 N/mm2, I = 8500 cm4

(7 marks)

Module II
4. a. Find the deflection at E of the truss in figure, using unit load method. Cross-sectional
areas of members are 1200mm2. E= 200 kN/mm2.

(7 marks)

bFind the deflection and slope at C for the cantilever, using unit load method. Take EI as
unity.

(7 marks)
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
5. a.Find the reaction at B for the beam shown in figure, using consistent deformation
method.

.
(7 marks)
b. Analyse the 2D frame using consistent deformation method (EI is constant).

(7 marks)

Module III
6. Analyse the continuous beam using slope deflection method (EI is constant).

(14 marks)
7. Analyse the continuous beam in figure using moment distribution method (EI is constant).

.
(14 marks)

Module IV
8. For a cable AB, the level difference between the supports A and B is 6m, and the lowest
point is at a vertical distance of 4.5m from A. If the horizontal span AB is 24m and is
loaded with 7.5kN/m throughout the span, find the length of the cable, and the minimum
and maximum tension in the cable.
(14 marks)
9. A suspension bridge with 25m span and central dip 2.5m transfers 4kN per horizontal
metre to each cable. Find max aand
nd min pull in each cable, and the length of cable. (14
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
marks)

Module V
10. The span of the 3-hinged parabolic arch shown in figure is 30m and the rise is 6m. Find
BM, normal thrust, and radial shear at a section 7.5 m from the left hinge. Find maximum
BM on the arch.

.
(14 marks)
11. a) What are influence lines? Draw ILD for SF and BM at any intermediate section of a
simply supported beam.(5 marks)
b) Four point loads 30kN, 40kN, 20kN and 15kN, distance between them being 2m, are
moving across a simple beam (of span 15m) from left to right with 30kN load leading.
Find position of the loads for maximum -ve SF and BM at a section 7m from left end.
Also find maximum -ve SF and BM at the section. (9 marks)
 DESIGN OF Year of
CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
CET303 CONCRETE Introduction
STRUCTURES PCC 3 1 0 CIVIL
4 ENGINEERING
2019

Preamble:Reinforced concrete members are designed according to the existing codes of

practice [IS 456 (2000)]. The course provides all the fundamental topics in reinforced
concrete design and enable students to design and detail reinforced concrete structural
members such as beam, slab, column and footing. The course also provides an introduction to
earthquake resistant design and detailing.
Prerequisite: CET201 Mechanics of Solids

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

Course Prescribed
Description of Course Outcome
Outcome learning level
Recall the fundamental concepts of limit state design and
Remembering/
CO1 code provisions for design of concrete members under
Understanding
bending, shear, compression and torsion.
Analyse reinforced concrete sections to determine the
CO2 Applying
ultimate capacity in bending, shear and compression.
Design and detailbeams, slab, stairs and footings using IS Applying
CO3
code provisions.
Design and detail columns using IS code and SP 16
CO4 Applying
design charts.
Explain the criteria for earthquake resistant design of
CO5 structures andductile detailing of concrete structures Understanding
subjected to seismic forces.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes (Minimum requirement)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 1 - 1 - - - - - - - - -
CO2 3 3 - - - - - - - - -
CO3 3 - 3 - - - - 2 - - - -
CO4 3 - 3 - - - - 2 - - - -
CO5 1 - 1 - - - - - - - - -
Assessment Pattern
CIVIL ENGINEERING
Continuous Assessment
Bloom’s Category Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember
Understand 10 10 30
Apply 30 30 60
Analyse 10 10 10
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration
150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question carries 14 marks and can have maximum 2
sub-divisions.

Course Level Assessment (Sample) Questions

CO1: Recall the fundamental concepts of limit state design and code provisions for
design of concrete members under bending, shear, compression and torsion.

1. Explain the term limit state design.

2. Enumerate the five limit states commonly used in limit state design and state
briefly how they are provided for in design.
3. Define the term partial safety factor as used in limit state design. Identify the
various factors and state the values recommended in IS 456
4. Explain the term 'factored load' and 'characteristic loads. Why IS 456
specifies the same partial safety factor for dead and live loads? Is it
technically correct?
5. How are the following factors incorporated in design formulae for limit
design
(a) partial safety factor for load,
(b) partial safety factor for material strength,
 (c) difference between cube strength and strength of concreteCIVIL ENGINEERING
in structure.
6. Explain the basis for the selection of partial load and safety factors by the
Code for serviceability limit states
7. Why is the partial safety factor for concrete (ɣc) greater than that for
reinforcing steel (ɣs) in the consideration of ultimate limit states?
8. Explain the necessity for specifying maximum and minimum tension steel in
reinforced beams. What are their values?
9. What is equivalent shear as applied to torsion and shear in IS 456?
10. Explain the terms balanced', 'over reinforced' and 'under reinforced' section
Explain which of these should be recommended in design. How is this
ensured in design of beams according to IS 456?
11. Why is it necessary to put a limit on the x/d allowed in singly reinforced
beams as stipulated in IS 456? Can this condition be relaxed for beams with
compression steel? Give reasons for your answer
12. What are the types of reinforcements used to resist shear? Explain the action
of difference types of shear steel in resisting shear.
13. What is meant by equivalent length of a column? Explain how column
behaviour is affected by the effective length.
14. Why is it necessary to have lateral ties in a column?
15. How does helically reinforced columns differ from tied columns in their
behaviour? In what situations would one recommend the use of helically
reinforced column?

CO2: Analyse reinforced concrete sections to determine the ultimate capacity in

bending, shear and compression.

1. A rectangular beam 250mm wide and effective depth 450 mm has 4 bars of
20mm diameter. Find the moment of resistance of the section if M20
concrete and Fe 415 grade steel are used. As per IS 456:2000 find the
limiting moment of resistance also.
2. A rectangular RC beam 230 mm wide and 420 mm effective depth is
reinforced with 2-16mm diameter bars at top and 4 – 16 mm bars at bottom.
Estimate the ultimate moment carrying capacity of the section assuming M20
concrete and Fe415 steel.
3. A rectangular beam 250mm wide and effective depth 450 mm has 4 bars of
20mm diameter. 8mm diameter two legged vertical stirrups are provided at
200 mm c/c. Determine the ultimate SF the section can resist. Assume M20
concrete and Fe415 steel.
4. A square column 300 mm x 300 mm is reinforced with 8 bars of 16 mm
diameter. Assuming M25 concrete and Fe415 steel, determine the safe axial
load carrying capacity of the column

CO3: Design and detail beams, slab, stairs and footings using IS code provisions.
 1. Design a simply supported beam of span 6m subjected to aCIVIL ENGINEERING
live load of 4 kN/m. Use
M20 concrete and Fe415 steel.
2. Design a simply supported rectangular beam to carry a superimposed load of 30kN/m
over a span of 5.5m. Assume support width as 300mm. Maximum overall depth is
restricted to 550mm. Use M20 concrete and Fe 415 grade steel.
3. Design a slab for a room of size 3mx5.5m carrying a live load of 7 kN/m2. Use M20
concrete and Fe 415 grade steel. Assume that the corners are held down. The slab is
having all the four edges discontinuous
4. Design a square isolated footing for a column of size 400mm x 400mm carrying a load
of 1500 kN under service conditions. Safe bearing capacity of soil is 200 kN/m2.Use
M20 concrete and Fe 415 grade steel.
5. Design and detail an isolated rectangular footing for a column 400 mm x 600 mm to
carry a load of 2000 kN. The SBC of the soil is 180 kN/m2.Use M20 concrete and Fe
415 grade steel
6. A dog-legged staircase for a residential flat consists of 18 steps, each of 300 mm tread
180 mm rise, with an intermediate landing 1.2 m in width at the middle. The width of
staircase is also 1.2 m. If the flights are of equal number of steps, design the staircase
detail the steel. fck = 20 N/mm² and fy = 415 N/mm2.
7. Explain the design detail of a combined rectangular footing with reinforcement
details.

CO4: Design and detail columns using IS code and SP 16 design charts.

1. Design a RCC rectangular column to carry an axial load of 1200 kN and a

moment of 70 kNm, The length of the column is 3.5m. The one end is fixed and
the other end is hinged. The width of the column is restricted to the wall thickness
of 24 cm.
2. Design a reinforced concrete column to carry an axial load of 1600 kN. Use M20
concrete and Fe415 steel. The column has unsupported length of 3m and is
effectively held in position at both the ends, but not restrained against rotation.
3. Design and detail a column under biaxial bending with the following data:
Size of column = 40 x 60cm
The column is effectively held in position at both ends but not restrained against
rotation. The unsupported length of column is 3.5m
Concrete grade = M20
Grade of Steel = Fe 415
Factored load Pu = 1900 kN
Factored Moment Mux = 150 kNm and Muy = 110kNm
4. A short column 300 mm x 600 mm is carrying an axial working load of 750 kN
and a moment of 160 kNm at an axis bisecting the depth. Design the
reinforcement required if fy = 250 N/mm2 and fck 20 N/mm2, Also sketch the
reinforcement.
CO5: Explain the criteria for earthquake resistant design CIVIL
of ENGINEERING
structures and
ductile detailing of concrete structures subjected to seismic forces.

1. What are the objectives of earthquake-resistant design of reinforced concrete

structures?
2. What are the objectives behind the special detailing provisions in IS 13920?
3. Distinguish between ordinary moment resisting frame (OMRF) and special
moment resisting frame (SMRF)
4. How do you fix the minimum width of columns of moment resisting frames in
Zone III?
5. What are the design requirements of beam-column joints?
6. What is meant by special confining reinforcement in columns of ductile frames?
7. What are the design requirements of beam-column joints in earthquake resistant
design?
 SYLLABUS

Module I
CIVIL ENGINEERING
Introduction – Limit states – Limit state of collapse in flexure – Analysis and design of singly
reinforced beams.
Module II
Analysis & design of doubly reinforced beams. Analysis of T-beams . Limit state of collapse
in shear. Bond and development length.
Module III
Design of slabs – one way and two way slabs. Design of stair case.
Module IV
Limit state of collapse – compression, Design of axially loaded short column.
Design of short columns subjected to compression and uniaxial/biaxial bending- design using
SP16 charts.
Module V
Design of isolated and combined footings.
Limit state of serviceability.
Introduction to earthquake resistant design. Codal provisions – IS 1893, IS 13920

Text Book:
1. Punmia, B. C, Jain A.K and, Jain A.K , R C C Designs, Laxmi Publications Ltd., 10e, 2015

References:
1. Pillai S.U & Menon D – Reinforced Concrete Design, Tata McGraw Hill Book Co., 2009
2.Varghese P.C, Limit State Design of Reinforced Concrete, Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd,
2008
4. Relevant IS codes (IS 456, IS 875, IS 1893,IS 13920, SP 16, SP 34)

Lecture Plan –Design of Concrete Structures

Course
No. of
Module Topic Outcomes
Lectures
addressed
1 Module I : Total lecture hours : 9
1.1 Introduction – Principles of Limit state method of design,
Introduction to BIS code- Types of limit states-
CO1 2
characteristic and design values-partial safety factors-
types of loads and their factors.
1.2 Limit State of Collapse by flexure -assumptions-stress-
CO1 2
strain relationship of steel and concrete-
 1.3 Analysis of singly reinforced rectangular beams-
balanced-under reinforced-over reinforced sections- CO2 2
moment of resistance codal provisions CIVIL ENGINEERING
1.4 Design of singly reinforced rectangular beams- basic
CO3 1
rules for design-.
1.5 Design example of simply supported beam- design of
CO3 2
cantilever beam-detailing
2 Module II : Total lecture hours : 9
2.1 Analysis of doubly reinforced beams CO2 1
2.2 Design of doubly reinforced beams –detailing, CO3 1
2.3 T-beams- terminology- Formulae for analysis of T
CO1,CO2 2
beams- examples –
2.4 Limit state of collapse in shear and bond- shear stresses in
beams-types of reinforcement-shear strength of RC beam- CO1 2
IS code recommendations for shear design-
2.5 Design of shear reinforcement-examples CO3 1
2.6 Bond and development length - anchorage for
reinforcement bars - code recommendations regarding CO1,
1
curtailment of reinforcement CO3

2.7 Design for torsion-IS code approach- examples CO3 1

3 Module III : Total lecture hours : 10
3.1 Design of slabs- introduction- one-way and two-way
CO1,CO3 1
action of slabs - load distribution in a slab-
3.2 IS recommendations for design of slabs- design of one-
way slab- numerical problems – concepts of detailing of CO1,CO3 2
continuous slab –code coefficients.
3.3 Two- way slabs- simply supported design using IS Code
CO1,CO3 2
coefficients Reinforcement detailing
3.4 Two- way slabs- restrained slabs – design using IS Code
CO1,CO3 2
coefficients Reinforcement detailing
3.5 Stair cases- Types-proportioning-loads- distribution of
loads – codal provisions –Concepts of tread-riser type CO1,CO3 1
stairs (detailing only)
3.6 Design and detailing of dog legged stair- CO1,CO3 2
4 Module IV : Total lecture hours : 9
4.4 Columns- introduction –classification- effective length-
short column - long column - reinforcement-IS
CO1,CO4 1
specifications regarding columns- limit state of collapse:
compression -
4.5 Design of axially loaded short columns-design examples CO4 2
 with rectangular ties
4.6 Design of axially loaded short columns-design examples
with helical reinforcement CIVILCO4 2
ENGINEERING
5.1 Analysis and design of short columns subjected to
compression and uniaxial bending- design using SP16 CO4 2
charts for limit state
5.2 Analysis and design of short columns subjected to
combined axial load and biaxial bending moments-code
CO2,CO4 2
procedure for design- design using SP16 charts for limit
state
5 Module V : Total lecture hours : 11
5.3 Foundations- classification-IS code provisions for design
CO1, CO3 2
of isolated footings-
5.4 Design principles of rectangular footings- detailing. CO1, CO3 2
5.5 Combined footings (design principles only)- analysis of
CO1, CO3 2
combined footings-rectangular and trapezoidal.
4.1 Limit state of serviceability - limit state of deflection-
CO1 1
short term and long term deflection-
4.2 Limit state of serviceability - IS code recommendations-
limit state of cracking- estimation of crack width- simple CO1 2
numerical examples
4.3 Introduction to earthquake resistant design, Importance of
Ductility in Seismic Design, Major Design
CO5 2
Considerations, Codal provisions – IS 1893, IS 13920
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
CIVIL ENGINEERING
Reg. No.:_______________ Name:__________________________
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
FIFTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code: CET303
Course Name: Design of Concrete Structures
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A
Answer all questions; each question carries 3 marks.
1. a) Derive the limiting values of depth of neutral axis for different grades of steel
b) Define characteristic strength & partial safety factor for materials. Why is partial safety
factor for material high for concrete than steel?
c) Explain the term development length and explain its significance in RC design.
obtain the expression for it
d) Explain why and how shear reinforcement is provided in beams
e) Explain the difference in the behaviour of one-way and two-way slabs. Why it is
essential to provide corner reinforcement in two way rectangular slabs whose corners
are prevented from lifting up?
f) What is meant by stair supported on landings? Explain the codal provision for the
effective span of the stair slab in such cases?
g) What are the objectives behind the special detailing provisions in IS 13920?
h) Compare the behaviour of tied columns with spiral column subject to axial loading.
i) Explain how interaction curves are used in the design of column
j) Explain at what situations a combined footing is recommended.
(10×3 marks = 30 marks)

PART B
Answer one full question from each module; each full question carries 14 marks.

Module I
2. (a) Explain balanced, under reinforced and over reinforced sections in the context of Limit
State Design of Reinforced Concrete structures.(4 marks)
(b) A rectangular beam 250mm wide and effective depth 450 mm has 4 bars of 20mm
diameter. Find the moment of resistance of the section if M20 concrete and Fe 415 grade
steel are used. As per IS 456:2000 find the limiting moment of resistance also. (10 marks)
3. (a) Explain the term Limit State. Enumerate the different limit states to be considered in
reinforced concrete design. (4 marks)
(b).Design and detail an RC rectangular section subjected to a udl of 15 kN/m over the
entire span. Clear span is 5m. The beam is supported on masonry walls, 230 mm thick on
 both sides. Assume moderate exposure conditions. Use M 25 grade concrete and Fe 415
grade steel.(10 marks)
CIVIL ENGINEERING
Module II
4. (a) Enumerate the situations in which a doubly reinforced section become necessary. Derive
expression for the ultimate moment of resistance of doubly reinforced section Explain.
(4 marks)

(b) Determine the ultimate moment of resistance of a doubly reinforced rectangular section
of width 300 mm and overall depth 700 mm reinforced with 4 – 25mm diameter bars on
tension side and 2 – 25mm diameter bars on compression side. Assume effective cover of
45 mm on both sides. Use M 20 concrete and Fe 415 steel.(10 marks)

5. (a) The provision of minimum stirrup reinforcement is mandatory in all reinforced concrete
beams. Why?(2 marks)
(b) Determine the ultimate moment of resistance of an isolated beam of T-shaped cross-
section having a span of 6m and cross sectional dimensions are flange width of 1000mm,
flange thickness of 100mm, web width of 250mm and an effective depth of 520mm, having
tension reinforcement of 6 x 28mm diameter bars. The materials used are concrete mix of
grade M20 and mild steel of grade Fe 415. (12 marks)

Module III
6. (a) Distinguish between one way slab and two way slab. (2 marks)
(b) Design and detail a simply supported slab for a room of interior dimension 5m x 4m
subjected to an imposed load of 8 kN/m2. Thickness of supporting wall is 230 mm. Use M
20 concrete and Fe 415 grade steel.(12 marks)
7. (a) Explain the behavior of two way slabs and also the need of corner reinforcement in two
way rectangular slabs whose corners are prevented from lifting.(3 marks)
(b) Design a staircase to be provided in a residential building in two straight opposite flights
of 1.0m width connected by a landing for a floor height of 3.3m. The landing which is 1m
wide spans in the same direction as the stair slab. The rise and tread shall be 150mm and
270mm respectively. The weight of finishes 1kN/m2, live load =3kN/m2. M20 concrete &
Fe415 steel are to be used.(11 marks)

Module IV
8. (a)Classify the columns separately based on loadings and slenderness ratios.(4 marks)
b)Design a reinforced concrete column to carry an axial load of 1600 kN. Use M20 concrete
and Fe415 steel. The column has unsupported length of 3m and is effectively held in
position at both the ends, but not restrained against rotation.(10 marks)
9. a)Draw four typical strain profiles of a short, rectangular and symmetrically
reinforced concrete column causing collapse subjected to different pairs of Pu and Mu when
the depths of the neutral axis are (i) less than the depth of column D, (ii) equal to the depth
of column D, (iii) D <xu< ∞ and (iv) xu = ∞. Explain the behaviour of column for each of
the four strain profiles. (4 marks)
 (b) Design a RCC rectangular column to carry an axial load of 1200 kN and a moment of 70
kNm, The length of the column is 3.5m. The one end is fixed and the other end is hinged.
CIVIL
The width of the column is restricted to the wall thickness of 24 ENGINEERING
cm.(10 marks)

Module V
10. (a) Design a footing for a 400 mm x 400 mm column to carry a load of 100 kN with
foundation resting on a soil of SBC 120 kN/m2.Assume M20 concrete and Fe415 steel. (8
marks)
(b) What are the objectives of earthquake-resistant design of reinforced concrete structures?
What are the design requirements of beam-column joints in earthquake resistant design?
(6 marks)
11. (a) Explain the different types of shallow footings.(2 marks)
(b) Design an isolated rectangular footing for a column 450 mm x 600 mm to carry a load
of 2400 kN. The SBC of the soil is 180 kN/m2.Use M20 concrete and Fe 415 grade steel.
(10 marks)
*********************
 Year of
CET GEOTECHNICAL CATEGORY L T P CIVIL ENGINEERING
CREDIT
Introduction
305 ENGINEERING - II
PCC 4 0 0 4 2019

Preamble: Goal of this course is to impart to the students, in-depth knowledge about the basic
concepts and theories of foundation engineering. After this course, students will be able to recognize
practical problems of foundations in real-world situations and respond accordingly.

Prerequisite : Geotechnical Engineering - I

Course Outcomes: After completion of the course the student will be able to:

CO 1 Understand soil exploration methods

Explain the basic concepts, theories and methods of analysis in foundation
CO 2
engineering
CO 3 Calculate bearing capacity, pile capacity, foundation settlement and earth pressure

CO 4 Analyze shallow and deep foundations

CO 5 Solve the field problems related to geotechnical engineering

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes (Minimum requirement)

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
CO 1 3 - - 3 - - - - - - - -
CO 2 3 - - - - - - - - - - -
CO 3 2 3 - - - - - - - - - -
CO 4 2 2 3 - - - - - - - - -
CO 5 3 3 - - - - - - - - - -

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester

Bloom’s Category
Test 1 (Marks) Test 2 (Marks) Examination (Marks)
Remember 5 5 10
Understand 10 10 20
Apply 25 25 50
Analyse 10 10 20
Evaluate
Create
Mark Distribution
CIVIL ENGINEERING

Total Marks CIE Marks ESE Marks ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)Pattern :

Attendance : 10 Marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 Marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 Marks

End Semester Examination (ESE)Pattern : There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contains 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students
should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should
answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

(Questions may be framed based on the outline given under each course outcome)
Course Outcome 1 (CO1):
1. Understand Soil Investigation and Soil Exploration methods
Course Outcome 2 (CO2):
1. Explain the bearing capacity theory of shallow foundations
2. Explain the basic concepts and theory of settlement calculations of shallow foundations
3. Explain the concepts and theory of pile capacity
4. Explain the earth pressure theories for cohesionless and cohesive soils
Course Outcome 3 (CO3):
1. Calculate the bearing capacity of shallow foundations
2. Calculate pile capacity
3. Calculate the settlement of footings
4. Calculate the earth pressure acting on retaining walls

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Analyze and design shallow foundations
2. Analyze deep foundations

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Solve the field problems related to different types of shallow and deep foundations, retaining
walls, etc.
 SYLLABUS
CIVIL ENGINEERING
Module 1
Earth pressure : Earth pressure - At rest, active and passive earth pressures - Practical examples
Rankine’s theory – Earth pressure and point of application for cohesionless and cohesive soils -
Influence of surcharge and water table on earth pressure - Numerical problems - Earth pressure with
layered backfill - Numerical problems - Coulomb’s theory [no derivation required] – Comparison of
Rankine’s and Coulomb’s theory
Foundation – General Considerations : Functions of foundations - definition of shallow and deep
foundation - Selection of type of foundation - Different types of shallow foundations - advantages
and limitations of various types of shallow foundations

Module 2
Bearing capacity of shallow foundations: Gross and Net bearing pressure - Ultimate and Safe
bearing capacity - Failure mechanism - Allowable soil pressure - Terzaghi’s bearing capacity theory
for strip footing [no derivation required] – Assumptions – Bearing capacity factors - Numerical
problems - Terzaghi’s formulae for circular and square footings - Numerical problems - Factors
affecting bearing capacity - Effect of water table on bearing capacity - Numerical problems -
General, local and punching shear failure - Skempton’s formula – Numerical problems

Module 3
Settlement analysis: Introduction- causes of settlement – estimation of immediate settlement –
Numerical problems - Allowable settlement-Maximum and differential settlements as per Indian
standard - Field test - Plate load test – Procedure, uses and limitations
Footings :Principles of design of footings – strip/continuous and individual footings - Numerical
Problems - Combined footings- Rectangular and Trapezoidal combined footings - Numerical
problems - Footings subjected to eccentric loading
Raft foundations: Types – Principles of design of raft foundation- Bearing capacity equations for
raft on sand (Teng’s equation based on SPT value) and for raft on clay (Skempton’s formula) -
Floating foundations - conventional design procedure for rigid mat.

Module 4
Pile foundations: uses of piles - classification of piles - determination of type and length of piles -
Bearing capacity of single pile in clay and sand [I.S. Static formulae] - Numerical problems -
Dynamic formulae (Modified Hiley formulae only) – Numerical Problems - I.S. Pile load test
[conventional] - Negative skin friction - Group action - Group efficiency - Capacity of Pile groups -
Numerical problems
Well foundation : Elements of a well foundation – construction details of well foundations -
Problems encountered in well sinking – Methods to rectify tilts and shifts

Module 5
Site investigation and soil exploration: objectives - planning - reconnaissance - Guidelines for
choosing spacing and depth of borings [I.S. guidelines only]- Methods of subsurface exploration -
test pits - Auger borings – Wash Boring - Rotary drilling - Standard Penetration Test – procedure and
correlations - Corrections for SPT value – Numerical Problems - Sampling - disturbed samples,
undisturbed samples and chunk samples - types of samplers - Sampler parameters - Boring log - Soil
profile- Location of Water table - Geophysical methods : Seismic Refraction method and Electrical
Resistivity method (in brief).
CIVIL ENGINEERING
Text Books:

1. Ranjan G. and A. S. R. Rao, Basic and Applied Soil Mechanics, New Age International,
2002.
2. Arora K. R., Geotechnical Engineering, Standard Publishers, 2006.
References:
1. Das B. M., Principles of Geotechnical Engineering, Cengage India Pvt. Ltd., 2010.
2. Venkatramaiah, Geotechnical Engg, Universities Press, 2000.
3. Terzaghi K. and R. B. Peck, Soil Mechanics in Engineering Practice, John Wiley, 1967.
4. A V Narasimha Rao and C Venkatramaiah, Numerical Problems, Examples and Objective
questions in Geotechnical Engineering, Universities Press (India) Ltd., 2000
5. Purushothamaraj P., Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering, Dorling Indersley(India)
Pvt. Ltd., 2013
6. Taylor D.W., Fundamentals of Soil Mechanics, Asia Publishing House, 1948.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule:

Modul Outcomes
Contents Hours
e Addressed
1 Module 1 9
1.1 Earth pressure : Earth pressure - At rest, active and passive earth CO 2 & CO 5
1
pressures - Practical examples
1.2 Rankine’s theory – Earth pressure and point of application for CO 2
1
cohesionless and cohesive soils
1.3 Influence of surcharge and water table on earth pressure - CO 2 & CO 3
2
Numerical problems
1.4 Earth pressure with layered backfill - Numerical problems CO 2 & CO 3 2
1.5 Coulomb’s theory [no derivation required] – Comparison of CO 2
1
Rankine’s and Coulomb’s theory
1.6 Foundation – General Considerations: Functions of foundations CO 4 & CO 5 1
- definition of shallow and deep foundation - Selection of type of
foundation
1.7 Different types of shallow foundations- advantages and limitations CO 4 & CO 5 1
of various types of shallow foundations
2 Module 2 9
2.1 Bearing capacity of shallow foundations: Gross and Net bearing CO 2 1
pressure - Ultimate and Safe bearing capacity
2.2 Failure mechanism - Allowable soil pressure CO 2 1
 2.3 Terzaghi’s bearing capacity theory for strip footing [no derivation CO 2 1
required] – Assumptions – Bearing capacity factors
CIVIL ENGINEERING
2.4 Numerical problems CO 3 1
2.5 Terzaghi’s formulae for circular and square footings - Numerical CO 2 & CO 3 1
problems
2.6 Factors affecting bearing capacity - Effect of water table on CO 2 1
bearing capacity
2.7 Numerical problems CO 3 1
2.8 General, local and punching shear failure CO 2 & CO 3 1
2.9 Skempton’s formula – Numerical problems CO 2 & CO 3 1
3 Module 3 9
3.1 Settlement analysis: Introduction- causes of settlement – CO 2 & CO 3 1
estimation of immediate settlement – Numerical problems
3.2 Allowable settlement-Maximum and differential settlements as per CO 2 & CO 5 1
Indian standard
3.3 Field test - Plate load test – Procedure, uses and limitations CO 3 & CO 5 1
3.4 Footings :Principles of design of footings – strip/continuous and CO 4 1
individual footings - Numerical Problems
3.5 Combined footings- Rectangular and Trapezoidal combined CO 4 1
footings
3.6 Numerical problems CO 4 1
3.7 Footings subjected to eccentric loading CO 4 1
3.8 Raft foundations: Types – Principles of design of raft foundation- CO 3 & CO 4 1
Bearing capacity equations for raft on sand (Teng’s equation based
on SPT value) and for raft on clay (Skempton’s formula)
3.9 Floating foundations - conventional design procedure for rigid mat. CO 2 & CO 4 1
4 Module 4 9
4.1 Pile foundations: Uses of piles - classification of piles - CO 2 & CO 5 1
determination of type and length of piles
4.2 Bearing capacity of single pile in clay and sand [I.S. Static CO 2 1
formulae]
4.3 Numerical problems CO 3 1
4.4 Dynamic formulae (Modified Hiley formulae only) – Numerical CO 2 & CO 3 1
Problems
4.5 I.S. Pile load test [conventional] CO 5 1
4.6 Negative skin friction - Group action - Group efficiency CO 2 1
4.7 Capacity of Pile groups - Numerical problems CO 3 & CO 4 1
4.8 Well foundation : Elements of a well foundation – construction CO 2 & CO 5 1
details of well foundations
 4.9 Problems encountered in well sinking – Methods to rectify tilts and CO 2 & CO 5
1
shifts
CIVIL ENGINEERING
5 Module 5 9
5.1 Site investigation and soil exploration: objectives - planning - CO 1 1
reconnaissance
5.2 Guidelines for choosing spacing and depth of borings [I.S. CO 1 1
guidelines only]
5.3 methods of subsurface exploration - test pits - Auger borings – CO 1 1
Wash Boring - Rotary drilling
5.4 Standard Penetration Test – procedure and correlations CO 1 1
5.5 Corrections for SPT value – Numerical Problems CO 1 1
5.6 Sampling - disturbed samples, undisturbed samples and chunk CO 1 1
samples
5.7 types of samplers - Sampler parameters CO 1 1
5.8 Boring log - soil profile- Location of Water table CO 1
5.9 Geophysical methods: Seismic Refraction method and Electrical CO 1 1
Resistivity method (in brief).
Model Question Paper
QP CODE: CIVIL ENGINEERING
Reg No.:_______________ Name:__________________________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

FIFTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: CET305

Course Name :GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING - II

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 hours

Part A
(Answer all questions; each question carries 3 marks)

1. List the assumptions of Rankine’s theory of earth pressure.

2. Explain the situations in which combined footings are provided.
3. Write the assumptions of Terzaghi’s method for bearing capacity.
4. Explain the factors affecting bearing capacity.
5. Explain Allowable settlement.
6. Explain floating foundation.
7. Explain negative skin friction.
8. List the elements of a well foundation.
9. List Objectives of soil exploration.
10. Define (i) Inside clearance, (ii) Outside clearance and (iii) Area ratio as applied to sampler.

PART B
(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module – 1
17. (a) Explain different types of earth pressures with practical examples. (6 Marks)
(b) A wall of 8m height retains a non-cohesive layered backfill. Top 3 m soil is having γ =
18kN/m3 and φ =30°. Bottom 5 m soil is having γ = 17.5 kN/m3 and φ =28°. Using Rankine’s
theory, find the total active thrust on the wall and the point of application. (8 Marks)
18. (a) A 6m high retaining wall with vertical back supports soil which is in level with the top of
retaining wallcarries a uniform surcharge load of 20kPa. Backfill properties are c = 5 kN/m2,
γ = 18.5 kN/m3, φ = 30°. Determine Rankine’s passive earth pressure on the retaining wall.
(6 Marks)
(b) A 6m high retaining wall with vertical back supports soil which is in level with the top of
retaining wall. Backfill properties are c = 5 kN/m2,γ = 18 kN/m3,φ = 30°. Find the maximum
depth up to which excavation can safely be done without the sides caving in? Also determine
Rankine’s active earth pressure on the retaining wall before the formation of tension crack.
(8 Marks)
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
Module – 2
11. (a) Differentiate between General shear failure and local shear failure. (6 Marks)
(b) A strip footing of 2.0 m wide is to be founded at a depth of 1.6 m in a soil with following data:
= 19 kN/m3 ; c = 10 kN/m2 ; = 400
Nc = 95.7 ; Nq = 81.3 ; N= 100.4
Determine the safe bearing capacity with a FS of 3, when
i) Water table is at great depth
ii) Water table is at a depth of 1.0 m from ground level.
iii) Water table is at a depth of 3.0 m from ground level. (8 Marks)
12. (a) A Circular footing rests in pure clay with unconfined compressive strength qu = 200 kN/m2 at
a depth of 1.5 m. Using Skempton’s method, determine the diameter of footing if it has to
transmit a net load of 1000 kN. Take FS = 3. (6 Marks)
(b) A square footing 2m x 2m is at a depth of 1.5 m in a soil with c = 30 kN/m2, φ = 35°, (Nc =
57.8, Nq = 41.4 and Nγ = 42.4). Takeγ = 18 kN/m3. Calculate the net safe load that can be
carried by footing. (8 Marks)

Module – 3
13. (a) A rectangular surface footing 2m x 3m carries a column load of 600 kN. The footing rests on
a c-φ soil strata 6 m thick having µ = 0.25 and E as 5000 kN/m2. Calculate the immediate
settlement of footing assuming the influence factor If = 1.36. (6 Marks)
(b) Explain Plate Load Test with neat sketch. List the limitations of plate load test. (8 Marks)
16. (a) What are the different types of raft foundations? Under what circumstances raft foundations
are preferred? (6 Marks)
(b) Design a rectangular combined footing for uniform pressure for the column loads of 1000 kN
and 1500 kN at column A and B respectively. Projection of footing beyond centre line of
column A is restricted to 0.5 m. Distance of c/c of columns is 5 m. Net Allowable pressure =
150 kN/m2.
Design a suitable combined footing if projection beyond centre line of both columns
restricted to 0.5 m. (8 Marks)

Module – 4
19. (a) Explain the classification of pile foundations based on installation. (6 Marks)
(b) A RCC pile weighs 25 kN is driven by drop hammer weighing 35 kN, having effective fall of
0.85 m. Average set/blow is 1.3 cm. Take elastic compression as 1.6 cm. Assuming
coefficient of restitution as 0.25. Find ultimate and safe load on pile by assuming factor of
safety of 2.5. (8 Marks)
20. (a) Explain any three methods (with neat sketches) for rectification of tilts in a well foundation.
(6 Marks)
(b) A bored pile in a clayey soil is 50 cm diameter and 10 m long, determine the capacity of a 3X3
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

pile group spaced 1 m centre to centre both ways. Take Cu = 70 kN/m2 and α = 0.6.
(8 Marks)
Module – 5

14. (a) Explain Augur boring and wash boring methods used in soil exploration. (6 Marks)
(b) Explain Standard Penetration Test? How this is correlated with shear strength parameters?
What are the corrections to the observed SPT (N) value? (8 Marks)
15. (a) A SPT is conducted in a sand deposit at a depth of 16 m. Water table is at 7 m below ground
level. Unit weight of sand is 18 kN/m3 above water table and 19 kN/m3 below water table. If
N value is 36, find the corrected N value. (6 Marks)
(b) Explain Geophysical Exploration using Seismic Refraction Method. What are its limitations?
(8 Marks)
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

HYDROLOGY & WATER Year of

CET Category L T P Credit
RESOURCES Introduction
307
ENGINEERING PCC 4 0 0 4 2019

Preamble: The general objective of this course is to expose the students to the fundamental concepts of
surface and groundwater components of hydrology and basics of water resources engineering. The
course aim to impart the knowledge on the availability of water on hydrosphere, its distribution and
quantification, scientific methods for computing irrigation water requirements, reservoir engineering and
river engineering

Pre-requisite: NIL

Course outcome

After the course, the student will be able to:

Describe and estimate the different components of hydrologic cycle by processing hydro-
CO1
meteorological data
Determine the crop water requirements for the design of irrigation canals by recollecting
CO2
the principles of irrigation engineering
Perform the estimation of streamflow and/or describe the river behavior and control
CO3
structures
Describe and apply the principles of reservoir engineering to estimate the capacity of
CO4
reservoirs and their useful life
Demonstrate the principles of groundwater engineering and apply them for computing the
CO5 yield of aquifers and wells

CO - PO Mapping

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
Water Resources
Hydrology and

CO1 3 3 1 1
CET307

CO2 3 3 1
CO3 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 1
CO5 3 3 1
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Assessment pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests

Bloom’s
Test 1 Test 2 End Semester Examination
Category
(Marks) (Marks) (Marks)
Remember 5 5 15
Understand 10 10 15
Apply 20 20 40
Analyze 15 15 30
Evaluate
Create

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks
Total : 50 marks

End semester examination pattern – There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each
question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each
module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-
divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Code: CET 307

Hydrology and Water Resources Engineering
(Course Level Assessment Questions)

Describe and estimate the different components of hydrologic cycle by processing

CO1
hydro-meteorological data
1 Differentiate rainfall mass curve and hyetograph
2 Explain the use of double ring infiltration for infiltration measurement
3 Explain any three methods for baseflow separation

4 Explain the limitations of unit hydrograph theory

A storm with 10 cm of precipitation produced a direct runoff of 5.8 cm. The duration of the
5 rainfall was 16 hrs and its time distribution is given below : (10 Marks)
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Time from 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
start (h)
Cumulative 0 0.4 1.3 2.8 5.1 6.9 8.5 9.5 10
rainfall
(cm)
Determine the φ -index of the storm.

The ordinates of a 4-hour unit hydrograph for a particular basin are given below.
Determine the ordinates of the 6-hour unit hydrograph.

Time 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
6 (hrs)

Discharge 0 25 100 160 190 170 110 70 30 20 16 1.5 0

(Cumecs)

Determine the crop water requirements for the design of irrigation canals by
CO2 recollecting the principles of irrigation engineering

1 Explain the factors affecting duty. Explain how can you improve the duty
2 Define duty and delta. Obtain the relation between the two
3 Define the different types of irrigation efficiencies
The following data pertaining to healthy growth of a crop: Root zone depth = 75 cm Field
capacity = 27 %, Wilting point=14 % Dry density of soil=1500 kg/m3. Daily consumptive
4 use =11 mm. Assuming 80 % depletion of available moisture as an indicator for
application of water, determine how long the crop survive without irrigation

The CCA for a distributary is 15000 ha. The intensity of irrigation for Rabi is 40 % and for
Kharif is 15 %. If the total water requirement of the two crops is 37.5 cm and 120 cm and
5 their periods of growth are 160 days and 140 days respectively, determine the design
discharge at the outlet.
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Perform the estimation of streamflow and/or describe the river behavior and control
CO3 structures

1 Explain Meandering. What are the causes of meandering ?

2 Explain the objectives of providing river training works

3 Enlist the factors affecting the selection of site for stream gauging station

The data pertaining to a stream gauging operation at a gauging station are given below.
The rating equation of the current meter is v = 0.32 N s + 0.032 m/sec where Ns is the
number of revolutions per second. Compute the discharge in the stream by area velocity
method

Distance from 0 2 4 6 9 12 15 18 20 22 23 24
left water edge
(m)

4 Depth (m) 0 0.5 1.1 1.95 2.25 1.85 1.75 1.65 1.5 1.25 0.75 0

Revolutions of 0 80 83 131 139 121 114 109 92 85 70 0

current meter
kept at 0.6
depth

Duration of 0 180 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120
observation
(s)

5 Describe with sketches different type of groynes

Describe and apply the principles of reservoir engineering to estimate the capacity of
CO4 reservoirs and their useful life

1 Define safe yield, secondary yield and design yield of reservoirs

2 Explain mass inflow curve and mass demand curve

3 Explain with a neat sketch the zones of a storage reservoir

4 Explain the procedure for estimating the life of storage reservoir
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

The average annual discharge of a river for 11 years is given below

Year 1960 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70

5 Discharge 1750 2650 3010 2240 2630 3200 1000 950 1200 4150 3500
(m3/sec)

Determine the storage capacity of a reservoir required to meet a demand of 2000 cumec
throughout the year by mass curve method.

Demonstrate the principles of groundwater engineering and apply them for

CO5 computing the yield of aquifers and wells

1 State Darcy’s law and its limitations

2 Enlist the assumptions in the derivation of Dupuit’s equation
3 Differentiate perched aquifer and leaky aquifer

4 Describe the working of strainer type tube well with a sketch

Pumping at the rate of 1500 litres per minute from a 30cm diameter well of depth 60m in
an unconfined aquifer gives a drawdown of 2m and 1.1m in observation wells located
5
at distances 120m and 160m respectively from it. Calculate the drawdown of the pumping
well and the coefficient of permeability of the aquifer.
During a recuperation test conducted on an open well in a region, the water level in the
well was depressed by 3 m and it was observed to rise by 1.75 m in 75 minutes.
6 (a) What is the specific yield of open wells in that region (b) What will be the yield from a
well of 5 m diameter under a depression head of 2.5 m ? (c) What diameter should be the
diameter of the well to give a yield of 12 l/sec under a depression head of 2 m ?
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Course Code: CET 307

Hydrology and Water Resources Engineering
Syllabus

Module I

Hydrologic cycle-precipitation-mechanism, types, forms and measurement using rain gauges ;

Optimum number of rain gauges, representation of rainfall data-mass curve and hyetograph,
computation of mean precipitation over a catchment, Design rainfall - probable maximum
rainfall; IDF curves (conceptual idea only). Infiltration-measurement by double ring
infiltrometer, Horton’s model, infiltration indices. Evaporation –measurement and control

Module II

Runoff-components of runoff- Hydrograph analysis-Hydrograph from isolated storm-Base flow

separation. Unit hydrograph – uses, assumptions and limitations of unit hydrograph theory.
Computation of storm/flood hydrograph of different duration by method of superposition and by
development of S– Hydrograph; Floods-methods of design flood estimation –Empirical methods;
SPF and PMF, Return period (conceptual ideas only)

Module III

Irrigation– Necessity, Benefits and ill effects. Types: flow and lift irrigation - perennial and
inundation irrigation. Soil-water –plant relationships. Irrigation efficiencies, Computation of
crop water requirement: depth and frequency of Irrigation. Duty and delta, duty-factors affecting
and method of improving duty, Computation of crop water requirement by using the concept of
duty and delta

Module IV

Streamflow measurement-area velocity method of stream gauging, selection of site for stream
gauging station, Stage-discharge curve, flow duration curve-uses and characteristics. River
training works-types; Meandering and meander parameters; Reservoirs- types, zones, yield of
reservoir; determination of storage capacity and yield by mass curve method; Reservoir
sedimentation and control- trap efficiency- computation of life of reservoir

Module V

Vertical distribution of ground water- classification of saturated formation (review) Aquifer

properties, Darcy’s law, Well hydraulics-Steady radial flow into a fully penetrating well in
Confined and Unconfined aquifers; Types of wells, Types of tube wells; well losses; Yield of
open wells-pumping test and recuperation test
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Text Books:
1. Modi P. N. Irrigation, Water Resources and Water Power Engineering, S.B.H
Publishers and Distributors New Delhi 2009.
2. Punmia B.C. Ashok K Jain, Arun K Jain, B. B. L Pande, Irrigation and Water
Power
Engineering, Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd. 2009

References:
3. VenTe Chow. Hand book of Applied Hydrology, Tata McGraw Hill, 1988
4. Todd D. K. Ground Water Hydrology, Wiley, 2005.
5. H.M Raghunath. Groundwater. New Age International New Delhi 2007
6. G.L.Asawa. Irrigation and Water Resources Engineering New Age International New
Delhi 2008
7. Garg S. K. Hydrology and Water Resources Engineering, Khanna Publishers New Delhi
2005.
8. Garg SK, Irrigation Engineering and Hydraulic Structures Khanna Publishers New Delhi
2006.
9. Subramanya K. Engineering Hydrology, Tata McGraw Hill, 2013.
10. Raghunath H.M. Hydrology: Principles, Analysis and Design. New Age International
New Delhi 2006.

Course Code: CET 307

Hydrology and Water Resources Engineering
(Course plan)
Course
No of
Module Topic outcome
Hours
addressed
Module I (11 Hours)

1.1 Hydrology-Hydrologic cycle CO1 1

1.2 Precipitation- mechanism, types, forms CO1 1
1.3 Measurements of rainfall- Use of rain gauges CO1 1
Representation of rainfall data-Rainfall Mass curve, hyetograph;
1.4 CO1 1
Optimum number of rain gauges
1.5 Estimation of missing precipitation CO1 1
1.6 Computation of mean precipitation CO1 1
1.7, 1.8 Problems CO1 2
1.9 Design rainfall - probable maximum rainfall; IDF curves CO1 1
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

(conceptual idea only).

Water losses-Infiltration-measurement by double ring
1.10 CO1 1
infiltrometer, Horton’s equation; concept of infiltration indices
Evaporation-measurement by IMD land pan, control of
1.11 CO1 1
evaporation
Module II (9 Hours)
Runoff- Components, factors affecting runoff, Computation of
2.1 CO1 1
runoff by different methods.
Runoff computation by rational formula and from infiltration
2.2 CO1 1
indices
Hydrograph analysis-Hydrograph from isolated storm-Base
2.3 CO1 1
flow separation
2.4 Concept of unit hydrograph-assumptions, uses, applications CO1 1
Computation of storm/flood hydrograph ordinates of different
2.5 CO1 1
duration by method of superposition
Computation of storm/flood hydrograph ordinates of different
2.6 CO1 1
duration by development of S– Hydrograph
2.7,2.8 Problems CO1 2
Floods-methods of design flood estimation –Empirical methods;
2.9 CO1 1
SPF and PMF, Return period (conceptual ideas only)
Module III (7 Hours)
3.1 Irrigation-Benefits and ill effects, lift and flow irrigation CO2 1
3.2 Types of irrigation, Irrigation efficiencies CO2 1
3.3 Soil water plant relationships CO2 1
Computation of crop water requirement: depth and frequency of
3.4 CO2 1
Irrigation
3.5 Duty and delta-Factors affecting and method of improving duty CO2 1
Estimation of crop water requirement by using the concepts of
3.6 CO2 1
duty and delta
3.7 Problems CO2 1
Module IV (11 Hours)
4.1 Streamflow measurement- measurement of stage and velocity CO3 1
Stage-discharge curve- Selection of site for stream gauging
4.2 CO3 1
station,
4.3 Computation of discharge (Area-velocity method)-problem CO3 1
4.4 Flow duration curves-uses and characteristics CO3 1
River behavior-meandering-meander parameters, Objectives
4.5 CO3 1
of river training
4.6 Types of river training works CO3 1
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

4.7 Reservoirs- types, zones, yield of reservoir CO4 1

4.8 Storage capacity and yield-by mass curve method CO4 1
Reservoir sedimentation-control of sedimentation, trap
4.9 CO4 1
efficiency
4.10 Useful life of reservoir-computation. CO4 1
4.11 Problems CO4 1
Module V (7 Hours)
Vertical distribution of ground water - classification of
5.1 CO5 1
saturated formation (Review)
5.2 Aquifer properties- Darcy’s law CO5 1
5.3 Steady radial flow to a well-unconfined aquifers CO5 1
5.4 Steady radial flow to a well-unconfined aquifers CO5 1
5.5 Problems CO5 1
Types of wells-open wells and tube well, Types of tube wells
5.6 CO5 1
- description
Estimation of yield of an open well- pumping test and
5.7 CO5 1
recuperation test
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Pages: 3

Model Question Paper

Reg No.:………………….. QP
CODE:………………..

Name:………………………………………

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

FIFTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: CET 307

Hydrology and Water Resources Engineering

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3
hours

Part A
(Answer all questions; each question carries 3 marks)
1. Explain the different forms of precipitation
2. What are the methods of control of evaporation from water bodies?
3. Define unit hydrograph. Explain its uses
4. State the limitations of rational formula for runoff estimation
5. Explain irrigation efficiencies
6. Define duty and delta. Obtain the relation between the two
7. Enlist the factors to be considered in the selection of site for a stream gauging
station
8. Explain meandering of rivers
9. Define (i) Storativity (ii) Transmissibility
10. Explain well losses

Part B
(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)
Module I
11 (a) Explain the working of a Siphon type rain gauge with a neat sketch (5 Marks)
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

(b) The average rainfall of 5 rain gauge stations in the base stations are 89, 54, 45, 41 and 55
cm. If the error in the estimation rainfall should not exceed 10 %, how many additional
gauges may be required to be installed in the catchment? (9 Marks)

OR

12.(a) Compare different methods for determination of mean precipitation from a catchment
(6 Marks)
(b) Explain the use of double ring infiltrometer for the measurement of infiltration. How will
you develop Horton’s model? (8 Marks)

Module II

13.(a) The rates of rainfall for the successive 30 min period of a 3-hour storm are:1.6, 3.6, 5.0,
2.8, 2.2, 1.0 cm/hr. The corresponding surface runoff is estimated to be 3.6 cm. Estimate
the φ -index (7 Marks)

(b) Explain the characteristics of a single peak hydrograph from an isolated storm. How will
you separate the base flow? (7 Marks)

OR

14. Find out the ordinates of a storm hydrograph resulting from a 9 hr storm with rainfall of
2, 5.75 and 2.75 cm during subsequent 3 hr intervals. The ordinates of 3hr unit
hydrograph at 3 hr intervals are 0, 100, 355, 510, 380, 300, 260, 225,165, 120,85, 55,30,
22, 10, 0 (cumecs). Assume an initial loss of 0.5 cm and φ -index of 2.5 mm/hr and
abase flow of 10 cumecs. (14 Marks)

Module III

15. (a) Differentiate lift irrigation and flow irrigation. (4 Marks)

(b) Estimate the frequency of irrigation required for certain crop for the following data:
Root zone depth = 90 cm Field capacity = 22 %, Wilting point=12 % Dry density of
soil=1500 kg/m3. Daily Consumptive use =22 mm. Assume 70 % depletion of available
moisture as an indicator for application of water (10 Marks)

OR

16. (a) Explain the benefits and ill effects of irrigation (4 Marks)
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

(b) What are the factors affecting duty? How can you improve the duty of water.

(10 Marks)

Module IV

17 (a) Explain the use of current meter for velocity measurement in streams (7 Marks)

(b) Explain the method of determination of useful life of a reservoir. (7 Marks)

OR

18 (a) Explain the features of different types of groynes (8 Marks)

(b) Explain the types of storage reservoirs (6 Marks)

Module V

19 (a) State Darcy’s law and its limitations (4 Marks)

(b) The following observations were recorded during a pumping out test on a tube well
penetrating fully in an aquifer: Well diameter: 25 cm, Discharge from the well: 300
m3/hr, RL of original water surface before pumping started: 122.000, RL of water in the
well at constant pumping: 117.100 , RL of water in the observation well: 121.300, RL of
impervious layer: 92.000, radial distance of observation well from the tube well: 50 m.
Determine : (a) field permeability coefficient of the aquifer (b) radius of zero drawdown.
(10 Marks)

OR

20.(a) Explain the method of determination of yield of an open well (7 Marks)

(b) Explain the working of a strainer type tube well with a sketch (7 Marks)
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

CONSTRUCTION Year of
CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
CET309 TECHNOLOGY AND Introduction
MANAGEMENT PCC 3 0 0 3 2019

Preamble:
Construction Technology and Management introduces the basic concepts of civil engineering
construction and its management. The course provides a detailed insight into the materials used
in construction, various building elements and construction technology. Management is essential
for successful completion of construction projects and the course introduces the students to the
basic concepts of construction project management and planning. After the course, students will
be familiar with the fundamental concepts of building construction and management.

Prerequisite: Basics of Civil and Mechanical Engineering

Course Outcomes: After completion of the course, the student will be able to
Course Description of Course Outcome Prescribed
Outcome learning level
CO1 Describe the properties of materials used in construction Understand
CO2 Explain the properties of concrete and its determination Understand
CO3 Describe the various elements of building construction Understand
CO4 Explain the technologies for construction Understand
CO5 Describe the procedure for planning and executing public works Understand
CO6 Apply scheduling techniques in project planning and control Application

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes(Minimum requirement)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 1 1 1 1 1
CO2 3 1 1 1 1
CO3 3 1 1 1
CO4 3 2 1 1 1
CO5 3 2 1 1 3 1
CO6 3 3 3 1 2 1 3 1
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Assessment Pattern
Continuous Assessment Tests
Bloom’s Category End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 40 30 76
Apply 10 14
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution
Total Marks CIE (Marks) ESE (Marks) ESE Duration
150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain
10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students
should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student
should answer any one. Each question carries 14 marks and can have maximum 2 sub-divisions.

Course Level Assessment (Sample) Questions

CO1: Describe the properties of materials used in construction
1. Write a short note on manufacturing process of cement.
2. Explain any three laboratory tests on cement and its IS specifications.
3. Write a note on quality of water used for concrete.
4. Explain the various types of admixtures and their uses.
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

CO2: Explain the properties of concrete and its determination

1. Explain briefly the manufacturing process of concrete.
2. Explain a method to assess the workability of concrete. Also highlight the merits and
demerits of the test.
3. Explain the factors affecting bleeding and segregation of concrete.
4. Explain the various factors affecting strength of concrete.

CO3: Describe the various elements of building construction

1. Discuss the purpose of providing damp proof course.
2. Distinguish between plastering and pointing.
3. Explain the various types of pointing with neat sketches.
4. State the advantages and disadvantages of framed structures.

CO4: Explain the technologies for construction

1. Explain voided slab construction.
2. Describe the classification of scaffolding.
3. Explain slipform construction.
4. Discuss the general reasons of building failure.

CO5: Describe the procedure for planning and executing public works
1. Differentiate between earnest money deposit and security deposit.
2. Discuss the advantages of a lump sum contract over an item-rate contract.
3. Explain the life cycle of a construction project.
4. Explain the process of tendering for a construction project.

CO6: Apply scheduling techniques in project planning and control

1. The following details regarding a project are given.
Activity A B C D E F G H I J
Immediate Predecessor - A A B B C C D E, F G
Duration (Days) 5 2 6 4 4 2 3 8 7 2
(a) Prepare an Activity on Node Diagram.
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

(b) Find the expected duration of the project.

(c) Determine the critical activities.
(d) Compute the total and free float of all the activities.

2. For the project details given below:

(a) Draw the network.
(b) Prepare the schedule of activities
(c) What is the project completion time?
(d) Which is the critical path?
(e) Determine the probability of completing the project in 55 days?
Activity A B C D E F G H I
Predecessor - A A B B C E D,F G,H
a 4 5 4 15 10 8 4 1 6
m 6 7 8 20 18 9 8 2 7
b 8 15 12 25 26 16 12 3 8

SYLLABUS
Module 1
Construction Materials
Timber products –properties and uses of veneer, plywood, fibre board, particle board, multi
wood
Cement: Manufacturing, chemical composition,Tests on cement – specific gravity, standard
consistency, initial and final setting time, fineness, soundness, compressive strength, IS
specifications
Aggregates – types, Gradation, importance of gradation, bulking of fine aggregate
Quality of water for construction (Brief discussion only, Permissible limits of chemical
constituents not required)
Admixtures, uses – mineral admixtures – fly ash and ground granulated blast furnace slag and
chemical admixtures – plasticizers, super plasticizers, accelerators, retarders (brief discussion
only)
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Module 2
Concrete and Building Construction
Process of manufacturing concrete – batching, mixing, transportation, placing, compacting,
finishing, curing
Properties of fresh concrete: Workability, factors affecting workability, test on workability
(slump test), segregation and bleeding (brief discussion)
Properties of hardened concrete: Strength, factors affecting strength, tests for strength of concrete
in compression, tension and flexure
Lintels and arches: Types and construction details
Damp proof course (brief discussion only)
Finishing works: Plastering, pointing, painting – objectives and types
Structural systems – load bearing and framed construction, RCC and steel framed structures

Module 3
Construction Technology
Cost-effective construction – rapid wall construction, soil-cement block masonry, voided slab
technology, filler slab technology(brief discussion only)
Scaffolding – uses and classification (brief discussion only)
Formwork – requirements of good formwork, classification, slipform(brief discussion only)
Prefabricated construction – advantages and disadvantages, prefabricated building components.
Basic concept of prestressing – fundamental understanding of pre-tensioned and post-tensioned
construction
Construction 3D printing (brief discussion only)
Building failures – general reasons
Causes of failures in RCC, steel and masonry structures

Module 4
Construction Project Management
Construction projects, categories, life cycle of a project –pre-project phase, project phase, post-
project phase, Detailed Project Report – contents
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Tendering: types of tenders, stages in tendering

Contracts: types of contracts – item rate contract, lumpsum contract, percentage rate contract,
turnkey contracts, concession contracts – BOT

Module 5
Construction Planning
Work break down structure
Types of Schedules – Construction schedule, Material schedule, labour schedule, equipment
schedule, financial schedule
Bar chart,Mile Stone Charts
Networks, Network representation – Activity on Node (AoN) Diagram
Network analysis – Critical Path Method (CPM), Programme Evaluation and Review
Technique(PERT) – concepts and problems

Text books:
1. Shetty M.S. and A. K. Jain (2019), Concrete Technology: Theory and Practice, S. Chand
&Company Pvt. Ltd.
2. Varghese P. C. (2007), Building Construction, Prentice Hall India.
3. Punmia B. C., Ashok Kumar Jain and Arun Kumar Jain (2016), Building Construction,
Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd.
4. Sharma S.C. and S.V. Deodhar (2019), Construction Engineering & Management,
Khanna Book Publishing Co. (P) Ltd.
5. Kumar Neeraj Jha (2015), Construction Project Management: Theory and Practice,
Pearson India Education Services Pvt.Ltd.

Reference books:
1. SahuG. C.andJoygopal Jena (2015), Building Materials and Construction, McGraw Hill
Education (India) Private Limited.
2. Gambhir M. L. (2004), Concrete Technology, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company
Limited.
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

3. Sharma S.K. (2019),Civil Engineering Construction Materials, Khanna Book Publishing

Co. (P) Ltd.
4. Neville A.M. and BrooksJ.J. (2010), Concrete Technology, Pearson Education Ltd.
5. Mehta P. K. and Paulo J. M. Monteiro (2014),Concrete-Microstructure, Properties and
Materials, McGraw Hill Education.
6. SanthakumarR. (2006), Concrete Technology, Oxford Universities Press India.
7. Tony Bryan (2010), Construction Technology – Analysis and Choice, Wiley-Blackwell.
8. Joseph J. Moder, Cecil R. Philips and Edward W. Davis (1983), Project Management
with CPM, PERT and Precedence Diagramming, Van Nostrand Reinhold Company Inc.
9. Charles Patrick (2012), Construction Project Planning and Scheduling, Dorling
Kindersley India Pvt. Ltd.
10. Daniel W. Halpin and Bolivar A. Senior (2011), Construction Management, John Wiley
and Sons Inc.

Lecture Plan
Course
No. of
Module Topic Outcomes
Lectures
addressed
1 Module I (6 hours)
Timber products –properties and uses of veneer,
1.1 CO1 1
plywood, fibre board, particle board, multi wood
1.2 Cement – Manufacturing, chemical composition CO1 1
Tests on cement – specific gravity, standard
1.3 consistency, initial and final setting time, fineness, CO1 1
soundness, compressive strength, IS specifications
Aggregates – types, Gradation, importance of
1.4 CO1 1
gradation, bulking of fine aggregate
Quality of water for construction (Brief discussion
only, Permissible limits of chemical constituents not
1.5 CO1 2
required)
Admixtures, uses – mineral admixtures – fly ash and
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

ground granulated blast furnace slag and chemical

admixtures – plasticizers, superplasticizers,
accelerators, retarders (brief discussion only)
2 Module II (8 hours)
Concrete manufacturing – batching, mixing,
2.1 CO2 2
transportation, placing, compacting, finishing, curing
Properties of fresh concrete: Workability, factors
2.2 affecting workability, test on workability (slump test), CO2 1
segregation and bleeding (brief discussion)
Properties of hardened concrete: Strength, factors
2.3 affecting strength, tests for strength of concrete in CO2 1
compression, tension and flexure
2.4 Lintels and arches: Types CO3 1
Damp proof course (brief discussion only),Finishing
2.5 CO3 1
works: Plastering, pointing (objectives and types)
2.6 Painting (objectives and types) CO3 1
Structural systems – load bearing and framed
2.7 CO3 1
construction, RCC and steel framed structures
3 Module III (6 hours)
Cost-effective construction – rapid wall construction,
3.1 soil-cement block masonry, voided slab technology, CO4 1
filler slab technology (brief discussion only)
Scaffolding – uses and classification (brief discussion
3.2 CO4 1
only)
Formwork – requirements of good formwork,
3.3 CO4 1
classification, slipform (brief discussion only)
Prefabricated construction – advantages and
disadvantages, prefabricated building components.
3.4 CO4 1
Basic concept of prestressing – fundamental
understanding of pre-tensioned and post-tensioned
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

construction
Construction 3D printing (brief discussion only)
Building failures – general reasons
3.5 Causes of failures in RCC, steel and masonry CO4 2
structures
4 Module IV (7 hours)
Introduction to construction project management, 1
4.1 CO5
construction projects, categories
Life cycle of construction project – pre-project phase, 2
4.2 project phase, post-project phase,Detailed Project CO5
Report – contents
4.3 Tendering, types of tenders, stages in tendering CO5 2
Contracts – types of contracts – item rate contract, 2
4.4 lumpsum contract, percentage rate contract, turnkey CO5
contracts, concession contracts – BOT
5 Module V (8 hours)
Introduction to construction planning and scheduling, 1
5.1 CO6
Work break down structure
Types of Schedules: Construction schedule, Material 1
5.2 schedule, labour schedule, equipment schedule, CO6
financial schedule
5.3 Bar chart,Mile Stone Charts CO6 1
Introduction of networks, Network representation – 3
Activity on Node (AoN) Diagram, Critical Path
5.4 CO6
Method (CPM) – concepts and problems on
determination of critical path, floats
Programme Evaluation and Review Technique 2
5.5 CO6
(PERT) – concepts and problems
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

Reg.No.:_______________ Name:__________________________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

FIFTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code: CET309
Course Name: CONSTRUCTION TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
PART A
Answer all questions. Each question carries 3 marks.
1. Explain bulking of fine aggregate.
2. State the IS specification for initial and final setting time of OPC.
3. Discuss the various objectives of plastering.
4. List the various requirements of an ideal paint.
5. Briefly describe rapid wall construction technology.
6. Explain 3D printing in construction.
7. Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of an item-rate contract.
8. Explain selective tendering.
9. Explain the three time estimates in PERT.
10. Illustrate the use of a material schedule in organizing construction activities at a site.
(10×3 marks = 30 marks)
PART B
Answer one full question from each module. Each full question carries 14 marks.
Module I
11. a) Discuss the role of plasticizers in concrete.
(6 marks)
b) Differentiate between fibre board and particle board. (8 marks)
OR
12. a) Discuss the chemical composition of cement. (5 marks)

b) Explain gradation of aggregates. Discuss the significance of gradation of

aggregates. (9 marks)
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Module II
13. a)Define workability of concrete. Explain the factors affecting workability.(5 marks)
b) Explain any three laboratory tests on hardened concrete. (9 marks)
OR
14. a) Explain various types of arches with neat sketches. (8 marks)
b) Distinguish between RCC framed and steel framed structures. (6 marks)

Module III
15. Explain the causes of failure in RCC structures. (14 marks)
OR
16. a) Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of prefabricated construction. (6 marks)
b) Explain filler slab technology. (8 marks)

Module IV
17. Discuss the details included in the DPR of an infrastructure project. (14 marks)
OR
18. Explain the project formulation stage of a construction project. (14 marks)

Module V
19. For the given data, draw an AON network and determine the critical path. Also find
the total float, free float and independent float of each activity.
Activity A B C D E F G H I
Predecessor - A A C B B, D C F, G E, H
Duration (days) 4 6 4 2 4 5 3 4 2

(14 marks)

OR
20. The table shows the details of various activities of a small project.
Activity A B C D E F G H I J
Predecessor - - A A B E C D, F H G
Optimistic 4 3 7 5 6 2 3 2 6
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

time (days)
Most likely 6 5 8 7 7 3 4 9 4 8
time (days)
Pessimistic 8 7 9 9 8 4 5 11 6 10
time (days)
a) Draw an AON network and calculate the project completion time with 50%
probability.
b) Find the probability of completing the project in (i) 30 days; (ii) 26 days.
c) What project completion date has 80% chance of being met? (14 marks)

********************
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
MATERIAL YEAR OF
CEL331 CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
TESTING INTRODUCTION
LAB II PCC 0 0 3 3 2019

Preamble: The course aims to enrich the students to gain hands-on experience in conducting
laboratory tests on various construction materials and thereby evaluate material quality and
performance.

Prerequisite: Basics of Construction Engineering Materials.

General Instructions to Faculty:

1. Any 12 of the 15experiments included in the list of experiments need to be performed

mandatorily. Virtual Lab facility cannot be used to substitute the conduct of these
mandatory experiments.
2. The laboratory should have possession of modern testing equipment such as Rebound
hammer, ultrasonic pulse velocity,rebarlocator,core cutter, concrete penetrometer and
crack detection microscope at least for demonstration purposes.
3. Periodic maintenance and calibration of various testing instruments needs to be made.
4. Use of data visualization packages such as may be required for making various plots.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course, the student will be able to:

Course Course Outcome Description

Outcome
CO 1 To describe the basic properties of various construction materials
CO 2 Characterize the physical and mechanical properties of various construction
materials.
CO3 Interpret the quality of various construction materials
as per IS Codal provisions.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

CO/PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 2 2 2 1 3 - - 2 2 - 2
CO 2 3 2 2 2 1 3 - - 2 2 - 2
CO 3 3 2 2 2 1 3 - - 2 2 - 2

Assessment Pattern:

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 75 75 2.5 hours
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 15 marks
Continuous Assessment : 30 marks
Internal Test (Immediately before the second series test) : 30 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: The following guidelines should be followed

regarding award of marks
(a) Preliminary work : 15 Marks
(b) Implementing the work/Conducting the experiment : 10 Marks
(c) Performance, result and inference (usage of equipment and trouble shooting) : 25 Marks
(d) Viva voce : 20 marks
(e) Record : 5 Marks

General instructions:
Practical examination to be conducted immediately after the second series test covering entire
syllabus given below. Evaluation is a serious process that is to be conducted under the equal
responsibility of both the internal and external examiners. The number of candidates
evaluated per day should not exceed 20. Students shall be allowed for the University
examination only on submitting the duly certified record. The external examiner shall
endorse the record.

References

1. M.S.Shetty , Concrete Technology, Theory and Practice , S.Chand&Company, 2014

A.M.Neville and J.J Brooks, Concrete Technology,Second edition, Pearson.
2. IS codes on cement:IS 1489(Part 1& 2):1991 Specification for Portland pozzolana
cement,IS 269:1989 – Specification for ordinary Portland cement, 33 grade,IS 8112 :
2013- Specification for ordinary Portland cement, 43 grade, IS 12269 : 2013-
Specification for ordinary Portland cement, 53 grade,
3. IS codes on aggregate:IS 2386(Part 1):1963 Methods of test for aggregates for
concrete: Part 1 Particle size and shape, IS 2386(Part 3):1963 Methods of test for
aggregates for concrete: Part 3 Specific gravity, density, voids, absorption and
bulking, IS 383:1970Specification for Coarse and Fine aggregate from natural sources
of concrete
4. IS codes on fresh and hardened concrete: IS 1199:1959 Methods of sampling and
analysis of concrete, IS 10262:2019 Concrete mix proportioning- Guidelines, IS
516:1959 Methods of tests for strength of concrete.
5. IS codes on brick and tiles:IS 3495 (Part 1 to 4):1992 Methods of tests of burned
clay bricks,IS 1077:1992 Common burned clay building bricks (specification),IS
654:1992 Clay roofing tiles Mangalore pattern (specification).
6. IS 13311 (Part 1 & 2):1992Non - destructive testing of concrete-methods of test.
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
SYLLABUS

Exercise 1. Testing of Cement: Fineness,normal consistency,initial & final setting time.

Exercise 2. Testing of Cement: Specific gravity and compressive strength

Exercise 3. Study on soundness of cement.

Exercise 4. Testing of Coarse and Fine Aggregate: Sieve analysis.

Exercise 5. Testing of Coarse and Fine Aggregate: Water absorption, bulk density, void
ratio, porosity and specific gravity.

Exercise 6. Test on bulking of sand.

Exercise 7. Test on coarse aggregate crushing value

Exercise 8.Tests on fresh concrete :Measurement of workability of concrete by slump cone

test and compacting factor test.

Exercise 9. Study on workability of concrete by Vee-Bee test and flow test.

Exercise10. Concrete mix design by IS code method and casting of cubes, cylinders
with designed concrete mixes.

Exercise 11. Tests on hardened properties of concrete: Compressive, split and flexural
strength.

Exercise 12.Tests on hardened properties of concrete: Modulus of elasticity of concrete

Exercise 13. Tests on brick, floor and roof tiles as per IS codal provision.

Exercise 14. Study on Non-destructive tests on hardened concrete (Rebound hammer,

ultrasonic pulse velocity and Rebar locator).

Exercise 15. Study on concrete core cutter, concrete penetrometer and crack detection
microscope.
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

GEOTECHNICAL YEAR OF
CEL CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
ENGINEERING INTRODUCTION
333 LAB PCC 0 0 3 2 2019

Preamble:
Objective of the course is to familiarize students with the laboratory tests used to determine
physical, index and engineering properties of geomaterials.
Prerequisite: CET 204 GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING I
Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course, the student will be able to:
CO1 Identify and classify soil based on standard geotechnical experimental methods.
CO2 Perform and analyze permeability tests.
CO3 Interpret engineering behavior of soils based on test results.
CO4 Perform laboratory compaction, CBR and in-place density test for fill quality control in
the field.
CO5 Evaluate the strength of soil by performing various tests viz. direct shear test, unconfined
compressive strength test and triaxial shear test.
CO6 Evaluate settlement characteristics of soils.

Mapping of course outcomes (COs) with program outcomes (POs)

COs/POs PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 1 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 2
CO4 3 1 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 2
CO6 3 1 2 2 2

Mark distribution
Continuous
End Semester End Semester
Total Marks Internal
Examination (ESE) Examination (ESE)
Evaluation (CIE)
Duration
150 75 75 2.5 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 15 marks
Continuous Assessment : 30 marks
Internal Test (Immediately before the second series test) : 30 marks
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

End Semester Examination Pattern: The following guidelines should be followed regarding
award of marks.
a) Preliminary work : 15 marks
b) Implementing the work/ Conducting the experiment : 10 marks
c) Performance, result and inference (usage of equipments and trouble shooting) : 25 marks
d) Viva voce : 20 marks
e) Record : 5 marks

General instructions:
Practical examination to be conducted immediately after the second series test covering entire
syllabus given below. Evaluation is a serious process that is to be conducted under the equal
responsibility of both the internal and external examiners. The number of candidates evaluated
per day should not exceed 20. Students shall be allowed for the University examination only on
submitting the duly certified record. The external examiner shall endorse the record.
References
1. IS codes relevant to each test
2. C. Venkatramaiah, Geotechnical Engineering, New Age International publishers, 2012
3. Gopal Ranjan and A. S. R. Rao, Basic and Applied Soil Mechanics, New Age International
Publishers, 2012
4. K. R. Arora, Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering, Standard Publishers, 2011

SYLLABUS
Part A
Estimation of physical and index properties of the given soil: After performing the set of
experiments, students are expected to infer the results of the experiments in their engineering
behavior.
1. Determination of Water Content and Specific Gravity
2. Sieve Analysis
3. Hydrometer/pipette Analysis
4. Atterberg Limits (Liquid Limit, Plastic Limitand Shrinkage Limit)
5. Swelling Test
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

6. Field Density determination

Part B
Determination of engineering properties of the given soil: Students should be familiarize with the
tests to be performed to determine the engineering properties of the given soil and interpret the
results for field application.
7. Permeability Test
8. Standard Proctor Compaction Test
9. Heavy compaction
10. California Bearing Ratio Test
11. Direct Shear test
12. Unconfined Compression Test
13. Consolidation Test
Study/demonstration
14. Triaxial test
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER V
MINOR
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
Year of
STRUCTURAL CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
CET381 Introduction
MECHANICS
VAC 3 1 0 4 2019

Preamble: Structural Mechanics is a basic course in the analysis of structural systems. The
course helps students to develop their analytical and problem-solving skills. The course
introduces students to the various internal effects induced in structural members as well as
their deformations due to different types of loading. After this course students will be able to
analyse simple structural systems.

Prerequisite: EST 100 Engineering Mechanics

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

Course Prescribed
Description of Course Outcome
Outcome learning level
Recall the fundamental terms/theorems associated with
mechanics of linear elastic deformable bodies and explain Remembering/
CO1
the behavior/response of various structural elements Understanding
under various loading conditions.
Calculate the stresses/strains in structural elements
CO2 Applying
subjected to axial load and bending/twisting moments.
Analyse statically determinate beams and trusses to
CO3 Applying
determine the internal forces.
CO4 Determine the deflection of statically determinate beams. Applying
CO5 Analyse statically indeterminate beams and frames. Applying

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes (Minimum requirement)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 2 - - - - - - - - - - -
CO2 3 3 - - - - - - - - - -
CO3 3 3 - - - - - - - - - -
CO4 3 3 - - - - - - - - - -
CO5 3 3 - - - - - - - - - -
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment
End Semester
Bloom’s Category Tests
Examination
1 2
Remember/ Understand 20 20 30
Apply 30 30 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration
150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question carries 14 marks and can have maximum 2
sub-divisions.

Course Level Assessment (Sample) Questions

CO1: Recall the fundamental terms/theorems associated with mechanics of linear

elastic deformable bodies and explain the behavior/response of various
structural elements under various loading conditions.

1. Explain Hooke’s law.

2. Sketch the stress-strain curve of mild steel and mark the salient points
3. Explain the concept of BM and SF in beams, with the help of a cantilever
beam subjected to uniformly distributed load over the whole span.
4. What is pure bending? Give an example.
5. What is point of contraflexure?
6. Explain (i) Section modulus and (ii) Moment of resistance
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
7. Distinguish between statically determinate and statically indeterminate
structures.
8. What is degree of static indeterminacy? Explain with an example.
9. Explain (i) distribution factor and (ii) carry over moment.
10. Compare slope-deflection and moment distribution methods.

CO2: Calculate the stresses/strains in structural elements subjected to axial load

and bending/twisting moments.
1. A 32 mm diameter steel bar is subjected to forces as shown in figure. Find
the value of P necessary for equilibrium and stresses in different segments.
Also calculate the final length of the bar. Take E = 200 GPa.

20 kN 50 kN P 10 kN

0.75 m 1. 5 m 1. 25 m

2. A strut and cable assembly ABC, A

shown in figure supports a vertical
load P = 10 kN. The cable has an cable
effective cross sectional area of 1.5 m
120 mm2 and the strut has an area
of 200 mm2. Calculate the normal B
stresses induced in the cable and
the strut and indicate whether they strut
1.5 m P
are tension or compression. If the
cable elongates 1.15 mm and the
strut shortens 0.58 mm find the C
strains also. 2.0 m

3. A tension test is carried out on a mild steel bar of 10 mm diameter. The bar
yields under a load of 20 kN, it reaches a maximum load of 40 kN and breaks
at 25 kN. The diameter of the bar at breaking was found to be 7 mm. The
increase in length of the bar over a gauge length of 50 mm was found to be
0.029 mm under a load of 10 kN. Estimate (a) Young’s modulus, (b) yield
strength, (c) ultimate strength and (d) actual breaking strength.
4. A steel flat 25 mm wide and 6 mm thick is required to be bend into a circular
arc of radius 10 m. Find the bending moment required to bend the flat. Also
find the maximum stress induced. Take E = 200 GPa.
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
5. A steel box section 100 mm × 150 mm with thickness 5 mm is used as a
cantilever beam of span 2 m. If the beam carries a load of 1 kN at the free
end, find the maximum bending stress at the mid span and the support.
Neglect weight of the beam.
6. A timber beam 150 mm × 200 mm is used as a simply supported beam of
span 3 m. Find the maximum load that can be applied at 1 m from one of the
supports, if the maximum bending stress in the beam is not to exceed 8
N/mm2. Neglect self weight of beam.
7. A beam of I section 400 mm deep has flanges 200 mm wide and 20 mm thick
and web 15 mm thick. Compare its moment of resistance with that of a beam
of rectangular section of the same weight, the depth being twice its breadth.
8. A solid circular shaft of diameter 50 mm is subjected to a torque. If the
maximum shear stress induced in the shaft is 70 MPa, find the torque applied.
If the modulus of rigidity of the material of the shaft is 80 GPa, find the angle
of twist per meter length of the shaft.

CO3: Analyse statically determinate beams and trusses to determine the internal
forces.

1. Draw the SFD and BMD of the beam shown.

20 kN

12 kN/m 60o

2m 1m

2. Draw SFD and BMD. Find the maximum BM also.

10 kN/m 15 kN

1m 3m 1m 1m
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
3. Analyse the truss by method of joints and determine the forces in all members.

4. Analyse the truss by method of sections and determine the forces in members
X, Y and Z.

CO4: Determine the deflection of statically determinate beams.

1. A cantilever beam of span 3 m carries a point load of 10 kN at the free end along
with a udl of 5 kN/m covering a distance of 2 m starting from the support. Find the
maximum deflection of the beam. Take EI = 3500 kNm2.
2. Find the slope and deflection at the free end of the cantilever beam loaded as shown.
Flexural rigidity (EI) of the beam may be assumed to be constant.

3. A simply supported beam of span 5 m carries a concentrated load of 20 kN at a

distance of 2 m from the left support. Find the slope at supports and deflection under
the load. Also find the maximum deflection and its location. Flexural rigidity of the
beam is 2200 kNm2.
4. A simply supported beam of span 4 m carries a udl of 10 kN/m covering half the
span starting from the left support. Find the slope at supports and maximum
deflection. Locate the point of maximum deflection also. Flexural rigidity of the
beam is 1500 kNm2.
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
CO5: Analyse statically indeterminate beams and frames.

1. Analyse the propped cantilever beam shown by consistent deformation method

and draw BMD and SFD.

2. Analyse the continuous beam by slope deflection method and draw BMD.

3. Analyse the frame by slope deflection method and draw BMD.

4. Analyse the frame shown in Question 2 using moment distribution method and
draw BMD.

5. Analyse the continuous beam shown using moment distribution method and draw
BMD.
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
SYLLABUS

Module – 1
Review of statics, Concept of stress and strain – types, Stress – strain relation - Hooke’s law,
Young’s modulus of elasticity.
Axially loaded bars with uniform cross section–stress, strain and deformation.
Deformation of axially loaded bars with varying cross section and bars with varying axial
loads.
Torsion of circular shafts – stress and deformation, Power transmitted by circular shafts.

Module – 2
Analysis of truss – method of joints and method of sections.
Beams – different types. Types of loading on beams. Concept of bending moment and shear
force.
Shear force and bending moment diagrams of cantilever beams and simply supported beams
for different type of loads.

Module – 3
Theory of simple bending, assumptions and limitations.
Calculation of normal stress in beams, moment of resistance
Shear stress in beams (concept only).
Moment-curvature relation. Deflection of beams by successive integration.
Macaulay’s method - Deflection of cantilever beams and simply supported beams.

Module – 4
Statically indeterminate structures, degree of static and kinematic indeterminacy.
Fixed beam – fixed end moments for simple cases of loading (No analysis required).
Method of consistent deformation - Analysis of propped cantilever beam and continuous
beams with maximum two redundants.

Module – 5
Slope deflection method – Analysis of continuous beams with maximum two unknowns,
effect of support settlement. Analysis of frames with sway.
Moment distribution method – analysis of continuous beams and frames without sway.

Text Books:
1. Egor P. Popov, Engineering Mechanics of Solids, Prentice Hall International Series.
2. James M Gere, S.P. Timoshenko, Mechanics of Materials, CBS Publishers and
Distributors, New Delhi.
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
3. R. K. Bansal, A Text book of Strength of Materials, Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd, New
Delhi.

References:
1. R.C. Hibbeler, Structural Analysis, Pearson.
2. Devdas Menon, Structural Analysis, Narosa Publications.
3. H. J. Shah and S. B. Junnarkar, Mechanics of Structures Vol - I, Charotar Publishing
House.
4. S. Ramamrutham and R. Narayanan, Strength of Materials, Dhanpat Rai Publishing
Co (P) Ltd.
5. B. C. Punmia, Ashok K. Jain, Arun Kumar Jain, Mechanics of Materials, Laxmi
Publications (P) Ltd, New Delhi.

Lecture Plan – Structural Mechanics

Course
No. of
Module Topic Outcomes
Lectures
addressed
1 Module I: Total lecture hours: 9
1.1 Review of statics – equilibrium conditions, free body
- 1
diagrams, centroid, moment of inertia.
1.2 Concept of stress, types of stresses. Concept of strain,
types of strains. Stress – strain relation - Hooke’s law,
CO1 1
Young’s modulus of elasticity. Stress-strain (𝜎𝜎 − 𝜀𝜀)
diagram of mild steel.
1.3 Axially loaded bars with uniform cross section– CO1,
1
calculation of stress, strain and deformation. CO2
1.4 Deformation of axially loaded bars with varying cross
section. CO1,
3
Stepped bars, deformation of axially loaded bars with CO2
varying axial loads
1.5 Torsion of circular shafts, assumptions, derivation of
torsion equation. Variation of stress across the cross CO1 1
section. Polar modulus.
1.6 Calculation stress and deformation of circular shafts
subjected to torsion. CO1, CO2 2
Power transmitted by circular shafts.
2 Module II: Total lecture hours:10
2.1 Analysis of truss – Method of joints CO1, CO3 2
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
2.2 Analysis of Truss – Method of sections CO1, CO3 2
2.3 Beams – different types. Types of loading on beams.
Concept of bending moment and shear force. Shear force CO1, CO3 2
and bending moment diagrams.
2.4 Shear force and bending moment diagrams of cantilever
beams subjected to point load, uniformly distributed load, CO3 2
uniformly varying load and concentrated moment.
2.5 Shear force and bending moment diagrams of simply
supported beams subjected to point load and uniformly CO3 2
distributedload.
3 Module III : Total lecture hours : 9
3.1 Theory of simple bending – derivation of equation,
CO1, CO2 1
assumptions and limitations.
3.2 Calculation of normal stress in beams, moment of
resistance.
Problems involving bending stress. CO1, CO2 2
Shear stress in beams (concept only)- variation of shear
stress across the cross section.
3.3 Moment-curvature relation. Basic differential equation
for calculating the deflection of beams.
CO1, CO4 2
Calculation of deflection by successive integration.
Principle of superposition.
3.4 Macaulay’s method - Deflection of cantilever beam
CO1, CO4 2
subjected to point load and uniformly distributed loads.
3.5 Macaulay’s method - Deflection of simply supported
beams subjected to point load and uniformly distributed
CO1, CO4 2
loads.
Clerk Maxwell’s theorem of reciprocal deflection
4 Module IV: Total lecture hours:8
4.1 Statically indeterminate structures, degree of static and
kinematic indeterminacy - examples
CO1 1
Force and displacement method of analysis (concept
only)
4.2 Fixed beam – fixed end moments for simple cases of
loading (No analysis required). CO1, CO3 2
BMD of fixed beam, point of contraflexure.
4.3 Method of consistent deformation - Analysis of propped
CO1, CO5 2
cantilever beam.
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
4.4 Method of consistent deformation – analysis of beams
CO1, CO5 3
with maximum two redundants.
5 Module V: Total lecture hours:9
5.1 Slope deflection method – equation (no derivation
required).
CO1, CO5 2
Analysis of continuous beams with maximum two
unknowns.
5.2 Slope deflection method – analysis of continuous beam
CO1, CO5 1
with support settlement.
5.3 Slope deflection method – analysis of frames with sway. CO1, CO5 2
5.4 Moment distribution method – concept.
CO1, CO5 1
Distribution factor and carry over moment.
5.5 Moment distribution method – analysis of continuous
CO1, CO5 1
beams.
5.6 Moment distribution method – analysis of frames without
CO1, CO5 2
sway.
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
MODEL QUESTION PAPER

Reg. No.:_______________ Name:__________________________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
FIFTH SEMESTER BTECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code: CET381
Course Name: STRUCTURAL MECHANICS
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A
Answer all questions; each question carries 3 marks.
1. a) Sketch the stress-strain graph of mild steel and mark the salient points.
b) A steel bar of length 1 m and diameter 12 mm was found to elongate by 0.64 mm under
an axial load of 15 kN. Find the stress induced and modulus of elasticity of the
material.
c) What is the advantage of method of sections over method of joints in the analysis of
trusses?
d) What is the relationship between SF and BM? Illustrate with a simple example.
e) What is pure bending? Give an example.
f) Using successive integration method, find the deflection at the free end of a cantilever
beam carrying a point load at the free end.
g) Explain ‘static indeterminacy’ and ‘kinematic indeterminacy’ with a suitable example.
h) Write down the consistent deformation equations for a beam with degree of static
indeterminacy =2. Explain the basic terms in the equation.
i) What are the reasons for side sway in frames?
j) Write notes on (i) distribution factor and (ii) carry over moment.
(10×3 marks = 30 marks)

PART B
Answer one full question from each module; each full question carries 14 marks.

Module I
2. A 32 mm diameter steel bar is subjected to forces as shown in figure. Find the value of P
necessary for equilibrium and stresses in different segments. Also calculate the final length
of the bar. Take E = 200 GPa.

20 kN 50 kN P 10 kN

0.75 m 1. 5 m 1. 25 m
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
3. A tension test is carried out on a mild steel bar of 10 mm diameter. The bar yields under a
load of 20 kN, it reaches a maximum load of 40 kN and breaks at 25 kN. The diameter of
the bar at breaking was found to be 7 mm. The increase in length of the bar over a gauge
length of 50 mm was found to be 0.029 mm under a load of 10 kN. Estimate (a) Young’s
modulus, (b) yield strength, (c) ultimate strength and (d) actual breaking strength.

Module II
4. Draw the SFD and BMD of the beam loaded as shown in figure. Find the maximum BM
and locate the point of maximum BM also.
10 kN/m 15 kN

1m 3m 1m 1m

5. Analyse the truss by method of joints and determine the forces in all members.

Module III
6. A beam of I section 400 mm deep has flanges 200 mm wide and 20 mm thick and web 15
mm thick. Compare its moment of resistance with that of a beam of rectangular section of
the same weight, the depth being twice its breadth.
7. A simply supported beam of span 4 m carries a udl of 10 kN/m covering half the span
starting from the left support. Find the slope at supports and maximum deflection. Locate
the point of maximum deflection also. Flexural rigidity of the beam is 1500 kNm2.

Module IV
8. a) Draw the BMD of a fixed beam carrying udl through out its span. (4 marks)
b) Analyse the propped cantilever beam shown by consistent deformation method and
draw BMD and SFD.
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

(10 marks)

9. Analyse the beam shown by consistent deformation method and draw BMD.

Module V
10. Analyse the frame by slope deflection method and draw BMD.

11. Analyse the continuous beam shown using moment distribution method and draw BMD.

*********************
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

ECO-FRIENDLY YEAR OF
CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
CET383 TRANSPORTATION INTRODUCTION
SYSTEMS VAC 3 1 0 4 2019

Preamble : Objective of the course is to introduce the principles and practice of sustainability on
transportation systems and development of an eco-friendly transport system.

Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes:

Description
CO No. At the end of the course, students will be able to:
Apply the basic principles of sustainability to infrastructure related
CO 1
problems
CO 2 Analyse Transportation network for eco-friendliness and quantify the
levels.
CO 3 Design eco-friendly transportation systems
CO 4 Apply concepts of sustainability in developing green fuels and vehicles.
CO 5 Design for sustainability in public transport, Applications of tools like GIS,
GPS.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO 1 2 2 2 1 1 3 1 2 1 2 3
CO 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2
CO 3 2 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 3
CO 4 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 3
CO 5 1 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 2 2 2 3
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester
Test 1 Marks Test 2 Marks Examination (marks)
Remember 7.5 7.5 30
Understand 7.5 7.5 30
Apply - - -
Analyse 5 5 20
Evaluate 5 5 20
Create

Mark Distribution
Total Marks CIE (Marks) ESE (Marks) ESE Duration
150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course Project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern:

The question consists of two parts- Part A and Part B. Part A consists of 10 questions with 3
marks for each (two questions from each module). Part B consists of two questions from each
module, out of which one has to be answered. Each question carries 14 marks and can have
maximum 2 subdivisions.

Sample Course Level Assessment Questions:

1 Course Outcome 1 (CO1):Define sustainability in transportation context. How can the

principles be applied here?

2 Course Outcome 2 (CO2):Describe the procedure of evaluating the performance of a

transportation network, citing any example.

3 Course Outcome 3 (CO3):What are the characteristics of eco-friendly transportation system?

What changes are to be incorporated in designing the same?

4 Course Outcome 4 (CO4):Discuss the concept of green vehicles describing the aspects that
make them green.
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

5 Course Outcome 5 (CO5):Giving KSRTC as an example explain how sustainability can be

achieved in public transport.

Syllabus

Module Contents Hours

1 Introduction to the concept of sustainability, basic principles. 10

2 Transport networks basics, Performance measures, Advanced transport
systems 10

3 Design for eco-friendly Transportation, Professional praxis in sustainability,

9
concept and applications
4 Emerging concepts in sustainable transportation: green vehicles and green
roads 9

5 Sustainable public transport: Promoting public transport, Transit oriented

development, integrated multi-modal transport. 7

Text Books

1. Chisty, J, Lall, K. Introduction to Transportation Engineering. PHI

2. O’ Flaherty, C.A (Ed.)., Transport Planning and Traffic Engineering, Elsevier.
3. Jeffrey Tumlin: Sustainable Transportation Planning: Tools for Creating Vibrant, Healthy, and
Resilient Communities, John Wiley & Sons

References

1. Green Transportation Logistics: The Quest for Win-Win Solutions Editors: Psaraftis,
Harilaos N. (Ed.), Springer
2. Thomas Abdallah: Sustainable Mass Transit: Challenges and Opportunities in Urban
Public Transportation.
3. Chester Patton, Public Transit Operations: The Strategic Professional
4. Sustainable and Efficient Transport: Incentives for Promoting a Green Transport Market-
Edited by Ellen Eftestøl-Wilhelmsson, et al, Edward Elgar
5. Rani Iyer:Green Transport: Exploring Eco-Friendly Travel for a Better Tomorrow:
6. Smart City project reports.
7. Environmental Impact Assessment Reports on Infrastructure projects.
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Course Content and lecture Schedule:

No. Topic Course No. of
Outcome Hrs
1 Module 1 Total: 10
1.1 Sustainability: Definition, concepts CO1
2

1.2 Environmental impacts of infrastructure projects, depletion of CO1

2
natural resources and pollution.
1.3 Problems of present transportation systems, performance
CO1 6
analysis. Introduction to eco-friendly systems.
2 Module 2 Total: 10
2.1 Transportation network basics: network planning, design, CO2
3
operation and management (elementary ideas only)
2.2 Measures of network performance, factors and parameters.
CO2 4

2.3 Introduction to advanced transport systems: metro, monorail, CO2

3
maglev, hyperloop.
3 Module 3 Total: 7
3.1 Eco-friendly transport: Necessity, Basics: reducing natural CO3
2
fuels
3.2 Eco-friendly transport network. Parameters, design,
CO3 3
implementation.
3.3 Professional praxis in sustainability: concepts, practical
2
applications. Paradigm shift: Mobility and accessibility.
4 Module 4 Total: 9
4.1 Emerging concepts in sustainable transportation: green CO4
2
vehicles and green roads: basics and necessity.
4.2 Green vehicles: minimizing fuel consumption, alternate fuels. CO4
4
Green pathways: sustainable design, construction,
4.3 Forgiving designs for safety, ITS applications. CO4
3

5 Module 5 Total: 9
5.1 Sustainable public transport: Promoting public transport, Fleet CO5
3
management and scheduling: Concepts and tools only.
5.2 Transit oriented development (smart cities), integrated multi- CO5
6
modal transport, GIS applications.
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

5.3 Micro projects: i) Compilation of studies on green fuels and

transport, with comparison. ii) A study on literature available
on a typical smart city project, in the transport context, and
propose designs. (may be given as assignments)

Model Question Paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

FIFTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: CET383

Course Name: Eco-friendly Transportation Systems (Minor)

Marks:100 Duration: 3 hrs

PART A
(Answer all questions. Each question carry three marks)

1. Define sustainability with emphasis on transport.

2. List the principles of sustainability.
3. What are the fundamental elements of a transport network? How do they contribute to
performance?
4. Compare metro and maglev technologies.
5. Why is an eco-friendly transport necessary? Cite a typical example.
6. Why is a paradigm shift necessary in sustainability?
7. Explain the terms: Green roads, Green fuels.
8. With a typical example, explain forgiving designs.
9. List a few methods of promoting public transport.
10. What do you understand from Transit Oriented Development?
PART B
(Answer one full question from each module)

11. a) Describe how an infrastructure project affects environment. (10)

b) What are the issues with present transport systems? (4)
OR

12 a)When is a system deemed eco-friendly? Explain in transport context. (6)

 CIVIL ENGINEERING

b). What are the parameters of performance analysis of transportation systems? Explain
(8)

13 a) With a typical example, illustrate the performance evaluation of a transport network(6)

b) What is hyperloop? Is it eco-friendly? How? (8)

OR
14a) Describe the process of network planning, design, operations and management (10)
b) What are the challenges faced by metro rail systems? (4)

15a) Explain the principles of an eco-friendly transport network (8)

b)Discuss the term professional praxis in a sustainability scenario. (6)
OR
16 a) How is the eco-friendliness of a transport network evaluated? Discuss the steps involved(8)
b)Explain the factors involved in designing an eco-friendly network (6)

17 a) List the alternate fuels for transport and discuss any two (6)
b) Define ITS. What are its application in eco-friendly transport. Expalin any two. (8)
OR
18 a) Discuss any two eco-friendly construction methods for roads (8)
b) What are the methods of reducing fuel consumption in vehicles (6)

19a)Write a note on public transport fleet management. (6)

b) /what is meant by integrated multi-modal transport? Discuss it’s possibilities in a city in
Kerala. (8)
OR
20 Discuss the applications of GIS and GPS in transport, explaining how eco-friendliness can be
achieved. (14)
CET SUSTAINABILITY CIVIL ENGINEERING
Year of
CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
385 ANALYSIS AND Introduction
DESIGN VAC 4 0 0 4 2019

Preamble: Goal of this course is to introduce various tools and techniques of sustainability analysis
and its significance in design and engineering decision making.

Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After completion of the course the student will be able to:

Course
Prescribed
outcome Description of course outcome
learning level
identifier
Identify the impacts of various materials and Remembering
CO 1
processes on the biosphere
CO2 Identify the parameters used in the calculation of sustainability Understanding
Estimate sustainability metrics for application-material Applying
CO 3
combinations.
Apply the design approaches by integrating Applying
CO 4
sustainability concepts

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes (Minimum requirement)

PO PO PO
PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9
10 11 12
CO 1 1 - - - - - - - - - - -
CO 2 1 2 - - - - - - - - - -
CO 3 2 3 2 - 2 - - - - - - -
CO 4 2 3 2 - 2 - - - - - - -
CO5

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester

Bloom’s Category
Test 1 (Marks) Test 2 (Marks) Examination (Marks)

Remember 7.5 7.5 30

Understand 7.5 7.5 30
Apply 10 10 40
Analyse
 Evaluate
CIVIL ENGINEERING

Create

Mark Distribution

Total Marks CIE (Marks) ESE (Marks) ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course Project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts: Part A and Part B.

Part A contains 10 questions with 2 questions from each module and each question shall carry 3
marks. Students should answer all questions.

Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer any one. Each question
carries 14 marks and can have maximum 2 sub-divisions

Course level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 -Identify the impacts of various materials and processes on the biosphere.

1. How are materials classified as renewable and non-renewable?

2. Compare infinitely available and regenerative renewable resources.
3. Prepare a short description on zero waste production system.

Course Outcome 2 -Identify the parameters used in the calculation of sustainability

1. Compare “output pulled” and “input pushed” systems

2. Prepare short note on “dematerialization” and “remanufacturing”.
3. Explain ecological footprint

Course Outcome 3 -Estimate sustainability metrics for application-material combinations

1. Illustrate the significance of biomimicry taxonomy in sustainable design.

2. How is global warning potential assessed?
3. Illustrate water foot print of a process.

Course Outcome 4 - Apply the design approaches by integrating sustainability concepts

1. Illustrate the role of biomimicry in the design for sustainability approaches.

2. Explain the significance of “cradle to cradle” design concept.
 3. List any five commonly used life cycle impact categories CIVIL ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1

Introduction to sustainability - Sustainable use of materials: Energy, ecology and natural resources

Engineering design process-Role of materials in design: important material characteristics,

construction ecology and metabolism - specifications and market.

Module 2

Material flow analysis - efficiencies in mass flow — Constructing a material flowsystem—embodied

energy—engineering models based on waste and materials management

Module 3

Sustainability metrics — mass balance and footprint concept Sustainable design - Specifications for
sustainable material use — waste management and material life cycles - Environmentally sensitive
design — Green engineering

Module 4

Life-cycle assessment—Life cycle assessment framework-Inventory analysis —impact assessment –

interpretation

Module 5

Sustainable designs approaches - Sustainable urbanization – sustainable cities –sustainable transport -

energy efficiency.

Text Books:

I. Allen,D.TandShornard,DR,SustainabilityEngineering,Concepts,DesignandCase
Studies, Prentice Ha1.

2. BradleyA.S.,Adebryo,A.0.,MariaP,EngineeringApplicationsinSustainableDesignand
Development, Cengige Learning

References:

1. UNDP (1987), Our Common Future, Report of the World Commission on Environment and
Development

2. Riley,D.R.,Thatche,C.E.,andWorkman,E.A.(2006),Developingandapplyinggreen building
technology in an indigenous community: An engaged approach to sustainability
education,InternationalJournalofSustainabilityinHigherEducation,7(2),142-157.

3. LSF-LST (2007). Understanding Sustainability, Learning for a Sustainable Future,

http://www.lsfIst.cz/en/teachers/understanding.php,YorkUniversity,Ontario,Canada.

4. ASCE (2004), Sustainable Engineering Practice: An Introduction, Jorge A. Vanegas(Editor).

 5. USGBC (2008), LEEE Rating Systems, US CIVIL ENGINEERING
Green Building Council,
http://www.usgbc.trg/DisplayPage.aspx?CMSPagelD=222(2008),Thematic Strategy on the
prevention and recycling of waste, The EuropeanCommission,
http://ec.euroaa.eu/environment/waste/index.htm

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule:

No. Topic Course No. of

Outcome Hrs
1 Module 1 Total: 9
1.1 Introduction to sustainability - Sustainable use of materials CO1, CO2 2
1.2 Energy, ecology and natural resources CO1, CO2 3
1.3 Engineering design process-Role of materials in design CO1, CO2 2
1.4 Construction ecology and metabolism - specifications and CO1, CO2 2
market
2 Module 2 Total: 9
CO1. CO2
2.1 Material flow analysis - efficiencies in mass flow 3
CO3
CO1, CO2
2.2 Constructing a material lflowsystem—embodied energy 3
CO3
2.3 Embodied energy CO2, CO3 1
2.4 Engineering models based on waste and materials management CO2, CO3 2
3 Module 3 Total: 9
Sustainability metrics — mass balance and footprint concept CO1, CO2
3.1 2
Sustainable design CO3,CO4
CO1,CO2
3.2 Specifications for sustainable material use 3
CO3,CO4
3.3 Waste management and material life cycles CO3,CO4 2
3.4 Environmentally sensitive design — Green engineering 2
CO3,CO4

4 Module 4 Total: 9
CO1,CO2
4.1 Life-cycle assessment—Life cycle assessment framework 3
CO3,CO4
CO1,CO2
4.2 Inventory analysis 3
CO3,CO4
CO1,CO2
4.3 impact assessment – interpretation 3
CO3,CO4
5 Module 5 Total: 9
CO1,CO2
5.1 Sustainable designs approaches 3
CO3,CO4
CO1,CO2
5.2 Sustainable urbanization – sustainable cities CO3,CO4 3

5.3 Sustainable transport - energy efficiency. CO3, CO4 3

Model Question Paper CIVIL ENGINEERING

QP CODE:
Reg No.:_______________ Name:__________________________
ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
FIFTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: CET 385

Course Name:SUSTAINABILITY ANALYSIS AND DESIGN

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 hours

Answer All Questions- 10 ×3 =30marks
Each question carries 3marks

1. Narrate any one material characteristic that is needed to ensure sustainability.

2. Highlight any one approach that could enable products in the market to be preferred on
environmental performance.

3. State any one of the observation from material flow analysis that would supplement
sustainability evaluation.

4. What is embodied energy of a material?

5. Define footprint based sustainability indicators.
6. Illustrate the term “Reuse factor”
7. Additive operations in LCA
8. LCA helps to arrive at lower entropy form of a material. Substantiate the statement giving any
one reason.
9. Prepare a short account on sustainable urbanization

10. How is energy efficiency linked with sustainable design process.

PART B
Each question carries 14marks

11. Identify any three engineering materials that are used as environmental substitutes for the
conventional systems. Also narrate the factors considered in their selection based on
engineering design requirement.
or
12. Explore the possibility of creating ecosystem based approach for construction process and
highlight its significance to ensure sustainability.

13. “Buildings embody large quantity of material energy”. Prepare a short description narrating
how this resource could be used to create energy efficient material use road map for Kerala.

or

14. Establish the industrial ecological model as an outcome of engineering models proposed for
waste and material management.
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
15. Explore the possibility of creating ecosystem based approach for construction process and
highlight its significance to ensure sustainability. Case based justification is expected.
or
16. Explain a few interventions incorporated as part of design for environment concept for
improving the material handing process.

17. Explain the four major steps involved in the LCA programme.
or
18. (i) List any two challenges faced while implementing the LCA for an impact
assessment programme.
(ii) Justify ,giving two reasons, how LCA enables to take environmentally informed
decisions
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER V
HONOURS
 Year of
STRUCTURAL CATEGORY L T P CIVIL
CREDITENGINEERING
CET393 Introduction
DYNAMICS
VAC 3 1 0 4 2019

Preamble: Structural Dynamics deals with the study of the behavior of structures under
dynamic loads. The course provides the basic concepts of structural dynamics and the
theoretical background to perform dynamic analysis of structures. The course focuses on
analysis of single and multi-degree of freedom systems. An introduction to continuous
system is also included. The course also provides an introduction to earthquake analysis of
structures.
Prerequisite:- Nil

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

Course Prescribed
Description of Course Outcome
Outcome learning level
Explain the basic terms and principles associated with Remembering/
CO1
structural dynamics. Understanding
Model single and multi-degree freedom systems for
CO2 Applying
dynamic analysis and develop equations of motion.
CO3 Estimate parameters of dynamic systems Applying
Perform dynamic analysis of single and multi degree
CO4 Applying
freedom systems.
CO5 Analyse and design vibration isolation systems. Applying
Develop equations of motion for dynamic analysis of
CO6 beams and perform free vibration analysis of simply Applying
supported beam.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes (Minimum requirement)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 1 - - - - - - - - - - -
CO2 3 1 - - - - - - - - - -
CO3 3 1 - - - - - - - - - -
CO4 3 3 - - - - - - - - - -
CO5 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - -
CO6 3 2 - - - - - - - - - -
Assessment Pattern CIVIL ENGINEERING
Continuous Assessment
End Semester
Bloom’s Category Tests
Examination
1 2
Remember/ Understand 15 15 30
Apply 35 35 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration
150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question carries 14 marks and can have maximum 2
sub-divisions.

Course Level Assessment (Sample) Questions

CO1: Explain the basic terms and principles associated with structural dynamics.

1. State and explain D’Alembert’s principle.

2. How do you model a system for dynamic analysis?
3. What are the components of a dynamic system? Explain.
4. What is natural frequency of a dynamic system?
5. Explain critically damped, over damped and under damped systems.
6. What is damping ratio? What is its significance?
7. Write short notes on ‘transient state’ and ‘steady state’ responses.
8. Explain ‘dynamic magnification factor’.
9. What is ‘impulse response function’? What is its significance?
 10. Write short notes on ‘Duhamel integral’. CIVIL ENGINEERING
11. Define ‘Transmissibility’ and explain its use in the design of vibration
isolation systems.
12. State and derive the orthogonality properties of mode shape vectors.
14. Explain proportional and non-proportional damping models.
14. Write short notes on ‘earthquake response spectrum’.

CO2: Model single and multi degree freedom systems for dynamic analysis and
develop equations of motion.

1. Obtain the spring mass model of the system shown

m P(t)
and develop the equation of motion.
Mass of column may be neglected.
EI, L

2. A simply supported beam of span L carried a central concentrated mass M.

Model the system for analysis of tranverse vibrations. Neglect mass of the
beam and damping. The flexural rigidity of the beam is EI.
3. Develop spring mass model of the
System shown. EI1, l
k
Take m = 30 kg, EI1 = 4000 Nm2,
2
EI 2 = 3200 Nm , l = 1 m and k = 2500 N/m. EI2, l
k

4. A rigid bar of length L is hinged at one end and carries a mass m at the other
end. The bar is kept in a horizontal position with the support of a spring of
stiffness k placed at a distance a from the hinged end. Formulate the equation
of motion. Neglect mass of the bar and damping.
5. Develop spring- mass model of the following frame. m

EI, 4 m EI, 3 m
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
CO3: Estimate parameters of dynamic systems

1. Estimate the stiffness of the system shown in sample Qn. 3 of CO1.

2. A free vibration test is conducted on an empty elevated water tank. A cable
attached to the tank applies a horizontal force of 100 kN and pulls the tank
horizontally by 40 mm. The cable is suddenly cut and the resulting free
vibration is recorded. At the end of four complete cycles, the time is 2 s and the
amplitude is 25 mm. From these data compute the following: (a) damped
natural frequency, (b) damping ratio, (c) effective stiffness and (d) effective
mass
3. Figure shows the time history of displacement response of a SDOF system, of
mass 50 kg, undergoing free vibration. Estimate the damped natural frequency,
damping ratio and undamped natural frequency of the system. Also determine
the stiffness and damping coefficient of the system.

4. A portable harmonic loading machine is used to conduct a test on a single

storied building. Harmonic loads of magnitude 2000 N are applied at the floor
level at two different frequencies. The data is given below.
Frequncy of load Response Amplitude Phase angle
(rad/s) (cm) (degree)
8 1.50 7
10 2.25 13
Estimate the mass, stiffness and damping of the system assuming it as a single
degree of freedom system.

CO4: Perform dynamic analysis of single and multi degree freedom systems.
1. Calculate the natural frequency and natural period of transverse vibrations of a
cantilever beam 50 mm diameter circular section carrying a load of 600 N at the free
end. Span of the cantilever is 1.0 m. Modulus of elasticity of the material of the
beam is 205 GPa. If a spring of stiffness 50 kN/m is introduced between the load
 and the beam, calculate the change in the natural frequency and natural
CIVIL period.
ENGINEERING
2. A SDOF system with mass 20 kg and stiffness 1800 N/m is given an initial
displacement of 10 mm and initial velocity of 250 mm/s. Find the displacement of
the system at t = 1.0 s. Also find the maximum displacement of the system. Neglect
damping.
3. A single degree of freedom system with mass 100 kg and stiffness 5000 N/m is
subjected to a harmonic load of amplitude 25 N and frequency 6 rad/s. Assuming
10% of critical damping find the steady state amplitude. If the frequency of load is
varied, at what frequency the steady state amplitude will reach maximum. Find the
maximum value of steady state amplitude also.
4. Find the natural frequencies and mode shapes of the spring-mass system shown in
figure. Take m1 = 20 kg, m2 = 15 kg, k1 = 1000 N/m, k2 = 1200 N/m and k3 = 900
x1 x2
N/m.
k1 k2 k3
m1 m2

8000 kg

3m
10000 kg
5. Find the natural frequencies and mode shapes of the 3m
shear building frame shown. Sketch the mode shapes. 10000 kg
Flexural rigidity of the columns = 2 × 10 6 Nm2 3m
Workout the mass normalized mode shape vectors also.

6. Determine the free vibration response of a two storied frame having the following
properties: Mass of first floor - 1200 kg, Mass of second floor - 800 kg, Stiffness of
first storey columns - 50 kN/m and Stiffness of second storey columns - 30 kN/m.
The initial displacements of first and second stories are 5 mm and 12 mm
respectively.
7. For a two degrees of freedom lumped mass system,
m 0   2k −k  1 1 
=M =  ; K  and the modal matrix Φ =  . The
 0 2m   −k 3k  1 −0.5
natural frequencies are given by ω12 = k and ω2 2 = 5 k . The first mass of the
m 2 m
system is subjected to a harmonic force P0 cos(Ωt ) . Determine the response of each
of the masses. Neglect damping.
8. For the frame shown in figure the natural 2000 kg
frequencies are 15.81 rad/s and 31.62 rad/s. 2
1 1 
The modal matrix Φ =  . Obtain the 4000 kg
 2 −1 1
response of the floors due to a constant
ground acceleration of 2 m/s2. Also, calculate
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

the floor displacements at t = 1 s.

CO5: Analyse and design vibration isolation systems.

1. An instrument is attached to a rubber mounting having a static deflection of 3.6

mm. The supporting structure vibrates at a frequency of 30 Hz. If the damping is
3% of critical, estimate the % reduction in the transmitted support motion.
2. A delicate instrument of weight 200 kg is to be mounted on a factory floor using
a vibration isolation suspension. The floor is vibrating with an amplitude of 0.25
mm and frequency 15 Hz. The maximum displacement that can be tolerated by
the instrument for reliable operation is 0.1 mm. Find the stiffness of the
suspension springs assuming 5% of critical damping.
3. A vibration isolation block (as shown in
figure) is to be installed in a laboratory
so that the vibration from adjacent Isolation Block
factory operations will not disturb
certain experiments. If the isolation
block weighs 900 kg and the
surrounding floor and foundation
vibrates at 1500 cycles/minute,
determine the stiffness of the isolation
system such that the motion of the
isolation block is limited to 20% of floor
vibration. Assume damping as 10%.

CO6: Develop equations of motion for dynamic analysis of beams and perform
free vibration analysis of simply supported beam.

1. Derive the differential equation governing the flexural vibration of beams.

2. Find the first three natural frequencies and mode shapes of a simply supported
beam of span L having uniform flexural rigidity EI and mass m per unit length.
Sketch the mode shapes also.
3. A steel rod of 20 mm diameter having length 2.0 m is simply supported at its
ends. Find its fundamental frequency of flexural vibration. Take density of steel
as 7850 kg/m3. Modulus of elasticity of steel may be taken as 200 GPa.
 SYLLABUS CIVIL ENGINEERING
Module I
Introduction – Parameters of dynamic system – D’Alembert’s principle, Equation of motion
of SDOF systems – undamped free vibration analysis. Damped free vibration analysis.
Measurement of damping – Logarithmic decrement, Response to harmonic loading - steady
state and transient states – steady sate amplitude, Dynamic magnification factor.

Module II
Response of SDOF systems to rectangular load, triangular load and half sine pulse.
Impulse response function, Response to general loads-Duhamel’s integral.
Response of SDOF system to support motion, Vibration Isolation, transmissibility

Module III
Multi degree of freedom systems – Lumped mass systems, shear building frame, Equation of
motion, free vibration analysis, Natural frequencies and mode shapes, orthogonality of
normal modes.

Module IV
Forced vibration analysis of multi degree of freedom systems – mode superposition method.
Response of MDOF systems subjected to harmonic load.
MDOF system subjected to support motion.

Module V
Introduction to earthquake analysis - Response spectrum. Response spectrum analysis of
MDOF systems.
Distributed parameter systems, Differential equation – beam flexure (elementary case),
undamped free vibration analysis of simply supported beams.

Text Books:
1) Mario Paz, Structural Dynamics, CBS Publishers, New Delhi, India, 2001.
2) Mukhopadhyay M., Vibrations, Dynamics and Structural Systems, Taylor & Francis,
London, 2000.

References:
1) Clough R. W. and J. Penzien, Dynamics of Structures, McGraw Hill, 1993.
2) Chopra A. K., Dynamics of Structures- Theory and application to Earthquake
Engineering, Pearson Education India, 2007.
3) Biggs J. M., Introduction to Structural Dynamics, McGraw-Hill Book Inc., New
York, 1964.
4) J.W. Smith, Vibration of Structures, Chapman and Hall, London.
Lecture Plan – Structural Dynamics CIVIL ENGINEERING

Course
No. of
Module Topic Outcomes
Lectures
addressed
1 Module I : Total lecture hours : 10
1.1 Introduction to structural dynamics and its importance in
Civil Engineering. Dynamic Load, Parameters of CO1 1
dynamic system
1.2 D’Alembers’s principle, Equation of motion of SDOF
system. Undamped free vibration analysis, concept of CO1,CO2 1
natural frequency
1.3 Modeling systems as SDOF spring-mass model,
CO2, CO3 2
estimation of stiffness, determination of natural frequency
1.4 Free vibration response of undamped SDOF systems CO4 1
1.5 Damped free vibration analysis – concept of critical
damping and damping ratio, underdamped and CO1, CO4 1
overdamped systems
1.6 Free vibration response of damped SDOF systems – CO1,
1
measurement of damping – logarithmic decrement. CO3, CO4
1.7 Response of damped SDOF systems to harmonic loading
– transient state and steady state responses.
CO1, CO4 2
Response of undamped SDOF systems to harmonic
loading.
1.8 Steady state amplitude, Dynamic magnification factor,
concept of resonance, frequency response plot of SDOF CO1, CO4 1
systems.
2 Module II : Total lecture hours : 10
2.1 Response of undamped and damped SDOF systems to
CO4 1
rectangular load.
2.2 Response of undamped and damped SDOF systems to
CO4 2
triangular load.
2.3 Response of undamped and damped SDOF systems to
CO4 1
half sine pulse.
2.4 Impulse response function for undamped and damped
systems CO1,
1
Response to general load – concept of Duhamel’s CO4
integral.
2.5 Response of undamped and damped SDOF systems to
CO4 2
support motion.
2.6 Vibration isolation – force and displacement isolation,
CO1, CO5 2
Transmissibility ratio.
 2.7 Design of vibration isolation systems CIVILCO5 1
ENGINEERING
3 Module III : Total lecture hours : 10
3.1 Multi-degree of freedom (MDOF) systems- examples,
CO1, CO4 1
Lumped mass systems, Shear building frames
3.2 Modelling of MDOF systems, Equation of motion CO2, CO3 2
3.3 Undamped free vibration analysis, Natural frequencies
CO1, CO4 3
and mode shapes, orthogonality of mode shapes
3.4 Mode superposition method - Free vibration response of
CO1, CO4 2
undamped MDOF systems
3.5 Mode superposition method -Free vibration response of
CO1, CO4 2
damped MDOF systems, concept of modal damping.
4 Module IV : Total lecture hours : 8
4.1 Forced vibration analysis - Mode superposition method. CO1, CO4 1
4.2 Response of MDOF systems subjected to harmonic load.
Maximum modal responses and modal combination using CO1, CO4 3
SRSS rule.
4.3 MDOF system subjected to support motion – Equation of
CO2 1
motion.
4.4 Response of shear building frames subjected to support
CO2, CO4 2
acceleration - maximum floor response using SRSS rule.
4.5 Concept of frequency response function (FRF) of MDOF
CO1 1
systems.
5 Module V : Total lecture hours : 7
5.1 Introduction to earthquake analysis, Response spectrum –
CO1 1
concept, Development of response spectrum
5.2 Response spectrum analysis of MDOF systems. CO4 2
5.3 Distributed parameter systems, Differential equation for
CO1, CO6 2
beam flexure (elementary case) and its solution
5.4 Undamped free vibration analysis of simply supported
CO6 1
beam – natural frequencies and mode shapes
5.5 Undamped free vibration analysis of beams with different
CO6 1
boundary conditions (formulation only)
MODEL QUESTION PAPER CIVIL ENGINEERING

Reg.No.:_______________ Name:__________________________
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
FIFTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code: CET393
Course Name: STRUCTURAL DYNAMICS
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A
Answer all questions; each question carries 3 marks.
1. a) Explain critically damped, over damped and under damped systems.
b) Distinguish between ‘transient state’ and ‘steady state’ responses.
c) What is ‘impulse response function’? What is its significance?
d) Define ‘Transmissibility’ and explain its use in the design of vibration isolation
systems.
e) What do you mean by shear building frames?
f) Explain orthogonality of mode shapes.
g) Explain mode superposition method of analysis.
h) Derive the equation of motion of a two storied shear building frame subjected to
support motion.
i) What is earthquake response spectrum?
j) Derive the partial differential equation governing the flexural vibration of beams.
Neglect damping and effect of axial force.
(10×3 marks = 30 marks)

PART B
Answer one full question from each module; each full question carries 14 marks.

Module I
2. A free vibration test is conducted on an empty elevated water tank. A cable attached to the
tank applies a horizontal force of 100 kN and pulls the tank horizontally by 40 mm. The
cable is suddenly cut and the resulting free vibration is recorded. At the end of four
complete cycles, the time is 2 s and the amplitude is 25 mm. From these data compute the
following: (a) damped natural frequency, (b) damping ratio, (c) effective stiffness, (d)
effective mass and (e) amplitude of displacement after 10 cycles.
3. A portable harmonic loading machine is used to conduct a test on a single storied building.
Harmonic loads of magnitude 2000 N are applied at the floor level at two different
frequencies. The data is given below.
Frequency of load(rad/s) Response Amplitude(cm) Phase angle(degree)
 8 1.50 CIVIL ENGINEERING
7
10 2.25 13
Estimate the mass, stiffness and damping of the system assuming it as a single degree of
freedom system

Module II
4. A single degree of freedom system with m = 10 kg and k = 1.2 kN/m is subjected to a half
sine load as shown in figure. Find expressions for the displacement of the system for t<0.4 s
and t>0.4 s. Neglect damping. Assume that the system startsP(t)from rest.
What is the displacement at t = 0.4 s ?

10 N

O t
0.4 s

5. A sieving machine weighs 2500 kg and when operating at full capacity, it exerts a harmonic
force of 3 kN amplitude at 20 Hz on its supports. After mounting the machine on spring-
type vibration isolators, it was found that the amplitude of the harmonic force exerted on the
supports had been reduced to 250 N. Determine the stiffness of the isolator springs. Assume
damping as 10% of critical.

Module III
6. Find the natural frequencies and mode shapes of the spring-mass system shown in figure.
Take m1 = 20 kg, m2 = 15 kg, k1 = 1000 N/m, k2 = 1200 N/m and k3 = 900 N/m.
x1 x2
k1 k2 k3
m1 m2

7. Determine the free vibration response of a two storied frame having the following
properties: Mass of first floor - 1200 kg, Mass of second floor - 800 kg, Stiffness of first
storey columns - 50 kN/m and Stiffness of second storey columns - 30 kN/m. The initial
displacements of first and second stories are 5 mm and 12 mm respectively.

Module IV
8. For a two degrees of freedom lumped mass system,
m 0   2k −k  1 1 
=M =  ; K  and the modal matrix Φ =  . The natural
 0 2m   −k 3k  1 −0.5
frequencies are given by ω12 = k and ω2 2 = 5 k . The first mass of the system is subjected
m 2 m
 to a harmonic force P0 cos(Ωt ) . Determine the response of CIVIL
each ofENGINEERING
the masses. Neglect
damping.
9. For the frame shown in figure the natural frequencies 2000 kg
are 15.81 rad/s and 31.62 rad/s. The modal matrix 2
1 1 
Φ =
2 −1 . Obtain the response of the floors due 4000 kg
  1
to a constant ground acceleration of 2 m/s2. Also,
calculate the floor displacements at t = 1 s.

Module V
10. Explain response spectrum analysis of MDOF shear building frames subjected to
earthquake ground acceleration. Derive the relevant equations.
11. Find the first three natural frequencies and mode shapes of a simply supported beam of span
L having uniform flexural rigidity EI and mass m per unit length. Sketch the mode shapes
also.

*********************
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
TRANSPORTATION Year of
CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
CET395 SYSTEMS Introduction
MANAGEMENT VAC 3 1 0 4 2019

Preamble: Objective of the course is to impart an awareness on transportation system

management, TSM strategies, promotion of non-transport modes and advanced transit
technologies.

Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course, the student will be able to:
CO 1 Apply a transportation system management strategy based on TSM goal or objective.
CO 2 Recommend methods to manage a transit system to improve its management
efficiency.
CO 3 Recommend measures for the promotion of non-transport modes for a transportation
system based on a goal or objective.
CO 4 Assess the suitability of advanced transit technologies in a transportation system.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 3 1 2 1 1 2
CO 2 2 1 2 1 1 2
CO 3 1 2 3 1 1 2
CO 4 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2

Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester
Test 1 Marks Test 2 Marks Examination (marks)
Remember 10 10 40
Understand 10 10 40
Apply 5 5 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark Distribution
Total Marks CIE (Marks) ESE (Marks) ESE Duration
150 50 100 3 hours
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:
Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course Project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern:

The question consists of two parts- Part A and Part B. Part A consists of 10 questions with 3
marks for each (two questions from each module). Part B consists of two questions from each
module, out of which one has to be answered. Each question carries 14 marks and can have
maximum 2 subdivisions.

Sample Course Level Assessment Questions:

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):Recommend and discuss two methods for reducing peak period
traffic?
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Identify the issues of multi-modal coordination?
Course Outcome 3 (CO3): As per IRC code, describe the features adopted for bicycle tracks to
popularise bicycle traffic in an Indian urban area.
Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Discuss on whether Indian population would adapt to the various
advanced transit measures popular in many developed nations.

Syllabus

Module 1
System approach to Transportation Planning; The need for TSM, Long range verses TSM
Planning TSM characteristics: TSM planning cycle, TSM strategies, Objectives and Philosophy;
Relevance of TSM actions in Indian context. Measures for Improving vehicular flow – one-way
Streets, Signal Improvement, Transit Stop Relocation, Parking Management, Reversible lanes-
Reducing Peak Period Traffic – Strategies for working hours, Congestion Pricing; Traffic
calming measures

Module 2
Public Transport: Preferential Treatment to high Occupancy Vehicles; Transit system operations,
Service and characteristics, Transit Service Improvement Measures; Car Pooling; Transit
Management Improvement Measure; Multi-Modal Coordination; Transit and Para transit
integration;
Module 3
Bus Route Network Planning and Management: Type of Bus Route Networks; Suitability for a
given Urban Area; Types of routes – Corridor routes, activity routes and residential routes;
Issues in route networks evaluation – number of route, length of route; Route alignment
methods; service coverage and accessibility index.
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Module 4
Local area traffic management: Promotion of Non – motorised modes: Measures to promote;
Pedestrianisation: Pedestrian facilities and management. Bicycle Transportation – advantages;
Planning Bicycle Facilities Junction Treats for cycle tracks;LOS criteria for Pedestrian and
bicycle Facilities.

Module 5

Advanced Transit Technologies: Conventional and Unconventional Systems; Rapid

Transportation System; New technologies – LRT, monorail, Automated Highways- Hovercraft;
System Characteristics and Suitability.

Text Books :

1. C. J. Khisty and B. K. Lall, Transportation Engineering: An Introduction, Prentice- Hall

India, 2003.
2. Transportation Demand Management (TDM) Encyclopedia, Victoria Transport Policy
Institute Canada, 2006.

References:

1. Transportation Engineering and Planning, by C. S. Papacostas and P. D. Prevedouros,

PrenticeHall of India Private Limited2001
2. Roger P. Roess, William R.McShane & Elena S.Prassas, Traffic Engineering, Prentice-
Hall, 1990.

Course Content and lecture Schedule:

No. Topic Course No. of
Outcome Hrs
1 Module 1 Total: 9
1.1 System approach to Transportation Planning; The need for CO1 1
TSM, Long range verses TSM Planning
1.2 TSM characteristics: TSM planning cycle, TSM strategies, CO1 1
Objectives and Philosophy; Relevance of TSM actions in
Indian context.
1.3 Measures for Improving vehicular flow – one-way Streets, CO1 7
Signal Improvement, Transit Stop Relocation, Parking
Management, Reversible lanes- Reducing Peak Period Traffic –
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
Strategies for working hours, Congestion Pricing.

2 Module 2 Total: 9
2.1 Public Transport: Preferential Treatment tohigh Occupancy CO2 4
Vehicles; Transit system operations, Service and
characteristics, Transit Service Improvement Measures; Car
Pooling;
2.2 Transit Management Improvement Measure; Multi-Modal CO2 5
Coordination; Transit and Para transit integration;
3 Module 3 Total: 9
3.1 Bus Route Network Planning and Management: Type of Bus CO2 2
Route Networks; Suitability for a given Urban Area;
3.2 Types of routes – Corridor routes, activity routes and CO2 2
residential routes;
3.3 Issues in route networks evaluation – number of route, length CO2 2
of route;
3.4 Route alignment methods; service coverage and accessibility CO2 3
index.
4 Module 4 Total: 9
4.1 Local area traffic management: Promotion of Non – motorised CO3 1
modes: Measures to promote;
4.2 Pedestrianisation: Pedestrian facilities and management. IRC CO3 2
codes.
4.3 Bicycle Transportation – advantages; Planning Bicycle CO3 4
Facilities Junction Treats for cycle tracks; IRC codes for
bicycle facilities.
4.4 LOS criteria for Pedestrian and bicycle Facilities. CO3 2
5 Module 5 Total: 9
5.1 Advanced Transit Technologies: low carbon vehicles; CO4 4
Automated Highways: System Characteristics and Suitability,
Electric vehicles, Automated vehicles: Planning, infrastructure
and implementation; issues.
5.2 Rapid Transportation System; New technologies – LRT, CO4 5
monorail, Bus rapid transit system (BRTS), Rail rapid transit
system(RRTS).
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
Model Question Paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

FIFTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: CET395

Course Name: TRANSPORTATION SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT

Marks:100 Duration: 3 hrs

PART A
(Answer all Questions: Each question carries 3 marks)

1 Mention the need for Transportation System Management.

2 Discussabout the relevance of TSM actions in Indian context?
3 What are the issues related to transit and para transit integration?
4 Discuss about carpooling.
5 What are the strategies adopted for fixing suitable bus network for a given Urban Area?
6 Comment on how to arrive at an accessibility index for a transit route.
7 Suggest the measures to be taken to promote NMT in Indian cities.
8 What considerations are to be made for planning proper bicycle Facilities for an urban
area?
9 Mention some important features suggested for automated highways.
10 Why should planners recommend BRTS for urban areas?
(3 x 10=30 marks)
.

PART B
(Answer one full question from each module)

11 a. Describe the system approach to transportation planning 7

b. What are reversible lanes? How does it help to improve traffic flow? 7
OR
12 a. Mention the objectives of TSM? 7
b. How is congestion pricing carried out to improve traffic flow? 7

13 a. What are the service characteristics of transit operations? 7

b. List out the five pillars of multi-modal integration? Explain each. 7
OR
14 List out the preferential treatments to High Occupancy Vehicles. Explain any 14
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
five in detail.

15 Compare and contrast the different route adopted under network planning 14
strategies.
OR
16 a. How do you evaluate the effectiveness of bus route network? 7
b. Describe in detail any method adopted by planners to align route in the urban 7
road networks.

17 a. List down the characteristics of Non – motorised modes of traffic. 7

b. How can the LOS criteria for Pedestrian formulated? 7
OR
18 a Suggest the modifications to be adopted in an urban roadway to enhance the 7
pedestrian facilities in reference to the IRC codes.
b. Discuss the Junction Treatments to be facilitated for laying cycle tracks. 7

19 a. What are the infrastructural facilities required for a properly planned electric 7
transit vehicle system in a typical Indian city
b. Compare and contrast any two popular Rapid Transportation Systems. 7
OR
20 a. What are the infrastructural and service characteristics advised for a typical 7
Indian city to be employed with an automatic highway?
b. What are the measures that can be adopted for enhancing the usage of rail as a 7
transit mode?
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Year of
GROUND WATER Category L T P Credit
CET397 Introduction
HYDROLOGY
VAC 3 1 0 4 2019

Preamble: The general objective of this course is to expose the students to the fundamental concepts of
groundwater hydrology and its engineering applications. The course aim to impart the knowledge on the
hydraulics of subsurface fluid flow, characteristics of porous media, well flow near aquifer boundaries,
surface investigation of ground water, quality of ground water, artificial recharge and ground water flow
modeling.

Pre-requisite: NIL

Course outcome

After the course, the student will be able to:

Understand the occurrence and movement of ground water through porous media and
CO1
apply Darcy’s law to simple ground water flow problems
CO2 Determine the aquifer parameters using different methods
Estimate drawdown in wells due to the effect of aquifer boundaries and thickness of
CO3
aquifers
CO4 Estimate sea water intrusion length and fresh water discharge into the sea
CO5 Perform numerical modeling of ground water system

CO-PO Mapping

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
Ground Water

CO1 3 3 1
Hydrology
CET397

CO2 3 3 1
CO3 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 1
CO5 3 3 1
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Assessment pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests

Bloom’s
Test 1 Test 2 End Semester Examination
Category
(Marks) (Marks) (Marks)
Remember 5 5 15
Understand 10 10 15
Apply 20 20 40
Analyze 15 15 30
Evaluate
Create

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks
Total : 50 marks

End semester examination pattern – There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each
question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each
module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-
divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Code: CET 397

Ground Water Hydrology
(Course plan)
Course
No of
Module Topic outcome
Hours
addressed
Module I (10 Hours)

Vertical distribution of ground water-Types of geologic

1.1 CO1 1
formations
Properties of aquifer related to storage and transmissivity of
1.2 CO1 1
water
1.3 Darcy’s law, Steady unidirectional flow CO1 1
1.4 Steady flow in a homogenous aquifer CO1 1
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

1.5 Problems from unidirectional flow CO1 2

1.6 Aquifer with recharge CO1 1
1.7 Flow into infiltration galleries CO1 1
1.8 Problems CO1 2
Module II (8 Hours)
Partial differential equation governing unsteady ground water
2.1 CO2 1
flow
2.2 Unsteady radial flow towards well CO2 1
2.3 Evaluation of aquifer parameters- Theis method CO2 1
2.4 Evaluation of aquifer parameters- Jacob’s method CO2 1
2.5 Evaluation of aquifer parameters- Chow’s method CO2 1
2.6 Problems- Evaluation of aquifer parameters CO2 3
Module III (11 Hours)
3.1 Well flow near aquifer boundaries CO3 1
3.2 Image well system CO3 1
3.3 Method of images –particular cases CO3 1
3.4 Problems from method of images CO3 2
3.5 Surface investigation of ground water CO3 1
3.6 Electrical resistivity method CO3 1
3.7 Seismic refraction method CO3 1
3.8 Determination of aquifer thickness of horizontal aquifers CO3 1
3.9 Problems- resistivity method, seismic refraction CO3 2
Module IV (9 Hours)
4.1 Quality of ground water –Graphical representations CO4 1
4.2 Pollution of ground water-sources CO4 1
4.3 Distribution and evaluation of ground water pollution CO4 1
4.4 Sea water intrusion-Ghyben-Herzberg equation CO4 1
4.5 Sea water-fresh water interface CO4 1
4.6 Length of intrusion CO4 1
4.7 Upconing , Sea water intrusion- preventive measures CO4 1
4.8 Problems- Sea water intrusion CO4 2
Module V (7 Hours)
5.1 Artificial recharge of ground water- different techniques CO5 1
5.2 Modelling of ground water flow CO5 1
Governing equations of ground water flow and boundary
5.3 CO5 1
conditions
Solution of partial differential equation of ground water flow for
5.4 1D steady ground water flow in homogenous aquifer using finite CO5 4
difference method
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

CET 397: Ground Water Hydrology

Syllabus

Module I

Vertical distribution of groundwater- Types of geologic formations, Properties of aquifer related

to storage and transmissivity of water, Darcy’s law, Steady unidirectional flow- steady flow in a
homogenous aquifer- aquifer with recharge- flow into infiltration galleries. (Problems from
unidirectional flow)

Module II

Partial differential equation governing unsteady groundwater flow- unsteady radial flow towards
well. Evaluation of aquifer parameters by Theis, Jacob’s and Chow’s method. (Problems from
evaluation of aquifer parameters)

Module III

Well flow near aquifer boundaries- Image well system. Method of images- Practical cases
(Problems from method of images). Surface investigation of ground water- different methods-
electrical resistivity method, seismic refraction method- determination of aquifer thickness of
horizontal aquifers (Problems from resistivity method, seismic refraction)

Module IV

Quality of ground water- Graphical representations. Pollution of ground water- sources,

distribution and evaluation of ground water pollution (Brief description only). Sea water
intrusion- Ghyben-Herzberg equation, sea water-fresh water interface, length of intrusion,
upconing, preventive measures.( Problems from sea water intrusion)

Module V

Artificial recharge of ground water-different techniques. Modelling of ground water flow-

governing equations of ground water flow and boundary conditions (basic ideas only), solution
of partial differential equation of ground water flow for 1D steady ground water flow in
homogenous aquifers (confined and unconfined) using finite difference method (uniform mesh
interval only)
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Text Books:

1. D.K. Todd, “Ground Water Hydrology”, Wiley International Ed; Toppan &Company
Ltd, Tokyo, 1995.
2. H.M. Raghunath, “Groundwater”, New Age International Publishers, New Delhi, 2007.
3. A.K. Rastogi, “Numerical Ground Water Hydrology”, Penram International Publishers,
Mumbai

References:

1. Karanth, “Ground Water Assessment, Development and Management” Tata McGraw

Hill publishing company Ltd.
2. “Ground Water Manual”, A Water Resources Technical Publication.
3. S.P Garg, “Ground Water and tube wells”, Oxford &IBH Publishing Company.
4. Punmia B.C. Ashok K Jain, Arun K Jain, B. B. L Pande, “ Irrigation and Water
Power
Engineering”, Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd. 2009
5. Herman Bouwer, “Ground Water Hydrology”, MC Graw Hill Kogakusha Ltd.
6. H.M. Raghunath, “Ground Water Hydrology”, Wiley Eastern Limited.
7. Neven Kresic, “Hydrogeology and Ground Water modeling”, CRC press,
Taylor&Francis group, 2007.
8. Freeze and Cherry, “Ground Water”, Prentice Hall
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Course Code: CET 397

Ground Water Hydrology
(Course Level Assessment Questions)
Course
Qn outcome
Question Marks
No (CO)
Assessed
Part A
(Answer ALL Questions)
1 Explain different properties of aquifer 3 CO1
2 What is an infiltration gallery? Explain with figure. 3 CO1
Briefly explain Theis method of estimation of aquifer
3 3 CO2
parameters
What are the assumptions in the derivation of partial
4 differential equation of unsteady radial flow towards 3 CO2
wells?
Find the number of image wells and locate the image
5 wells when the aquifer is delimited by two converging 3 CO3
recharge boundaries at right angles.
What are the applications of electrical resistivity
6 3 CO3
method?

7 What are the different sources of pollution of ground 3 CO4

water? Explain briefly
8 Explain upconing with neat sketch 3 CO4
Write the equations for the second order head gradient
9 of an aquifer using central, forward and backward 3 CO5
difference schemes
Write the governing equations of groundwater flow
10 3 CO5
and boundary conditions
Part B
(Answer ANY ONE FULL question from each
module)
Module I
11(a) Explain different types of aquifer with neat sketches 7 CO1
11(b) In a field test, time of 6 hour was required for a tracer to 7 CO1
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

travel between two observation wells 42 m apart. If the

difference in water-table elevations in these wells were
0.85 m and the porosity of the aquifer is 20%, calculate
the coefficient of permeability of the aquifer.
12(a) State Darcy’s law and its limitations 4 CO1
Sketch a typical infiltration gallery. Derive the equation
12(b) for discharge per unit length of the infiltration gallery 10 CO1
and phreatic surface by making suitable assumptions.
Module II
Derive partial differential equation for unsteady ground
13(a) 10 CO2
water flow
A well of 30 cm diameter is located in a confined aquifer
of transmissibility 500m2/day and storage coefficient of
13(b) 4 CO2
0.005. What pumping rate will have to be adopted if the
drawdown at the well is not to exceed 10 m in 2 days.
The time drawdown data recorded at an observation well
situated at a distance of 50 m from the pumping well is
given below.
Time (min) Drawdown (m)
1.5 0.15
3 0.6
4.4 1
14(a) 6 1.4 9 CO2
10 2.4
20 3.7
40 5.1
100 6.9
If the well discharge is 1.8 m3/min, calculate the
transmissibility and storage coefficient of the aquifer
using modified Theis method.
Describe the method for the estimation of aquifer
14(b) 5 CO2
parameters by Chow’s method.
Module III
Describe the seismic refraction method for
15 (a) 7 CO3
groundwater investigation with a neat sketch.
An aquifer is delineated by two converging barrier
15(b) boundaries, the angle of wedge being 450.Compute the 7 CO3
number of image wells associated with the wedge shaped
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

boundary system and mark them neatly in a sketch.

In a seismic refraction survey for locating an aquifer,

slopes of 1.66 x 10-3 and 0.000625 s/m were noted from
the time-distance plots. If the cross-over distance is 20.76
16 (a) m, compute the depth to the aquifer, the critical shot- 5 CO3
geophone distance, and the correct angle of incidence for
the refraction along the interface.

A 30cm well is pumped at the rate of 1000 lpm. The

transmissibility of the aquifer is 0.015m2/s. If the well is
located at a distance of 120m from a stream, what should
be the drawdown

(i) In the pumping well

16 (b) 9 CO3
(ii) In an observation well 100m away from the pumping
well on the side opposite to the stream

(iii) In an observation well 85m away from the pumping

well, on a line parallel to the stream.

Module IV
Derive the relationship between length of interface
17(a) 8 CO4
and freshwater discharge in a confined aquifer.
17(b) Explain different water quality plots with neat sketches 6 CO4
Describe the preventive measures to control saltwater
18(a) 7 CO4
intrusion into coastal aquifers with neat sketches.
By conductivity measurements in a well in a coastal
aquifer extending 4 km along the shore, the interface was
located at a depth of 20 m below m.s.l. at 100 m from the
shore, inland. The depth of the homogenous aquifer is 30
18(b) m below m.s.l. and has a permeability of 50 m/day. What 7 CO4
is the rate of fresh water flow into the sea and the width
of gap at the shore bottom through which it escapes into
the sea? What is the position of the toe of the saltwater
wedge? Use Glover’s method.
Module V
Explain different techniques of artificial recharge of
19 (a) 8 CO5
ground water with neat sketches.
Find the numerical value of the third and fourth order
19 (b) 6 CO5
aquifer head gradient by the forward, backward and
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

central difference method assuming uniform head

distribution in a confined aquifer between two wells
located 4 Km apart with piezometric levels of 100 m and
102 m respectively. Take these two wells as the extreme
nodes.

One dimensional steady state flow is happening in a

confined aquifer with transmissivity T. The aquifer is
bounded by an impervious boundary to the left and a
constant head boundary to the right. Ground water
flows into the aquifer due to a constant recharge Q
through an aquitard. Assuming Q=0.0005m/day, T=
20 (a) 10 CO5
500 m/day, thickness of aquifer b=100m, length of
aquifer L= 5 Km, Constant head of right boundary
H=100 m, find the head at different nodes using central
difference scheme.(Take discretization interval as
1250 m)

20 (b) Write any six applications of ground water models. 4 CO5

 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

Pages: 3

Reg No.:………………….. QP
CODE:………………..

Name:………………………………………

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

FIFTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: CET 397

Ground Water Hydrology

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3
hours

Part A
(Answer all questions; each question carries 3 marks)
1. Explain different properties of aquifer
2. What is an infiltration gallery? Explain with figure.
3. Briefly explain Theis method of estimation of aquifer parameters
4. What are the assumptions in the derivation of partial differential equation of
unsteady radial flow towards wells?
5. Find the number of image wells and locate the image wells when the aquifer is
delimited by two converging recharge boundaries at right angles.
6. What are the applications of electrical resistivity method?
7. What are the different sources of pollution of ground water? Explain briefly
8. Explain upconing with neat sketch
9. Write the equations for the second order head gradient of an aquifer using central,
forward and backward difference schemes
10. Write the governing equations of groundwater flow and boundary conditions
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Part B
(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)
Module I
11 (a) Explain different types of aquifer with neat sketches (7 Marks)

(b) In a field test, time of 6 hour was required for a tracer to travel between two observation
wells 42 m apart. If the difference in water-table elevations in these wells were 0.85 m
and the porosity of the aquifer is 20%, calculate the coefficient of permeability of the
aquifer. (7 Marks)

OR

12.(a) State Darcy’s law and its limitations

(4 Marks)
(b) Sketch a typical infiltration gallery. Derive the equation for discharge per unit length of
the infiltration gallery and phreatic surface by making suitable assumptions.
(10 Marks)

Module II

13(a) Derive partial differential equation for unsteady ground water flow
(10 Marks)

(b) A well of 30 cm diameter is located in a confined aquifer of transmissibility 500m2/day

and storage coefficient of 0.005. What pumping rate will have to be adopted if the drawdown
at the well is not to exceed 10 m in 2 days. (4 Marks)

OR

14.(a) The time drawdown data recorded at an observation well situated at a distance of 50 m
from the pumping well is given below.
Time (min) Drawdown (m)
1.5 0.15
3 0.6
4.4 1
6 1.4
10 2.4
20 3.7
40 5.1
100 6.9
3
If the well discharge is 1.8 m /min, calculate the transmissibility and storage
coefficient of the aquifer using modified Theis method. (9 Marks)
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

(b) Describe the method for the estimation of aquifer parameters by Chow’s method.

(5 Marks)

Module III

15. (a) Describe the seismic refraction method for groundwater investigation with a neat
sketch. (7 Marks)

(b) An aquifer is delineated by two converging barrier boundaries, the angle of wedge being
450.Compute the number of image wells associated with the wedge shaped boundary
system and mark them neatly in a sketch. (7 Marks)

OR

16. (a) In a seismic refraction survey for locating an aquifer, slopes of 1.66 x 10-3 and 0.000625
s/m were noted from the time-distance plots. If the cross-over distance is 20.76 m,
compute the depth to the aquifer, the critical shot-geophone distance, and the correct
angle of incidence for the refraction along the interface.

(5 Marks)

(b) A 30cm well is pumped at the rate of 1000 lpm. The transmissibility of the aquifer is
0.015m2/s. If the well is located at a distance of 120m from a stream, what should be the
drawdown

(i) In the pumping well

(ii) In an observation well 100m away from the pumping well on the side opposite to the
stream

(iii) In an observation well 85m away from the pumping well, on a line parallel to the
stream. (9 Marks)

Module IV

17 (a) Derive the relationship between length of interface and freshwater discharge in a
confined aquifer. (8 Marks)

(b) Explain different water quality plots with neat sketches . (6 Marks)

OR

18 (a) Describe the preventive measures to control saltwater intrusion into coastal aquifers
with neat sketches. (7 Marks)
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

(b) By conductivity measurements in a well in a coastal aquifer extending 4 km along the

shore, the interface was located at a depth of 20 m below m.s.l. at 100 m from the shore,
inland. The depth of the homogenous aquifer is 30 m below m.s.l. and has a permeability
of 50 m/day. What is the rate of fresh water flow into the sea and the width of gap at the
shore bottom through which it escapes into the sea? What is the position of the toe of the
saltwater wedge? Use Glover’s method. (7 Marks)

Module V

19 (a) Explain different techniques of artificial recharge of ground water with neat sketches.
(8 Marks)

(b) Find the numerical value of the third and fourth order aquifer head gradient by the
forward, backward and central difference method assuming uniform head distribution in a
confined aquifer between two wells located 4 Km apart with piezometric levels of 100 m
and 102 m respectively. Take these two wells as the extreme nodes.
(6 Marks)

OR

20.(a) One dimensional steady state flow is happening in a confined aquifer with
transmissivity T. The aquifer is bounded by an impervious boundary to the left and a
constant head boundary to the right. Ground water flows into the aquifer due to a
constant recharge Q through an aquitard. Assuming Q=0.0005m/day, T= 500 m/day,
thickness of aquifer b=100m, length of aquifer L= 5 Km, Constant head of right
boundary H=100 m, find the head at different nodes using central difference
scheme.(Take discretization interval as 1250 m) (10 Marks)

(b) Write any six applications of ground water models. (4 Marks)

 CIVIL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER VI
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

CIVIL ENGINEERING
CORE COURSES – S6
COURSE
SLOT COURSES L-T-P HOURS CREDIT
NO.
A CET302 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS – II 3-1-0 4 4
B CET304 ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING 4-0-0 4 4
C CET306 DESIGN OF HYDRAULIC STRUCTURES 4-0-0 4 4
D CETXXX PROGRAM ELECTIVE I 3-0-0 3 3
INDUSTRIAL ECONOMICS &
E HUT300 3-0-0 3 3
FOREIGN TRADE
F CET308 COMPREHENSIVE COURSE WORK 1-0-0 1 1
S CEL332 TRANSPORTATION ENGINEERING LAB 0-0-3 3 2
T CEL334 CIVIL ENGINEERING SOFTWARE LAB 0-0-3 3 2
R/M/H VAC REMEDIAL/MINOR/HONOURS COURSE 3-1-0 4* 4
TOTAL 25/29 23/27
MINOR COURSES - S6
R/M/H CET382 ESTIMATION, COSTING AND VALUATION 3-1-0 4 4
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION & GROUND
R/M/H CET384 3-1-0 4 4
IMPROVEMENT TECHNIQUES
R/M/H CET386 ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH& SAFETY 3-1-0 4 4
HONOURS COURSES - S6
R/M/H CET394 FINITE ELEMENT METHOD 3-1-0 4 4
R/M/H CET396 EARTH DAMS AND EARTH RETAINING STRUCTURES 3-1-0 4 4
R/M/H CET398 ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION MODELLING 3-1-0 4 4
PROGRAM ELECTIVEI - S6
CET312 ADVANCED COMPUTATIONAL METHODS 3-0-0
CET322 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION 3-0-0
CET332 TRAFFIC ENGINEERING & MANAGEMENT 3-0-0 3 3
D CET342 MECHANICS OF FLUID FLOW 3-0-0
CET352 ADVANCED CONCRETE TECHNOLOGY 3-0-0
CET362 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT 3-0-0
CET372 FUNCTIONAL DESIGN OF BUILDINGS 3-0-0
 Year of
STRUCTURAL CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
CET302 Introduction
CIVIL ENGINEERING
ANALYSIS - II PCC 3 1 0 4 2019

Preamble: The course enables the students to analyse various types of multistoreyed
structures using appropriate methods and tools. It utilises the procedures of force methods
and displacement methods for analysing framed structures. Plastic theory and its applications
are introduced to students. A very important topic of applications of principles of dynamics to
analyse structures while undergoing dynamic deformations is also made familiar with. The
course trains the students to develop mathematical models and helps to sharpen their
analytical skills, which also helps the student to lay foundation for further advanced topics
like finite element method.
Prerequisite: CET301Structural Analysis I

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

Course Prescribed learning

Description of Course Outcome
Outcome level

Understand the principles of plastic theory and its

CO1 Understanding, Applying
applications in structural analysis.

Examine the type of structure and decide on the

CO2 Analysing, Applying
method of analysis.
Apply approximate methods of analysis for
CO3 framed structures to ascertain stress resultants Analysing, Applying
approximately but quickly.
Apply the force method to analyse framed Understanding,Analysing,
CO4
structures. Applying
Understanding,
Apply the displacement methods to analyse Analysing,
CO5
framed structures.
Applying
Remember basic dynamics, understand the basic Remembering,
CO6 principles of structural dynamics and apply the Understanding,
same to simple structures. Applying
Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes (Minimum requirement)
CIVIL ENGINEERING
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2 - - - - - - - - - -
CO2 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - -
CO3 3 3 1 - - - - - - - - -
CO4 3 3 1 - - - - - - - - -
CO5 3 3 1 - - - - - - - - -
CO6 3 3 1 - - - - - - - - -

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment
Bloom’s Category Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 05 05 10
Understand 10 10 20
Apply 20 20 50
Analyse 15 15 20
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration
150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question carries 14 marks and can have maximum 2
sub-divisions.
Course Level Assessment Questions
CIVIL ENGINEERING
CO1: Understand the principles of plastic theory and its applications in structural
analysis.
1. Derive an expression for the shape factor of a rectangular cross section.

2. Explain the terms ‘design plastic moment capacity of a member’ and ‘collapse
load of a structure’
3. Find the plastic moment capacity of the beam shown in figure. Assume uniform
section throughout.

4. For the cantilever in Fig.2, determine the collapse load.

CO2: Examine the type of structure and decide on the method of analysis.
1. Differentiate between force and displacement methods of analysis of framed
structures.

2. Explain how you will determine the suitability of force method or displacement
method for analysis of a structure?

3. Which are the situations in which an analyst uses approximate methods of

structural analysis? What are their advantages and disadvantages?

CO3: Apply approximate methods of analysis for framed structures to ascertain

stress resultants approximately but quickly.

1. What are the assumptions in cantilever method?

2. Total dead load is 12 kN/m and total live load is 20 kN/m on ABCD. Analyse the
frame for midspan positive moment on BC, using substitute frame method.
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

3. Analyse the frame in figure using portal method.

CO4: Apply the force method or displacement method to analyse structures

accurately.
1. Derive stiffness matrix for the degrees of freedom shown for the beam in figure.

2. Prove that flexibility matrix is the inverse of stiffness matrix for a given set of
actions and corresponding displacements.
3. Analyse the beam in figure using flexibility method.

4. Determine all the member end moments for the frame shown in figure, using
stiffness method.
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

5. Determine the displacements at B for the beam shown in figure, using stiffness
method.

6. Find all the joint displacements for the beam in Figure 5, using direct stiffness
method.

CO5: Remember basic dynamics, understand the basic principles of structural

dynamics and apply the same to simple structures.

1. Explain the components of the basic dynamic system

2. Derive an expression for the free-vibration response of a damped SDOF system.
3. Explain transient and steady-state responses
4. A vibrating system consists of a weight of W = 100kN and a spring with stiffness
k = 20 N/m is viscously damped so that the ratio of two consecutive amplitudes is
1/0.85. Detemine: a) the natural frequency of the undamped system, b) the
damping ratio, c) the damping coefficient and d) the damped natural frequency.
 SYLLABUS
CIVIL ENGINEERING
MODULE I – 9 hrs.
Plastic Theory: Introduction – plastic hinge concepts – plastic modulus – shape factor –
redistribution of moments – collapse mechanisms – Plastic analysis of beams and portal
frames by equilibrium and mechanism methods.(single storey and single bay frames only) – 6
hrs.

Approximate methods of analysis of multistoried frames:

Analysis for vertical loads-substitute frames-loading condition for maximum hogging and
sagging moments in beams and maximum bending moment in columns – 3 hrs.

MODULE II – 9 hrs.
Approximate methods (continued): Wind load analysis of multistoried frames – portal
method and cantilever method for lateral load analysis. – 2 hrs.

Matrix analysis of structures:

Definition of flexibility and stiffness influence coefficients - Concepts of physical approach –
1 hr.
Flexibility method: flexibility matrices for truss and frame elements-load transformation
matrix-development of total flexibility matrix of the structure-analysis of simple structures-
plane truss and plane frame-nodal loads and element loads-lack of fit and temperature effects.
– 6 hrs.

MODULE III – 9 hrs.

Stiffness method: Development of stiffness matrices by physical approach-stiffness matrices
for truss and frame elements-displacement transformation matrix-analysis of simple
structures-plane truss and plane frame-nodal loads and element loads-lack of fit and
temperature effects. – 9 hrs.

MODULE IV – 9 hrs.
Direct stiffness method: Introduction to direct stiffness method-Rotation of axes in two
dimensions, stiffness matrix of elements in global co- ordinates from element co-ordinates-
assembly of load vector and stiffness matrix, solution of two span continuous beam-single
bay single storey portal frame. – 9 hrs.

MODULE V
Structural dynamics:
Introduction - degrees of freedom - equation of motion, D’Alembert’s principle-damping-
free response of damped and undamped systems- logarithmic decrement-- single degree of
freedom systems subjected to harmonic load - transient and steady state responses, simple
portal frame problems. – 9 hrs.
Text Books:
1. James M Gere & William Weaver, Matrix Analysis of Framed Structures - (CBS
CIVIL ENGINEERING
Publishers)
2. Mechanics of Structures Vol I & II, Junnarkar S.B., Charotar Publishing House
3. Devdas Menon, Structural Analysis, Narosa Publications
4. Wang C.K., Intermediate Structural Analysis, McGraw Hill
5. Mario Paz, Structural Dynamics

References:
1. Pandit and Gupta, Structural Analysis – A Matrix Approach
2. Reddy C. S., Basic Structural Analysis, Tata McGraw Hill
3. Norris and Wilbur, Elementary Structural Analysis, Tata McGraw Hill
4. Punmia B. C., Strength of Materials and Mechanics of Structures, Laxmi Publications
5. RC Hibbeler, Structural Analysis
6. Wang C K, Matrix Method of Structural Analysis
7. Anil. K. Chopra, Dynamics of structures, Pearson Education/ Prentice Hall India,
8. Clough R.W. and Penzein, J., Dynamics of structures - Tata McGraw Hill
9. Madhujith Mukhopadhyay and Abdul Hamid Sheikh, Matrix and Finite Element Analysis
of Structures, Ane Books India.
10. Rajasekharan&Sankara Subramanian, Computational Structural Mechanics
11. William T Thomson, Theory of vibration with application
12. Tse, Morse Hinkle, Mechanical Vibrations
Lecture Plan –Structural Analysis II
CIVIL ENGINEERING
Course
No. of
Module Topic Outcomes
Lectures
addressed
1 Module I: Total lecture hours: 9
1.1 Plastic Theory: Introduction – concept of plastic hinge CO1 1

1.2 Plastic modulus – shape factor CO1 1

1.3 Redistribution of moments – collapse mechanisms –
plastic analysis of beams and portal frames by
CO1 4
equilibrium and mechanism methods(single storey and
single bay frames only)
1.4 Introduction to approximate methods of analysis of
multistoried frames, analysis for vertical loads-substitute CO2, CO3 1
frames
1.5 Loading condition for maximum hogging and sagging
moments in beams and maximum bending moment in CO3 2
columns – numerical problems
2 Module II: Total lecture hours: 9
2.1 Approximate methods (continued): Wind load analysis
CO3
of multistoried frames – portal method and cantilever 2
method for lateral load analysis.
2.2 Introduction to matrix analysis of structures:
Definition of flexibility and stiffness influence CO2, CO4 1
coefficients - Concepts of physical approach
2.3 Flexibility method: flexibility matrices for truss and
CO4 1
frame elements
2.3 Load transformation matrix-development of total
CO4 1
flexibility matrix of the structure
2.4 Analysis of simple structures-plane truss and plane
frame-nodal loads and element loads CO4 3

2.5 Lack of fit and temperature effects 1

3 Module III: Total lecture hours: 9
3.1 Stiffness method: Development of stiffness matrices by
CO5 1
physical approach
3.2 Stiffness matrices for truss and frame elements-
displacement transformation matrix CO5 2
 3.3 Analysis of simple structures-plane truss and plane
CO5 5
frame-nodal loads and element loads CIVIL ENGINEERING
3.4 Lack of fit and temperature effects CO5 1
4
Module IV: Total lecture hours: 9

4.1 Direct stiffness method: Introduction to direct stiffness

CO2, CO5 1
method-global co-ordinates andlocal co-ordinates.
4.2 Rotation of axes in two dimensions, stiffness matrix of
elements in global co- ordinates from element co- CO5 2
ordinates- assembly of load vector and stiffness matrix
4.3 Solution of numerical problems on two span continuous
CO5 6
beam – single bay single storey portal frame
5 Module V: Total lecture hours: 9
5.1 Structural dynamics:
Introduction - degrees of freedom - equation of motion, CO6 2
D’Alembert’s principle - Damping
5.2 Free response of damped and undamped systems CO6 2

5.3 Logarithmic decrement CO6 1

5.4 Single degree of freedom systemssubjected to harmonic
load - transient and steady state responses CO6 2

5.5 Simple portal frame problems CO6 2

MODEL QUESTION PAPER
CIVIL ENGINEERING
Reg.No.:_______________ Name:__________________________
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
SIXTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code: CET302
Course Name: STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS II
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A
Answer all questions; each question carries 3 marks.

1. a) Derive an expression for the shape factor of a rectangular cross section.

b) What are the advantages and disadvantages of approximate methods of structural
analysis?
c) Derive flexibility matrix for the co-ordinates shown for the beam in figure.

d) What are the assumptions in cantilever method?

e) Derive stiffness matrix for the degrees of freedom shown for the beam in figure.

f) Prove that flexibility matrix is the inverse of stiffness matrix for a given set of actions
and corresponding displacements.
g) Explain local co-ordinates and global co-ordinates.
h) Write down the steps involved in direct stiffness method.
i) Explain the components of the basic dynamic system.
j) Explain transient and steady-state responses.
(10×3 marks = 30 marks)

PART B
Answer one full question from each module; each full question carries 14 marks.

Module I
2. Find the plastic moment capacity of the beam shown in figure. Assume uniform section
throughout .
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

(14 marks)

3. Total dead load is 12 kN/m and total live load is 20 kN/m on ABCD. Analyse the frame for
midspan positive moment on BC, using substitute frame method.

(14 marks)

Module II

4. Analyse the beam in figure using flexibility method.

(14 marks)

5 Analyse the frame in figure using portal method.

Module III
6. Determine all the member end moments for the frame shown in figure, using stiffness
method. CIVIL ENGINEERING

(14 marks)

7. Determine the displacements at B for the beam shown in figure, using stiffness method.

(14 marks)

Module IV

8. Find all the joint displacements for the beam in Figure 5, using direct stiffness method.

(14 marks)
9. Find the joint displacements for the pin-jointed truss shown in figure, using direct stiffness
method.

(14 marks)

Module V
10. Derive an expression for the free-vibration response of a damped SDOF system
(Underdamped case only). CIVIL ENGINEERING
(14 marks)
11. A vibrating system consists of a weight of W = 100kN and a spring with stiffness k = 20
N/m is viscously damped so that the ratio of two consecutive amplitudes is 1/0.85.
Detemine: a) the natural frequency of the undamped system, b) the damping ratio, c) the
damping coefficient and d) the damped natural frequency
(14 marks)
*********
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Year of
CET ENVIRONMENTAL CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
Introduction
304 ENGINEERING
PCC 4 0 0 4 2019

Preamble This course introduces students to various treatment technologies for drinking water
and domestic waste water. Students will learn the role of an environmental engineer in
ensuring public health. They will understand how engineering approach can enhance the
environmental quality by scaling up the physical and biological purification processes that
exist in nature.

Prerequisite: CET 203 Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulics, CET 307 Hydrology &Water
Resources Engineering

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able

Course Prescribed
Description of Course Outcome
Outcome learning level
To appreciate the role of environmental engineering in
CO1 Understanding
improving the quality of environment
To plan for collection and conveyance of water and waste
CO2 Applying
water
To enhance natural water purification processes in an
CO3 Analysing
engineered environment
To decide on appropriate technology for water and waste
CO4 Evaluating
water treatment

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes (Minimum requirement)

PO PO
PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10
11 12
CO 1 - - - - - 2 2 - - - - -
CO 2 3 - 3 - - - - - - - - -
CO 3 3 - 3 - - - - - - - - -
CO4 3 - 3 - - - - - - - - -
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment
Bloom’s Category Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 15
Understand 10 10 15
Apply 15 15 35
Analyse 15 15 35
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question carries 14 marks and can have maximum 2 sub-
divisions.
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Course Level Assessment Questions

CO1:To be able to appreciate the role of environmental engineering in improving the

quality of environment

1.Explain from a health perspective the need for treating drinking water and safe disposal of
waste water

2.How to dispose the sludge from waste water treatment plant safely?

3.How to remove colloidal range particles from water to satisfy drinking water norms?

CO 2: To be able to plan for collection and conveyance of water and waste water

1.How design period is decided for water supply schemes?

2.Discuss various types of pumps used in a water supply scheme

3.Compare separate and combined sewerage systems

CO3: To be able to enhance natural water purification processes in an engineered

environment

1.Discuss different types of aerators with their advantage and limitations

2.Design a continuous flow rectangular sedimentation tank for a population of 20,000 persons
with an average per capita demand of 120 litres per day. Assume a detention period of 6 hours.

3.Design an activated sludge plantto treat 6.0 Mld of sewage with BOD of 210 mg/l. The final
effluent should be 30 mg/l

CO4: To be able to decide on appropriate technology for water and waste water
treatment

1. Compare aerobic and anaerobic biological processes for treating waste water

2.Explain in detail the different disinfection techniques available for water and waste water
treatment?

3.Discuss the treatment method available for high strength waste water
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS

Module 1
Introduction to environmental engineering and role of environmental engineers-enhancing
natural purification processes in an engineered environment-public health perspective for
treating water and waste water - 1hr

Water quantity estimation:

Population forecast- water demand estimation-types of demand- demand fluctuation -3 hrs

Estimation for waste water quantity:

Dry weather flow and storm water flow-population equivalent-design period - 2 hrs
Collection and conveyance:
water intake structures- -gravity flow and pressure flow systems- 1 hr

Systems of sewerage: separate and combined-types of pumps for water and waste water
conveyance - 2 hrs

Module 2
Layout plan of a conventional water treatment plant- site selection-concept of unit operations
and unit processes-Screening-types of screens -aeration -aerator types- 3 hrs

Theory and principles of sedimentation-Stoke’s law-Types of settling -Design of plain

sedimentation tanks - 4 hrs

Mechanisms of coagulation and flocculation, popular coagulants and feeding devices -2 hrs

Module 3
Filtration of water-theory of filtration-types of filters - design of arapid sand filter - 3hrs
Disinfection of water - various methods - advantages and limitations -2 hrs

Lay out of water distribution network-types-methods of distribution-network analysis -Hardy

cross and equivalent pipe methods-4 hrs

Module 4
Layout plan of a conventional waste water treatment plant- site selection- concept of primary,
secondary and tertiary treatment- 1hr
Unit operations in waste water- primary treatment -equalization of flow- 2hrs
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Secondary treatment methods-basic concepts of biological unit processes-aerobic and

anaerobic- attached and suspended growth processes (Concepts only)- 2 hr

Activated sludge process- basic concepts-design of a conventional Activated Sludge Plant -

3hrs

Trickling filter (Concept only)- types- construction & operation - 1 hr

Module 5
Anaerobic treatment of high strength waste water- Up flow Anaerobic Sludge Blanket (UASB)
reactor (Concept only)- 2 hrs
Natural waste water treatment systems-Oxidation Ponds and Lagoons-Wetlands and Root-
zone systems ( Concepts only)- 3 hrs
Low cost sanitation systems- Design of a septic tank and soak-pit - 2 hr
Sludge treatment (concepts only) -thickening- digestion- dewatering- drying- composting- 2hrs

Text Books:
1. Howard S Peavy, Donald R Rowe and George Tchobanoglous, Environmental
Engineering, Mc Graw Hill Education , 2013
2. Mackenzie L Davis, David A Cornwell, Introduction to Environmental
Engineering, Mc Graw Hill Education, 2014
3. S.K.Garg, Water Supply Engineering, Khanna Publishers. 2010
4. G S Birdie, Water Supply and Engineering, Dhanapat Rai Publishing Company,
2014
5. J. Arceivala, Shyam R. Asolekar, Wastewater Treatment for Pollution Control
and Reuse, McGrawhill Education, 2007
6. S.K. Garg, Sewage disposal and air pollution engineering, Khanna Publishers.
2008

References:
1. Metcalf and Eddy, Waste Water Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill publishing Co Ltd,
2003
2. Syed R Qasim, Edward M Motley, Guang Zhu, Water Works Engineering-Planning,
Design & Operation, PHI Learning, 2012.
3. Syed R Qasim, Wastewater Treatment Plants-Planning, Design & Operation, CRC
Press,1999
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Lecture Plan- Environmental Engineering

Module Topic Course No. of

Outcomes Lectures
addressed
1 Module 1: Total Lecture Hours -9
1.1 Introduction to environmental engineering and role of CO1 1
environmental engineers-enhancing natural purification
processes in an engineered environment-public health
perspective for treating water and waste water
1.2 Water and waste water quantity estimation: CO2 3
Population forecast- water demand estimation-types of
demand- demand fluctuation
1.3 Estimation for waste water quantity- dry weather flow CO2 2
and storm water flow-population equivalent-design
period
1.4 Collection and conveyance: CO2 1
water intake structures- -gravity flow and pressure flow
systems-
1.5 Systems of sewerage: separate and combined-types of CO2 2
pumps for water and waste water conveyance
2 Module II: Total Lecture Hours- 9
2.1 Layout plan of a conventional water treatment plant- site CO1,CO4 3
selection-concept of unit operations and unit processes-
Screening-types of screens-aeration-aerator types
2.2 Theory and principles of sedimentation-Stoke’s law- CO3 4
Types of settling -Design of plain sedimentation tanks
2.3 Mechanisms of coagulation and flocculation, popular CO3 2
coagulants and feeding devices
3 Module III: Total Lecture Hours-9
3.1 Filtration of water-theory of filtration-types of filters - CO3,CO4 3
design of rapid sand filter
3.2 Disinfection of water - various methods - advantages and CO4 2
limitations
3.3 Lay out of water distribution network-methods of CO4 4
distribution-network analysis -Hardy cross and equivalent
pipe methods
4 Module IV: Total Lecture Hours- 9
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

4.1 Layout plan of a conventional waste water treatment CO1 1

plant- site selection- concept of primary, secondary and
tertiary treatment

4.2 Unit operations in waste water- primary treatment - CO3 2

equalization of flow
4.3 Secondary treatment methods- basic concepts of CO4 2
biological unit processes-aerobic and anaerobic- attached
and suspended growth processes (Concepts only)
4.4 Activated sludge process- basic concepts-design of a CO3 3
conventional Activated Sludge Plant
4.5 Trickling filter (Concept only)- types- construction & CO3 1
operation
5 Module V: Total Lecture Hours- 9
5.1 Anaerobic treatment of high strength waste water- Up CO3 2
flow Anaerobic Sludge Blanket (UASB) reactor (Concept
only)
5.2 Natural waste water treatment systems-Oxidation Ponds CO3, CO4 3
and Lagoons-Wetlands and Root-zone systems (Concepts
only)
5.3 Low cost sanitation systems- Design of a septic tank and CO3 2
soak-pit
5.4 Sludge treatment (concepts only) - thickening- digestion- CO4 2
dewatering- drying- composting
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

Reg No.:_______________ Name:__________________________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SIXTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION

Course Code: CET304

Course Name: ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
Part A
(Answer all questions; each question carries 3 marks)

1. Explain dry weather flow

2. What is an intake?
3. Why screens are used in water and waste water treatment plants?
4. What is hindered settling?
5. Compare slow sand filter and rapid sand filter
6. Explain the principle of disinfection
7. Discuss the unit operations and unit processes in a waste water treatment plant
8. Compare aerobic and anaerobic processes
9. How wetlands treat waste water?
10. Explain the working of a septic tank with a neat sketch

PART B
(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

11. (a) Explain in brief different methods used for prediction of future population of a city
(9 Marks)
(b) What is fire demand? How will you calculate fire demand (5 Marks)
OR
12. (a) Explain the term "Design Period" (5 Marks)
(b) Forecast the population of the town in the year 2040 from the following data using
arithmetic increase method and geometric increase method
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Year 1990 2000 2010 2020

Population 13400 19500 28500 36300

(9 Marks)

13. (a) Explain with sketches the types of aerators with advantages and limitations
(6 Marks)
(b) Explain different types of settling (8Marks)
OR
14. (a) Explain the mechanisms of coagulation (5 Marks)
(b) Design a plain sedimentation tank for treating 6 MLD of water. Make suitable
assumption. Prepare a neat sketch
(9 Marks)

15. (a) Explain the theory of filtration (5 Marks)

(b) Explain and compare various disinfection methods (9Marks)
OR
16. Design a rapid sand filter to treat 10 million litres of raw water per day allowing 0.5%
of filtered water for backwashing. Half hour per day is used for backwashing. Assume
necessary data. (14 Marks)

17. (a) Discuss the role of an equalization tank at a waste water treatment plant
(4Marks)
(b) Discuss in detail various biological processes available for treating waste water
. (10 marks)
OR
18. (a)Explain primary, secondary and tertiary treatment phases (5 Marks)
(b) Design an activated sludge plant treat 6.0 Mld of domestic sewage having a
BOD of 210 mg/l. The final effluent should have a BOD of 30 mg/l. (9 Marks)

19. (a) Discusssludge treatment processes for safe disposal (9 Marks)

(b) Explain the working of a UASB with neat sketch (5 Marks)
OR
20. Discuss natural waste water treatment systems with neat sketches (14 Marks)
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Year of
DESIGN OF HYDRAULIC Category L T P Credit
CET306 Introduction
STRUCTURES
PCC 4 0 0 4 2019

Preamble: The general objective of this course is to expose the students to the fundamental
concepts of hydraulic design of different hydraulic structures and to develop the drawings of
minor irrigation structures. This course equip the students to perform the hydraulic design of
minor irrigation structures such as cross drainage works, canal falls and regulators and prepare
drawings of the same. To impart the knowledge on causes of failure and design criteria of
hydraulic structures like dams and canal structures.

Pre-requisite: Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulics, Hydrology & Water Resources Engineering

Course outcome : After the course, the student will able to:

Elucidate the causes of failure, principles of design of different components of hydraulic

CO1
structures
CO2 Describe the features of canal structures and perform the design of alluvial canals
Perform the hydraulic design of minor irrigation structures such as cross drainage works,
CO3
canal falls, cross regulator
CO4 Prepare the scaled drawings of different minor irrigation structures
Describe the design principles and features of dams and perform the stability analysis of
CO5
gravity dams

CO - PO Mapping

1 – Slight (Low), 2 – Moderate (Medium), 3 – Substantial (High)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
STRUCTURES
HYDRAULIC

CO1 3 2 1
DESIGN OF
CET306

CO2 2 3
CO3 3 3 3
CO4 3
CO5 3 2 1 1
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Assessment pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests

Bloom’s Test 1 Test 2 End Semester Examination
Category (Marks) (Marks) (Marks)
Remember 5 5 10
Understand 10 10 20
Apply 20 20 40
Analyze 15 15 30
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
(For the first internal test, minimum two design
should be included)
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks
Assignment should be scaled drawings (in A2
size sheet)
Total : 50 marks

End semester examination pattern: There will be three parts; Part A, Part B and Part C.
Part A contains 2 questions each from Modules I and II, out of which student can answer
any one. Total marks for this part will be 30. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-
divisions and carry 15 marks. Part B will be for 50 marks with 25 mark for design and 25
mark for drawing (not to scale) based on Module III. In the drawing part, two views should
be asked. Part C will be for 20 Marks. Two full questions each from Modules IV and V
carrying 10 mark should be asked and the student can answer any one from each module.
The examination will be for 3 hours.
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Course Code: CET306

Design of Hydraulic Structures
Course Level Assessment Questions

Elucidate the causes of failure, principles of design of different components of

CO1
hydraulic structures
1 State Khosla’s interim conclusions
2 Explain the causes of failure of weirs on permeable soils and state the remedial measures
Explain the corrections to be applied on % uplift pressure estimated by the method of
3
independent variables
4. Obtain the expression for floor thickness as per Bligh’s theory

CO2 Describe the features of canal structures and perform the design of alluvial canals
1 State the functions of under sluices and divide walls
2 Explain the classification of cross drainage structures
3 Describe the features of a Siphon well drop with a sketch
4. Explain Kennedy’s theory for the design of Alluvial channels
5. Explain (i) level crossing (ii) canal siphon with sketches
Design an irrigation canal through alluvial soils for the following data : Discharge =20
6.
m3/sec; Lacey’s silt factor =1

Perform the hydraulic design of minor irrigation structures such as cross drainage
CO3 works, canal falls, cross regulator.

Design a 1.5 m Sarda Type Fall for a canal carrying a discharge of 40 cumecs with
the following data
1 (a) Bed Level Upstream-105.0m
Bed Level Downstream-103.5m Side Slopes of canal-1:1
Full Supply Level Upstream-106.8 m Bank level upstream-107.4 m
Bed width-U/s and D/s-30 m Safe Exit Gradient for Khosla’s theory-1/5
(b) Sketch following views of the structure:
(a) Half plan at top level and half at foundation level
(b) Longitudinal sectional elevation
CO4 Prepare the scaled drawings of different minor irrigation structures
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

1. (a)

Design a 1.8 m trapezoidal notch fall for the following data (Assignment):
Details above drop:

Full supply discharge= 5.5 cumec

Bed width= 5 m
Bed level= 19.8
Full supply depth=1.6 m
Level at the top of the bank=22.4
The bank top width is 1.8 m
Details below drop:
Full supply discharge= 5.5 cumec
Bed width= 5 m
Full supply level=19.6
Level at the top of the bank=20.6
(b) The bank top width is 1.8 m
Develop following drawings to a suitable scale:
(a) Half sectional plan at foundation level
(b) Section along the centre line of the canal

Describe the design principles and features of dams and perform the stability analysis
CO5
of gravity dams
1 Explain the features of different types of spillways
2 State the functions of Galleries and Keys in gravity dam
Obtain the expression for base width of elementary profile of gravity dams for no tension
3
criteria
4 Differentiate low dams and high dams
5. Explain the causes of failure of earth dams
6. Enlist the design criteria of earth dams
7. State the limitations of thin cylinder theory
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Course Code: CET 306

Design of Hydraulic Structures
Syllabus

Module I

Diversion headwork-components and functions; Weirs – types and causes of failure- Impervious
floor of hydraulic structures –Bligh’s theory, Design of vertical drop weir; Design of impervious
floor of hydraulic structures by Khosla’s theory

Module II

Canals-types, Cross section of unlined canals and alignment; Design of canals through alluvial
soils- Kennedy’s theory and Lacey’s silt theory. Canal structures- cross drainage structures-
types; Canal falls-Necessity, types

Module III

Hydraulic design and drawing of canal structures

(i) Aqueduct; (ii) Siphon Aqueduct; (iii) Canal drop (Trapezoidal Notch Fall); (iv) Sarda type
fall (trapezoidal crest- impervious floor design using Khosla’s theory); and (v) Cross regulator
(impervious floor design using Khosla’s theory)

Module IV

Dams-types; Gravity Dams-computation of forces-modes of failure and stability criteria, stability

analysis. Elementary and practical profile, limiting height of gravity dams, Galleries, joints, keys,
water stops, instrumentation, grouting (brief description only)

Module V

Earth dams-types, causes of failure and design criteria, Arch dams- thin cylinder theory;
Spillways-types-Ogee spillway profile; Energy dissipation- stilling basins-Indian standard Type
I and Type II (description only)

Text Books:
 Sathyanarayana M. C. Water Resources Engineering-Principles and Practice, New
Age International Publishers. 2009
 Garg S.K., Irrigation Engineering and Hydraulic Structures, Khanna Publishers, New
Delhi 2006.
 KR Arora. Irrigation, Water Resources and Water Power Engineering, S.B.H
Publishers and Distributors, New Delhi. 2010.
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

References:
o Punmia B.C.Ashok K Jain, Arun K Jain, B. B. L Pande, Irrigation and Water
Power Engineering. Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd 2009.
o Modi P.N. Irrigation, Water Resources and Water Power Engineering, S.B.H
Publishers and Distributors, New Delhi 2009.
o Varshney, R.S. Theory & Design of Irrigation Structures -Vol III, Nem Chand & Bros.,
Roorkee.

Course Code: CET 306

Design of Hydraulic Structures
Course Plan

Course
No of
Module Topic outcome
Hours
addressed

Module I (8 Hours)

1.1 Introduction on different types of Irrigation structures CO2 1

1.2 Layout of diversion headwork- components and functions CO2 1
1.3 Causes of failure of weirs on permeable soils and remedies CO1 1
1.4 Bligh’s theory, problem CO1 1
1.5 Design of vertical drop weir CO1 1
1.6 Khosla’s theory-Interim conclusions and Khosla’s first problem CO1 1
Khosla’s method of independent variables- use of charts and
1.7, 1.8 CO1 2
corrections
Module II (8 Hours)

2.1 Types of canals, alignment of canals CO2 1

2.2 Typical cross sections of unlined canals CO2 1
2.3 Design of channels through alluvial soils- Kennedy’s theory CO2 1
2.4, 2.5 Lacey’s silt theory- problems CO2 2
2.6 Classification of cross drainage structures CO2 1
2.7, 2.8 Canal falls – necessity and types CO1 2
Module III (15 Hours)

3.1-3.3 Hydraulic design of Aqueduct and demonstration of drawing CO3, CO4 3

Hydraulic design of Siphon Aqueduct and demonstration of
3.4-3.6 CO3, CO4 3
drawing
Hydraulic design of Canal drop (Trapezoidal Notch Fall) and
3.7-3.9 CO3, CO4 3
demonstration of drawing
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

3.10- Hydraulic design of Sarda Fall with trapezoidal crest and

CO3, CO4 3
3.12 demonstration of drawing
3.13-3. Hydraulic design of Cross regulator and demonstration of
CO3, CO4 3
15 drawing
Module IV (7 Hours)

4.1 Dams-Types, Computation of Forces acting on dams CO5 1

4.2 Stability analysis- modes of failure and stability criteria of CO5, CO1 1
gravity dams
4.3 Stresses-No tension criteria, derivation of principal stress CO5, CO1 1
4.4 Problems on stability analysis of gravity dams CO5, CO1 1
4.5 Elementary and practical profile of gravity dams CO5, CO1 1
Functions and types of galleries, keys and water stops etc in
4.6 CO5 1
dams
4.7 Instrumentation and grouting of dams CO5 1
Module V (7 Hours)

5.1 Arch dams- types, thin cylinder theory CO5, CO1 1

5.2 Most economical central angle of arch dam, Limitations of CO5, CO1 1
thin cylinder theory
5.3. 5.4 Earth dams, types, causes of failure and design criteria CO5, CO1 2
5.5 Spillways- Types CO5 1
5.6 Ogee spillway profile CO5, CO1 1
5.7 Energy dissipation below spillways-stilling basins CO5, CO1 1
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

Reg No.:………………….. QP
CODE: ………..

Name:………………………………………

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SIXTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: CET 306

Course Name: DESIGN OF HYDRAULIC STRUCTURES

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3

hours

 Use of Khosla’s Chart, Blench Curves and Montague Curves are permitted in the
Examination Hall
 Assume suitable design data wherever necessary

PART A
(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 15 marks)

Module I
1 a. State the functions of under sluices and divide walls. (6 marks)
b. Explain Khosla’s corrections. (9 marks)
OR
2 a. State and explain Bligh’s theory. (5 marks)
b. Explain the causes of failure of weirs on permeable soils and state the (10 marks)
remedial measures.
Module II

3 a. Explain the factors to be considered in the alignment of canals. (5 marks)

b. Explain the classification of cross drainage structures. (10 marks)
OR
4 a. Compare Kennedy’s theory and Lacey’s theory. (6 marks)
b. Design an irrigation canal through alluvial soils for the following data: (9 marks)
3
Discharge =20 m /sec; Lacey’s silt factor =1
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

PART B
(Answer any ONE full question)
Module III
5 a. Design a suitable cross drainage work for the following data: (25 marks)
Canal:
Full supply discharge = 30 cumec
Bed level = +250.00 m
Depth of water = 1.50 m
Bed width = 20 m
Side slope = 1.5 H : 1V
Manning N for concrete = 0.016
Drainage:
High flood discharge = 250 cumec
High flood level = +247.50 m
High flood depth = 2.50 m
General ground level = +251.00 m
Silt factor = 1.0
b. Develop the following drawings:
i. Half sectional plan at foundation level and at top (15 marks)
ii. Longitudinal section along the centre line of the canal (10 marks)
OR
6 a. Design a 2 m trapezoidal notch fall for the following data: (25 marks)
Details above drop:
Full supply discharge = 5.5 cumec
Bed width= 6 m Bed level = 12.000
Full supply depth =1.5 m
Level at the top of the bank =14.5
Bank top width is 3 m

Details below drop:

Full supply discharge = 5.5 cumec
Bed width =6m
Full supply level =11.5
Level at the top of the bank =12.5
Bank top width is 3 m

b. Develop the following drawings:

i. Half sectional plan at foundation level and at top (15 marks)
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

ii. Section along the centre line of the canal (10 marks)

PART C
(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 10 marks)
Module IV
7 a. Obtain an expression for principal stress at the toe of a gravity dam. (4 marks)
b. Explain elementary profile of gravity dam. How you will develop the (6 marks)
practical profile from it?
OR
8 a. Differentiate consolidation grouting and curtain grouting. (4 marks)
b. Determine the uplift force at the base of gravity dam of base width 25 m, (6 marks)
height of water in the u/s face = 30 m, free board 3m, top width 6 m and
height of water in the d/s face = 5 m. The drainage gallery is at a distance
of 5 m from the u/s end.
Module V
9 a. State the limitations of thin cylinder theory. (4 marks)
b. Explain the classification of earth dams with sketches. (6 marks)
OR
10 a. Explain the design features of Ogee spillway. (4 marks)
b. Explain the hydraulic and structural causes of failure of earth dams. (6 marks)
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

COMPREHENSIVE CATEGORY L T P CREDIT Year of Introduction

CET308
COURSE WORK PCC 1 0 0 1 2019

Preamble: The course is designed to ensure that the student have firmly grasped the foundational
knowledge in Civil Engineering familiar enough with the technological concepts. It provides an
opportunity for the students to demonstrate their knowledge in various Civil Engineering subjects.

Pre-requisite: Nil

Course outcomes: After the course, the student will able to:

CO1 Learn to prepare for a competitive examination

CO2 Comprehend the questions in Civil Engineering field and answer them with confidence
CO3 Communicate effectively with faculty in scholarly environments
Analyze the comprehensive knowledge gained in basic courses in the field of Civil
CO4 Engineering

P P P P P P P P P PO PO PO PS PS PS
O O O O O O O O O 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
Comprehensive
Course Work

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CET 308

CO1 3 1 1 2 1 1
CO2 3 1 2 3
CO3 3 1 1 2 3 1
CO4 3 3 1 2

Assessment pattern

Bloom’s End Semester Examination

Category (Marks)
Remember 25
Understand 15
Apply 5
Analyze 5
Evaluate
Create
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

End Semester Examination Pattern:

A written examination will be conducted by the University at the end of the sixth
semester.The written examination will be of objective type similar to the GATE
examination.Syllabus for the comprehensive examination is based on following five Civil
Engineering core courses.

CET 201- Mechanics of Solids

CET 203- Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulics

CET 205- Surveying& Geomatics

CET 204- Geotechnical Engineering I

CET 309–Construction Technology and Management

The written test will be of 50 marks with 50 multiple choice questions (10 questions from
each module) with 4 choices of 1 mark each covering all the five core courses. There will
be no negative marking. The pass minimum for this course is 25. The course should be
mapped with a faculty and classes shall be arranged for practising questions based on the core
courses listed above.

Written examination : 50marks

Total : 50 marks

Course Level Assessment and Sample Questions:

1) Poisson’s ratio for an incompressible isotropic material is:

A) 0.25 B) 0.5 C) Zero D) Indeterminate
2) The following stress-strain curve is obtained for a material. It indicates

ε
A) Rigid body behaviour
B) Perfectly plastic behaviour
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

C) Elastic-linear strain hardening behaviour

D) Elastic- plastic behaviour

3) A principal plane is one where the shear stress will be:

A) Maximum B) Minimum C) Zero D) Coverage of principal stress

4) In a differential manometer, the flowing fluid is water and the gauge fluid is mercury. If the
manometer reading is 100mm, the differential head in meters is:
A) 13.6 B) 1.36 C)1.47 D)1.26
5) A rectangular open channel carries a flow of 2m3/sec/m, what is the value of minimum
specific energy?
A) 0.74m B) 1.11m C) 1.48m D) 1.85m

6) A pipe has diameter 0.4m, length 0.1km and coefficient of friction 0.005. What is the length
of an equivalent pipe which has diameter 0.2m and coefficient of friction 0.008?
A) 195m B) 19.5m C)1.95m D) 1950m
7) The true bearing of a line is 40°30’. Declination is 3°W. The magnetic bearing of line is:
A) 43°30’ B) 37°30’ C) 36°30’ D) 44°30’

8) Points C and D are 1530m apart across a wide river. The following reciprocal levels are
taken with one level.

Level at Reading on

C D

C 3.810 m 2.165 m

D 2.355 m 0.910 m

The true difference in elevation between C and D is:

A)1.645 m B) 1.545 m C) 1.745 m D) 1.345 m

9) Fore bearing of a line is 540°. Declination is 2°W. True bearing of line is:
A)222° B) 218° C) S 42°E D) S 38° E

10) The dry density of a soil is 1.5 g/cc. If the saturation water content were 50%, then its
saturated density and submersed density would respectively be,
A)1.5 g/cc and 1.0g/cc B)2.0 g/cc and 1.0 g/cc C )2.25 g/cc and 0.25 g/cc
D)2.50 g/cc and 1.50 g/cc
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

11) A clay sample has a void ratio of 0.50 in dry state and if the specific gravity of solids is 2.70,
its shrinkage limit will be
A)12% B)13.5% C)18.5% D)22%

12) A non–homogenous soil deposit consists of a silt layer sandwiched between a fine–sand layer
at top and a clay layer below. Permeability of the silt layer is 10 times the permeability of the
clay layer and one–tenth of the permeability of the sand layer. Thickness of the silt layer is 2
times the thickness of the sand layer and two–third of the thickness of the clay layer. The
ratio of equivalent horizontal and equivalent vertical permeability of the deposit is
__________.
A)10.967 B)10.968 C)10.969 D)None of these

13) Which cement contains high percentage of C3S and less percentage of C2S?
A) Rapid Hardening Cement B) Ordinary Portland Cement C) Quick Setting
Cement D) Low Heat Cement

14) Workability of concrete is measured by __________

A) Vicat apparatus test B) Slump test C) Minimum void method D) Talbot Richard test

15) The shortest possible time in which an activity can be achieved under ideal circumstances is
known as ________
A) Pessimistic time estimate B) Optimistic time estimate C) Expected time estimate
D) None of these

Course Code: CET 308

Comprehensive Course Work

MODULE 1

Concept of stress and strain, Hooke’s law, Stress-strain diagram of mild steel;Axially loaded
bars.Temperature stress in composite bars, Poisson’s ratio, Elastic constants and the relationship
between them.Beams, Concept of bending moment and shear force, Shear force and bending
moment diagrams of cantilever beams, simply supported beams and overhanging beams for
different type of loads. Theory of simple bending; Shear stress in beams. Principal stresses and
principal planes in 2D problems, maximum shear stress; Mohr’s circle .

MODULE 2

Fluid properties; Fluid statics, measurement of fluid pressure. Buoyancy and Floatation: Buoyant
force, Principle of floatation, stability of floating andsubmerged bodies, metacentre and
metacentric height; continuity equation in one, two and three dimensions.Bernoulli’s equation
and its applications; Pipe flow- computation of major and minor losses in pipes,equivalent pipe.
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Open channel flow, velocity distribution in open channels, uniform flow computations, Most
economical sections, Specific energy, Critical flow; Hydraulic jump.

MODULE 3

Introduction to Surveying- Principles, Linear, angular and graphical methods.Bearing of survey

lines, Local attraction, Declination; Principles of levelling, Methods of levelling. Theodolite
surveying, Measurement of horizontal and vertical angle; Triangulation. Traverse Surveying,
Checks in closed traverse; Theory of Errors – Types, theory of least squares, Weighting of
observations. Total Station – concept of EDM, principles and working. GPS-Components and
principles. Remote Sensing.

MODULE 4

Definitions and properties of soil, 3 phase system, Index properties of soil, Soil classification,
Effective stress, Quick sand condition, Stress distribution, Permeability of soil, Darcy’s law,
Factors affecting permeability, Laboratory tests, Consolidation, Normally consolidated, over
consolidated and under consolidated soils, Time factor, Coefficient of consolidation, Compaction
Tests – OMC and MDD, shear strength of soil, Triaxial compression test, Unconfined
compression test, Direct shear test and Vane shear test

MODULE 5

Cement: Manufacturing, chemical composition, Types, Tests, Hydration of cement. Properties of

fresh concrete and hardened concrete. Types of stone masonry – composite walls - cavity walls
and partition walls - Construction details and features. Finishing works: Plastering, Pointing,
Painting – objectives and types. Prefabricated construction – advantages and disadvantages,
Prefabricated building components. Causes of failures in RCC and Steel structures. Types of
tenders, Types of contracts. Types of Schedules. Network analysis –CPM, PERT – concepts and
problems
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
Year of
TRANSPORTATION CATEGORY L T P CREDIT Introduction
CEL332 ENGINEERING LAB
PCC 0 0 3 2 2019

Preamble: The objective of this course is to enable students to assess the quality of various
pavement materials and their suitability in highway construction. The course is designed to
make student familiar with mix design and do functional evaluation of pavements.

Prerequisite: CET 206 Transportation Engineering I

Course Outcomes:

After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Analyse the suitability of soil as a pavement subgrade material

CO 2 Assess the suitability of aggregates as a pavement construction material
CO 3 Characterize bitumen based on its properties so as to recommend it as a pavement
construction material.
CO 4 Design bituminous mixes for pavement layers
CO 5 Assess functional adequacy of pavements based on roughness of pavement
surface.

Mapping of Course Outcome with Programme Outcome

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2 1 2

CO2 3 2 1 2
CO3 3 2 1 2 2

CO4 3 2 1 2 2

CO5 3 2 1 2 2

Course level assessment questions

CO1 : Determine CBR value of the given sample of soil. Comment on its suitability as a
subgrade material.

CO2 :Find the impact value of the given sample of aggregates. Assess its suitability as a
pavement construction material based on specifications given relevant codes/guidelines.

CO3 : Determine softening point of the given sample of bitumen.

 CIVIL ENGINEERING
CO4 : Determine optimum binder content of the given bituminous mix by Marshall method
of mix design.

CO5 : Determine IRI value of the given road surface using MERLIN. Comment on the
condition of road surface comparing standard values.

Assessment pattern

Bloom’s Taxonomy Continuous Internal End Semester Examination

Evaluation (CIE) (ESE)
(Marks) (Marks)
Remember 10 15
Understand 10 15
Apply 40 40

Marks Distribution

Total marks CIE (marks) ESE (marks) ESE duration

150 75 75 3 hours

Continuous Internal Assessment (CIE ) pattern

Attendance: 15 marks

Continuous Assessment: 30 marks

Internal Test: 30 marks

End Semester examination (ESE)pattern

The following guidelines should be followed regarding award of marks

Preliminary Work: 15 marks

Conduct of Experiment: 10 marks

Tabulation of readings, Calculation, Result and Inference: 25 marks

Viva: 20 marks

Record: 5 marks

General Instructions regarding ESE

End semester evaluation is to be conducted under the equal responsibility of both internal and
external examiners. The students shall be allowed for the ESE only on submitting the duly
certified record. External examiner shall endorse the record.
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
Syllabus

List of Experiments

1. Test on soil : 1 session

2. Tests on coarse aggregates : 6 sessions

3. Tests on bitumen : 4 sessions

4. Mix design of bituminous mix : 1 session

5. Functional evaluation of pavement : 1 session

Course Content and Practical Schedule

Expt. List of Experiments Course No.of Hours

No Outcome
Test on soil
1 California Bearing Ratio Test (soaked/unsoaked CO1 3
specimen)
Test on Coarse Aggregate
2 Specific Gravity and Water Absorption Test 3
3 Aggregate Impact Test 3
4 Los Angeles Abrasion Test 3
5 Aggregate Crushing Value Test CO 2 3
6 Shape Test 3
(Angularity number, flakiness index, Elongation
index, Combined flakiness and elongation index)
7 Stripping value of road aggregates 3
Tests on Bitumen
8 Determination of grade of bitumen based on viscosity 3
9 Softening point 3
CO 3
10 Ductility of bitumen 3
11 Flash and fire point of bitumen 3

Design of Bituminous Mix

12 Design of bituminous mix by Marshall method of CO4 3
mix design
Functional Evaluation of Pavement
13 Use of MERLIN apparatus to determine road 3
CO5
roughness

*Any twelve experiments are mandatory

 CIVIL ENGINEERING
Reference Books

1. Khanna, S.K., Justo, C.E.G. and Veeraragavan, A.,“Highway Materials and Pavement
Testing”, Nem Chand & Bros., Roorkee

2. G. Venkatappa Rao, K. Ramachandra Rao, Kausik Pahari and D.V. Bhavanna

Rao.,“Highway Material Testing and Quality Control”, I.K. International.

3. L.R.Kadiyali and N.B Lal., “Principles and Practices of Highway Engineering”, Khanna
Publishers.
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
CIVIL Year of
CEL CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
ENGINEERING Introduction
334
SOFTWARE LAB LAB 0 0 3 2 2019

Preamble: The course aims to train the students to use different software tools needed for
professional practice in civil engineering. Also. the field expertise needed for undertaking the
surveying activity using modern instruments and hence to prepare the necessary engineering
documentation are included in this laboratory course.

Prerequisite: Civil Engineering drawing, structural analysis and design courses, surveying
lab.

General Instructions to Faculty:

1. All exercise listed in the syllabus need to be performed mandatorily.

2. The laboratory should have possession of required software and survey equipment for
effective delivery of laboratory sessions
3. Periodic maintenance and calibration of various testing instruments needs to be made.
4. Use of data visualization packages needs to promoted for making various plots.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course, the student will be able to:

Course
Course Outcome Description
Outcome
CO 1 To undertake analysis and design of multi-storeyed framed structure, schedule a
given set of project activities using a software.
To prepare design details of different structural components, implementation
CO 2
plan for a project.
To prepare a technical document on engineering activities like surveying ,
CO3
structural design and project planning.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

CO/PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 2 2 2 1 3 - - 2 2 - 2

CO 2 3 2 2 2 1 3 - - 2 2 - 2
CO 3 3 2 2 2 1 3 - - 2 2 - 2
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
Assessment Pattern

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 75 75 2.5 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 15 marks
Continuous Assessment : 30 marks
Internal Test (Immediately before the second series test) : 30 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: The following guidelines should be followed

regarding award of marks
(a) Preliminary work : 15 Marks
(b) Implementing the work/Conducting the experiment : 10 Marks
(c) Performance, result and inference (usage of equipment and troubleshooting) : 25 Marks
(d) Viva voce : 20 marks
(e) Record : 5 Marks

General instructions:
Practical examination to be conducted immediately after the second series test and covering
entire syllabus given below. Evaluation is to be conducted by both the internal and external
examiners. The number of candidates evaluated per day should not exceed 20. Students shall
be allowed for the University examination only on submitting the duly certified record. The
external examiner shall endorse the record.

References

1. N Krishna Raju, Structural Design and Drawing, Second Edition, Universities Press
(India), Private Limited, Hyderabad, 2009

2. Reference Manual of the Relevant Software

3. Satheesh Gopi, Dr. R Sathikumar, N Madhu, Advanced Surveying: Total Station, GIS and
Remote Sensing, Pearson Education India, 2006

4. AutoCAD Essentials, Autodesk official Press, John Wiley & Sons, US, 2015
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
SYLLABUS

1. Analysis and design of steel and RCC elements using any standard software used in
the industry.

Exercise 1: Analysis and design of continuous and cantilever beams

Exercise 2; Analysis and design of plane truss and frames

Exercise 3:Analysis and design of multi-storied RCC framed structures.

2. Preparation of structural drawings of slabs and beams

Exercise 4:Detailed structural drawing of one way / two ay and continuous

slabs.

Exercise 5: Detailed structural drawing of singly reinforced / double

reinforced Beams.

Exercise 6: Detailed structural drawing of continuous / flanged beams.

Exercise 7: Detailed structural drawing of foundation units – isolated and

combined footing (rectangular)

3. Use of Building Information Modelling tools

Introduction to BIM process and describe the workflow in using BIM in the
building lifecycle (Theory discussion – 2 hours)

Exercise 8: Preparation of building model from a given architectural drawing

of a residential unit and perform model based cost estimation

Exercise 9:Create a schedule and import it into the 4D modelling environment,

so that each activity in the schedule can be linked to an object in the model.

Exercise 10:Develop schedules for the construction of slabs, walls, columns,

beams and windows of a section of a residential building

Exercise 11:Effect of rescheduling the activities to complete the project in

minimum time frame.

4. Use of Project Management Software (MS Project/Primavera)

Introduction to project management -CPM & PERT (Theory class-2 hours)
Exercise 12:Preparation of Bar Chart/Gantt Charts/CPM/PERT Charts
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Exercise 13: To find the critical Path based on the given set of activity / event
data

Exercise 14:Practice on Resource allocation and Project Monitoring(Cost and

Time).

4. Field exercise to use Total Station

Exercise 15: Field exercise on preparation of contour map for a given terrain using
advanced surveying instruments like Total Stations (The survey activity undertaken
shall be of at least 5000 Sq. m)
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER VI
PROGRAM ELECTIVE I
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
ADVANCED Year of
Category L T P Credit
CET312 COMPUTATIONAL Introduction
METHODS PEC 3 0 0 3 2019

Preamble: The general objective of this course is to expose the students to the fundamental
concepts of different numerical computational procedures. The course aim to equip the students to
find solutions for many real-world engineering problems by applying appropriate numerical
methods

Pre-requisite: Engineering Mathematics

Course outcome : After the course, the student will able to:

Course Prescribed
Description
Outcome learning level
Describe the procedures or principles of numerical Remembering/understanding
CO1
computational approaches
Obtain the solution of simultaneous equations or Applying
CO2
eigen value problems
Apply appropriate data smoothing technique for a Applying
CO3 given set of data

Obtain the numerical solutions of ordinary Applying

CO4
differential equations

Obtain the numerical solutions for solving boundary Applying

CO5 value problems of ordinary and partial differential
equations

Describe the concepts or apply discretization based Remembering/applying

CO6
solution methods

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
Advanced Computational

CO1 1 1
CET312

Methods

CO2 3 3
CO3 3 3
CO4 3 2
CO5 3 3
CO6 3 3
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
Assessment pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests

Bloom’s Test 1 Test 2 End Semester Examination
Category (Marks) (Marks) (Marks)
Remember 5 5 15
Understand 10 10 15
Apply 20 20 40
Analyze 15 15 30
Evaluate
Create

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Course project : 15 marks
Total : 50 marks

Note: Enough exposure to practical examples from civil engineering should be given to the
students. One assignment/course project should be based on the coding of practical civil
engineering problems
End semester examination pattern – There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each
question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each
module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-
divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment (Sample) Questions

CO1: Describe the procedures or principles of numerical computational approaches

1. Enlist the different errors in numerical computation

2. Explain the procedure of Newton-Raphson method for solving system of non linear
equations
3. Explain the procedure of multiple linear regression
4. Compare Lagrange and Hermite interpolation
5. Explain the stability of numerical solutions of ordinary differential equations
6. Explain the procedure of modified Euler’s method for solving ordinary differential equations
7. Describe the classification of partial differential equations
8. Explain Crank- Nicolson implicit scheme
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
9. Explain collocation method
10. Describe the principle of meshless method

CO2: Obtain the solution of simultaneous equations or eigen value problems

1. Find all the eigen values and eigen vectors of the following matrix by Jacobi’s
transformation

10 3 2 
A = 3 5 1 
2 1 0
2. Apply Gauss Seidal iteration method to solve the equations

20x+y-2z=17; 3x+20y-z= -18; 2x-3y+20z=25

CO3: Apply appropriate data smoothing technique for a given set of data

1. Fit the quadratic splines with M(0)=0 f’’(0)=0 for the following data. Hence fiand f(2.5)

x 0 1 2 3

y 1 2 33 244

1
1
2. Evaluate ∫1+ x
0
2
dx using (i) Simpson’s 3/8 rule taking h=1/6 (ii) Weddle’s rule taking h=1/6

CO4: Obtain the numerical solutions of ordinary differential equations

1 Apply Milne’s method to find the solution of y ' = x − y 2 in the range 0 ≤ x ≤ 1 for the boundary
condition
2. Using fourth order Runge-Kutta method, find y for z=0.1, 0.2 and 0.3 , given
y ' = xy + y 2 y(0)=1

CO5: Obtain the numerical solutions for solving boundary value problems of
ordinary and partial differential equations

1. Solve ∇ 2 u = 10( x 2 + y 2 + 10) over the square with side x=0=y; x=3=y with u=0 on the
boundary and mesh length =1
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

d4y
2. Solve + 81 y = φ ( x) with
dy 4
x 1/3 2/3 1

y 81 162 243

y(0)=y’(0)=y’’(1)=y’’’(1)=0

CO6: Describe the concepts or apply discretization based solution methods

1 Explain the procedure of weighted residual approaches for solving boundary value problems
2. Explain the different steps in Finite element analysis
3. Explain the characteristics of different types of elements in FEM
4. Solve y ' '+ y + x = 0 in the range 0 ≤ x ≤ 1 by Galerkin’s method. Given y(0)=y(1)=0

Course Code: CET312

Advanced Computational Methods
Syllabus
Module I

Introduction to numerical methods-Errors in numerical computation – System of linear algebraic

equations –Ill-conditioned systems – Symmetric and Banded systems. Elimination methods –
Gauss Elimination (review), Gauss Seidel iteration, Factorization method-Choleski’s method.
System of non linear equations – Newton-Raphson method. Eigen value problems - largest and
smallest eigen values- Power method, Jacobi’s transformation

Module II

Lagrangian and Hermite interpolation, Spline interpolation-Quadratic and Cubic splines

(example of equal intervals), Data smoothing by least squares criterion- Non- polynomial models
like exponential model and power equation, Multiple linear regression. Numerical integration-
Newton – Cotes open quadrature formule-Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s rules, Weddles rule

Module III

Solution of first-order ordinary differential equations-stability of solution, Use of Taylor series,

Euler’s method, Modified Euler’s method, Predictor-corrector method – Milne’s method, Fourth
order Runge-Kutta method; Higher order equations of initial value type by Runge-Kutta method.

Module IV

Ordinary differential equations of the boundary value type – Finite difference solution.
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
Partial differential equations in two-dimension-types, Elliptic equations-Laplace Equation and
Poisson’s equation, Parabolic equations – Explicit finite difference method –Bender-Schmidt
method. Crank-Nicholson implicit method, Finite difference method – Problems with irregular
boundaries
Module V

Weighted residual methods for initial value problems and boundary value problems –
Collocation method, Subdomain method, Method of least squares, Galerkin’s method.
Introduction to FEM- outline of the procedure – Types of 1D, 2D and 3D elements- element
properties- polynomial form- shape function form- equilibrium and compatibility in the solution-
convergence requirements, boundary conditions. Conceptual ideas of finite volume, boundary
element and meshless methods.

Text Books
1. Grewal B. S., Numerical Methods for Engineers & Scientists, Khanna Publishers.
2. Rajasekharan S., Numerical Methods in Science and Engineering, S Chand & Company,
2003.

References:
1. Gerald and Wheatly, Applied Numerical Analysis, Pearson Education.
2. Chapra S. C. and R. P. Canale, Numerical Methods for Engineers, McGraw Hill, 2006.
3. Smith G. D. Numerical solutions for Differential Equations, McGraw Hill.
4. Ketter and Prawel, Modern Methods for Engineering Computations, McGraw Hill.
5. Rajasekharan S., Numerical Methods for Initial and Boundary value problems, Khanna
Publishers, 1989.
6. Terrence. J. Akai, Applied Numerical Methods for Engineers, Wiley Publishers, 1994.
7. Krishnamoorthy C S, Finite Element Analysis- Theory and Programming, Tata McGraw
Hill, New Delhi., 1994
8. Bathe K J, Finite Element Procedures in Engineering Analysis, Prentice Hall, New Delhi.
1982
9. Chandrupatla T R and Belegundu A D, Introduction to Finite Elements in Engineering,
Pearson Education, New Delhi 1998
10. Rajasekharan S, Finite Element Analysis in Engineering Design, Wheeler, New Delhi
11. Hutton D V, Fundamentals of Finite Element Analysis, Tata McGraw Hill Education
Private Ltd, New Delhi
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
Course Plan: Advanced Computational Methods
Course No of
Module Topic outcome Hours
addressed
Module I (7 Hours)

1.1 Introduction to numerical methods-Necessity, Errors in CO1 1

numerical computation
1.2 System of linear algebraic equations, Ill-conditioned systems, CO1 1
Symmetric and Banded systems
1.3 Direct and indirect methods of solution of linear equations- CO1, CO2 1
Gauss elimination method(review), Gauss Siedal iteration
1.4 Factorization method-Choleski’s method CO1, CO2 1

1.5 System of non linear equations – Newton-Raphson Method CO1, CO2 1

1.6 Eigen value problems, Power method-largest & smallest Eigen CO1, CO2 1
values
1.7 Jacobi’s transformation CO1, CO2 1

Module II (7 Hours)

2.1 Lagrangian and Hermite interpolation CO1, CO3 1

2.2 Spline interpolation - Quadratic and Cubic splines CO1, CO3 1

2.3 Problems on interpolation CO3 1

2.4 Data smoothing by least squares criterion- Non- polynomial CO1, CO3 1
models like exponential model, power equation
2.5 Multiple linear regression CO1, CO3 1

2.6 Numerical integration- Newton – Cotes open quadrature CO1, CO3 1

2.7 Problems on numerical integration CO3 1

Module III (7 Hours)

3.1 Solution of first-order ordinary differential equations ; stability CO1 1

of solutions
3.2 Solution of first-order ordinary differential equations by use of CO1, CO4 1
Taylor series.
3.3 Euler’s method CO1, CO4 1

3.4 Modified Euler’s method CO1, CO4 1

3.5 Predictor-corrector methods – Milne’s method CO1, CO4 1

 CIVIL ENGINEERING
3.6 Fourth order Runge-Kutta method-Problems CO1, CO4 1

3.7 Higher order equations of initial value type by Runge-Kutta CO1, CO4 1
method
Module IV (7 Hours)

4.1 Ordinary differential equations of the boundary value type – CO1, CO5 1
Finite difference solution.
Partial differential equations in two-dimension- types. Laplace CO1, CO5
4.2 1
Equation
4.3 Poisson’s Equation and its solution CO1, CO5 1

4.4 Parabolic equations – Explicit finite difference method- CO1, CO5 1

Schmidt method
4.5 Crank-Nicholson implicit method CO1 1

4.6 Finite difference method – Problems with irregular boundaries CO1, CO5 1

4.7 Problems CO5 1

Module V (7 Hours)

Weighted residual methods for initial value problems and

5.1 boundary value problems – Collocation method – Subdomain CO1, CO6 1
method
5.2 Method of least squares – Galerkin’s method CO1, CO6 1

5.3 Introduction to FEM- outline of the procedure CO1, CO6 1

5.4 Types of 1-D, 2-D and 3-D finite elements CO1, CO6 1

5.5 Element properties- polynomial form- shape function form CO1, CO6 1

5.6 Equilibrium and compatibility in the solution- convergence CO1, CO6 1

requirements; Boundary conditions
General awareness on finite volume, boundary element and
5.7 mesh less methods and their difference with FEM CO1, CO6 1
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
Course Code: CET312
Advanced Computational Methods
(Model question paper)
Course
Qn outcome
Question Marks
No (CO)
Assessed
Part A
(Answer ALL Questions)
1 Enlist the different errors in numerical computation 3 CO1
2 Explain symmetric and banded systems 3 CO1
3 Explain Hermite interpolation 3 CO1
4 Describe mulitiple linear regression 3 CO1

5 Explain Taylor’s method for solution of differential CO1

3
equations
6 Explain stability of solutions of differential equations 3 CO1
7 Explain Crank Nicholson implicit method 3 CO1
8 State the types of partial differential equations with examples 3 CO1
9 Describe the principle of meshless method 3 CO1
10 Explain convergence requirements in finite element analysis 3 CO1
Part B
(Answer ANY ONE FULL question from each module)
Module I
Sole by Choleski’s method
2 − 3 − 1 2  x1  15 
− 1 − 1 2 − 2   x  − 13
11   2  =   14 CO2
1 − 1 1 1   x3  4 
    
3 2 − 1 − 1   x 4  3 

Find the largest eigen value by power method

2 12 2
12 A= 2 4 0  14 CO2
0 0 0 

Module II
13 Obtain the cubic spline approximation of the given data and 14 CO3
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
determine y(0.5) and y’(0.2)

x 0 1 2 3

y -5 -4 3 6

6
1
14
Evaluate ∫1+ x
0
2
dx using (i) Simpson’s 3/8 rule and Weddle’s
14 CO3
rule
Module III
dy
Find y(0.1), y(0.2) given = x − 2 y = x - 2y, y(0)=1 taking
15 dx 14 CO4
h=0.1 using 4th order Runge-Kutta method.
Solve y ' = 1 + y 2 y(0)=0Find y(0.8) and y(1) by Milne’s predictor
16 corrector method 14 CO4

Module IV
Solve the boundary value problem xy’’+y=0, y(1)=1,y(2)=2 take
17 14 CO5
h=1/4
Solve the equation uxx + uyy = 0 for the square mesh with
boundary value as shown in figure

18 14 CO5

Module V
Solve y ' '+ y + x = 0 in the range 0 ≤ x ≤ 1 by Galerkin’s method.
19 Given y(0)=y(1)=0 14 CO6

20 Explain in detail the steps of finite element analysis

8 CO1, CO6
(a)
20 Explain forms of shape functions in finite element analysis
(b) 6 CO1, CO6
 CIVIL Year of
ENGINEERING
GEOTECHNICAL CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
CET322 Induction
INVESTIGATION
PEC 3 0 0 3 2019

Preamble:
Geotechnical Investigation is a course in the stream of Soil mechanics and foundation
engineering. The course is aimed to impart to the students, a clear idea about how a
geotechnical investigation program is to be planned and executed. It enables the students
an in-depth knowledge of the various methods of geotechnical investigation and the field
tests to be conducted in different situations. After the successful completion of the course,
the students will be able to plan and execute the soil investigation at a site depending on
the need and availability.

Prerequisite: CE 208 Geotechnical Engineering -1

Course Outcomes

The students will be able to understand the procedure,

Remembering,
CO 1 applicability, and limitations of various methods of
Understanding
geotechnical investigation
The students will be able to make engineering
Applying &
CO 2 judgments and take appropriate decisions related to
Analysing
geotechnical investigations
The students will be able to understand the procedure
Remembering,
CO 3 and applications of penetration tests and geophysical
Understanding
tests for exploration of the soil profile
The students will be able to choose the right soil
Applying &
CO 4 sampling technique and analyse the dependability of
Analysing
samples collected
The students will be able to understand the procedure
Applying &
CO5 and applications of field load tests and rock quality
Analysing
indices.
Mapping of the Course Outcomes with Programme Outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 2 2 2
1
CO 3 2 2 2
2
CO 2 2
3
CO 3 2 2 2
4
CO 2 2
5
Assessment Pattern CIVIL ENGINEERING
Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester
Test 1 (Marks) Test 2 (Marks) Examination
(Marks)
Remember 15 15 30
Understand 10 10 20
Apply 25 25 50
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark Distribution

Total Marks CIE Marks ESE Marks ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) Pattern

Attendance : 10 Marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 Marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 Marks

End Semester Evaluation (ESE) Pattern

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from
each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B
contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer any one. Each
question carries 14 marks and can have maximum 2 sub-divisions.
Note : 1.Each part should have at least one question from each module. 2.Each question can
have a maximum of 4 subdivisions (a, b, c, d)

Course Level Assessment Questions

(Questions may be framed based on the outline given under each course outcome)

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):The students will be able to understand the procedure,

applicability, and limitations of various methods of geotechnical investigation.
1. Explain the various methods adopted for preliminary investigation.
2. What are the I.S. guidelines for deciding the number, size, spacing, and depth of
boreholes?
3. What are the limitations of standard penetration test?
Course Outcome 2 (CO2):The students will be able to make engineering
CIVILjudgments and
ENGINEERING
take appropriate decisions related to geotechnical investigations

1. Determine the bearing capacity, from a given SPT data.

2. Explain the procedures for geotechnical investigation of a profile which shows,
rejection in SPT test.
3. What are the situations in which wash boring can be used as an exploration
technique?

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):The students will be able to understand the procedure and
applications of penetration tests and geophysical tests for exploration of the soil profile

1. Explain the procedure of determination of thickness of a strata using electrical

resistivity method.
2. What are the effects of water table in geophysical methods?
3. What are the limitations of seismic refraction method?

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):The students will be able to choose the right soil sampling
technique and analyse the dependability of samples collected.

1. What are the type of soil samples in a soil investigation procedure?

2. What are the factors affecting the quality of a soil sample?
3. Explain the methods of collection of soil samples.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):The students will be able to understand the procedure and
applications of field load tests and rock quality indices.

1. What are the limitations of a plate load test?

2. What are the situations in which pressure meter test becomes Ideal?
3. Explain the concept of subgrade reaction.
4. Explain the methods of representing the quality of rocks is a soil investigation report.

Syllabus

Module Content
I Introduction and practical importance - Objectives of soil exploration– Planning
of a sub-surface exploration program –Collection ofexisting information,
reconnaissance, preliminary and detailedinvestigation - I.S. and other guidelines
for deciding the number, size,spacing, and depth of boreholes Methods of
exploration - Open pits – Auger boring- -Wash boring,percussion drilling, rotary
drilling
 II Sounding methods Standard Penetration Test – Procedure CIVIL–corrections
ENGINEERING to be
applied to observed N values – Numerical examples -Factors influencing the SPT
results and precautions to obtain reliableresults – Merits/drawbacks of the test –
Correlations of N value withvarious engineering and index properties of soils
Static Cone Penetration Test – Procedure – Merits/drawbacks –Correlation of
static CPT results with soil properties -Dynamic ConePenetration Test – Brief
Procedure – Merits/drawbacks –Critical comparison of SPT, static CPT, and
dynamic CPT
III Geophysical methods – Seismic refraction method – Procedure, uses,limitations –
Solution of numerical problems to estimate the velocityof seismic waves and the
thickness of the upper layer of a two-layeredsoil system - Electrical resistivity
method – Electrical profiling andelectrical sounding – Procedure, uses,
limitationsStabilization of boreholes, Groundwater level estimation
IV Soil sampling – Undisturbed, disturbed, and representative samples –Chunk and
tube samples – Factors affecting sample disturbance andmethods to minimize
them –Area ratio - Inside clearance – Outsideclearance - Recovery ratio –Ball
check valve – Numerical Problems -Handling andtransportation of samples –
Extrusion of samplesTypes of samplers – Thin-walled sampler – Piston sampler –
Splitspoon sampler – Methods for collection of sand samples frombeneath the
water table - Core retainers
V Pressure meter test - Procedure –Uses – limitations, Flat Dilatometer Test (Brief
only)Plate load test – Procedure, uses, and limitations – modulus of subgrade
reaction- Solution of numerical problems using plate load test data Rock core
sampling, Rock Quality Designation, Core Recovery Ratio –Bore log – Soil
profile – Sub-soil investigation report

Textbooks:
1. Gopal Ranjan and Rao A.S.R., “Basic and Applied Soil Mechanics”, New Age International
(P) Limited, New Delhi, 2002.
2. Venkata Ramaiah, “Geotechnical Engineering”, Universities Press (India) Limited,
Hyderabad, 2000.

References:
1. Arora K.R., “Geotechnical Engineering”, Standard Publishers Distributors, New Delhi,
2006.
2. Joseph E. Bowles, „Foundation Analysis and Design‟, Mc. Graw Hill Inc., New York,
1988.
3. Purushothamaraj P., Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering, Dorling
Kindersley(India) Pvt. Ltd., 2013
4. Terzaghi K. and R. B. Peck, Soil Mechanics in Engineering Practice, John Wiley, 1967.
Course content and Lecture schedule CIVIL ENGINEERING
Module Contents Outcomes Hours
Addressed
I Module 1 7
1.1 Introduction and practical importance - Objectives of CO1 1
soil exploration –
1.2 Planning of a sub-surface exploration program – CO1 1
Collection of existing information,
1.3 reconnaissance, preliminary and detailed investigation CO1 1
1.4 I.S. and other guidelines for deciding the number, size, CO1 1
spacing, and depth of boreholes
1.5 Methods of exploration - Open pits – Auger boring- CO1 1
1.6 Wash boring, percussion drilling, rotary drilling CO1 2
Module 2 7
II
2.1 Sounding methods Standard Penetration Test – CO3 1
Procedure
2.2 corrections to be applied to observed N values – CO2 1
Numerical examples
2.3 Factors influencing the SPT results and precautions to CO2 1
obtain reliable results – Merits/drawbacks of the test
2.4 Correlations of N value with various engineering and CO2 1
index properties of soils
2.5 Static Cone Penetration Test – Procedure CO3 1
Merits/drawbacks
2.6 Correlation of static CPT results with soil properties CO2 1
2.7 -Dynamic Cone Penetration Test – Brief Procedure – CO3 1
Merits/drawbacks – Critical comparison of SPT, static
CPT, and dynamic CPT
Module 3 7
III
3.1 Geophysical methods – Seismic refraction method – CO3 1
Procedure
3.2 uses, limitations CO3 1
3.3 Solution of numerical problems to estimate the CO3 2
velocity of seismic waves and the thickness of the
upper layer of a two-layered soil system
3.4 Electrical resistivity method – Electrical profiling and CO3 1
electrical sounding – Procedure
3.5 uses, limitations CO3 1
3.6 Stabilization of boreholes, Groundwater level CO4 1
estimation
 Module 4 7
CIVIL ENGINEERING
IV
4.1 Soil sampling – Undisturbed, disturbed, and CO4 1
representative samples –
4.2 Chunk and tube samples – Factors affecting sample CO4 1
disturbance and methods to minimize them –
4.3 Area ratio - Inside clearance – Outside clearance - CO4 1
Recovery ratio –Ball check valve –
4.4 Numerical Problems CO4 1
4.5 Handling and transportation of samples – Extrusion of CO4 1
samples
4.6 Types of samplers – Thin-walled sampler – Piston CO4 1
sampler – Split spoon sampler –
4.7 Methods for collection of sand samples from beneath CO4 1
the water table - Core retainers
Module 5 7
V
5.1 Pressure meter test - Procedure – Uses – limitations, CO5 1
5.2 Flat Dilatometer Test (Brief only) CO5 1
5.3 Plate load test – Procedure, uses, and limitations – CO5 1
5.4 modulus of subgrade reaction- Solution of numerical CO5 2
problems using plate load test data
5.5 Rock core sampling, Rock Quality Designation, Core CO5 1
Recovery Ratio
5.6 Bore log – Soil profile – Sub-soil investigation report CO1 1
Model Question Paper CIVIL ENGINEERING
QP CODE:
Reg No.: _______________ Name:__________________________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SIXTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: CET 322

Course Name: GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3
hours
Part A
(Answer all questions; each question carries 3 marks)
1. What are the objectives of soil exploration?
2. Differentiate preliminary investigation and detailed investigation.
3. Explain dilatancy correction to be applied to the N value.
4. List out the factors influencing SPT value.
5. Explain stabilization of borehole using Bentonite slurry.
6. Write the principle behind the seismic refraction method.
7. What are the precautions to be adopted during the transportation of sample?
8. Define i) Area ratio, ii) Inside clearance iii) Outside clearance
9. Differentiate between bore log and soil profile.
10. What is rock quality designation?

Part B
(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)
Module 1
11. a. Explain wash boring with the help of a sketch.
b. Explain the major steps involved in reconnaissance for a geotechnical investigation
of a multi storied building.
OR
12. a. Differentiate preliminary investigation and detailed investigation.
b. Explain percussion drilling with the help of a sketch.

Module 2
13. a. The observed SPT value (N) in a deposit of fully submerged fine silty sand was 45
at a depth of 6.5m. The average saturated unit weight of soil is 19.5 kN/m3 Find the
corrected SPT number.
b. Explain the factors influencing SPT value.
OR
14. a. The field N value in a deposit of fully submerged fine sand was 47
CIVIL at a depth of
ENGINEERING
7m. The average saturated unit weight of the soil is 19kN/m3. Calculate the corrected
N value.
b. Explain the procedure for conducting SPT test with neat figure.

Module 3
15. a. Explain the seismic refraction method
b. Explain the procedure to employ electrical sounding method.
OR
16. a. Explain the electrical profiling method.
b. Explain stabilization of borehole using Bentonite slurry.

Module 4
17. a. Explain any two types of samplers used for undisturbed soil sample.
b. If the external diameter of a sampling tube is 75 mm and area ratio is 20%,
determine the thickness of sampling tube.
OR
18. a. Explain the factors affecting sample disturbance. What are the precautions to be
taken in handling and transporting soil samples?
b. Compute the area ratio of a thin walled tube sampler of external diameter 6.0 cm
and wall thickness 2.25mm and comment on the type of soil sample obtained using
this sampler.
Module 5
19. a. What is a bore log and draw an example of bore log?
b. What are the salient features of a sub soil investigation report? With a neat sketch,
explain the term ‘soil profile’.
OR
20. a. ExplainPressure meter test and comment on the Uses and limitations
b. Two plate load tests with square plates were performed on a soil deposit. For
a 30 mm settlement, the following loads were obtained. Determine the width of a
square footing which would carry a net load of 1,500 kN for a limiting
settlement of 30 mm.
Width of square plate in mm Load in
kN
300 38.2
600 118.5
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

TRAFFIC Year of
CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
CET332 ENGINEERING AND Introduction
MANAGEMENT PEC 3 0 0 3 2019

Preamble : The course aims to impart in-depth knowledge pertinent to traffic flow theory, traffic
management measures, capacity analysis, design of road intersections and road safety.

Prerequisite: CET 206 Transportation Engineering

Course Outcomes:
After the completion of the course the students will be able to

CO 1 Identify the relationship among various traffic stream variables. (K2, K3)
CO 2 Apply traffic management measures and regulations so as to solve issues related to
traffic flow in road network. (K2, K3)
CO 3 Explain the concept of capacity and LOS and its estimation for various traffic facilities
(K2,K3)
CO 4 Identify the need for intersection control and design of various types.(K2,K3)
CO 5 Analyse causes of road accidents and suggest preventive measures (K2, K3)

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1
3 3 2
CO 2
3 3
CO 3
3 2 2 2 2
CO 4 3 2 3 2 2 3 2

CO 5
3 2 2 3 3 2
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester

Test 1 Marks Test 2 Marks Examination (marks)
Remember 5 5 20
Understand 10 10 40
Apply 5 5 20
Analyse 5 5 20
Evaluate
Create

Mark Distribution

Total Marks CIE (Marks) ESE (Marks) ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course Project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern:

The question consists of two parts- Part A and Part B. Part A consists of 10 questions with 3
marks for each (two questions from each module). Part B consists of two questions from each
module, out of which one has to be answered. Each question carries 14 marks and can have
maximum 2 subdivisions.

Sample Course Level Assessment Questions:

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):Illustrate through diagrams the basic relationship between the fundamental
variables of traffic flow.
Course Outcome 2 (CO2):.Suggest traffic management measures so as to avoid locking of vehicle
flow due to turning traffic.
Course Outcome 3 (CO3):Define adjusted capacity. What are the measures of effectiveness used for
urban roads and two lane highways?
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):Explain the hierarchy of intersection control. What do you understand by
optimum cycle length?
Course Outcome 5 (CO5):With neat sketches differentiate between collision and condition diagram

Syllabus- Traffic Engineering and Management

Module 1 Traffic Flow Characteristics: Fundamental Parameters- speed, density, volume,

travel time, headway, spacing, time-space diagram, time mean speed, space mean
speed and their relation. Fundamental diagrams of traffic flow.
Traffic stream models: Single Regime models - Greenshields model, Greenberg
logarithmic model
Multi-regime models – Two and three regime linear models.
Module 2 Regulation of Traffic – Need and scope of traffic regulations- Motor Vehicle Act
– Regulation of speed- Regulation of vehicles – Regulations concerning driver-
General rules concerning traffic- parking regulations- Enforcement of regulations.
Traffic Management – scope of traffic management measures – restrictions to
turning movements – one way streets – tidal flow operations-Closing side streets –
Exclusive bus lanes.

Module3 Capacity and Level of service (LOS): Concept- Base capacity, Adjusted
capacity, LOS definition, FactorsAffecting Capacity and LOS, Homogeneous and
heterogeneous traffic conditions-vehicle types - Concept of PCU.
Capacity and LOSanalysis –Single lane, Intermediate laneand two lane interurban
roads- Base capacity and adjustment factors- Indo HCM (2017) Guidelines
Capacity and LOS analysis of Urban roads - Base conditions- Adjustment factors-
Indo HCM (2017) Guidelines
Module 4 Intersections: At-grade intersections- basic forms- conflict points -visibility
triangle- design principles- Channelization.
Roundabouts- Geometric layout, types- design elements.
Traffic Signals –Warrants- pre-timed and traffic actuated.
Design of signal timing at isolated intersections- Phase design-optimum cycle time
(Webster’s approach), green splitting- pedestrian phase -phase diagrams, timing
diagram.
Grade separated intersection: Grade separated intersections without interchange
and with interchange- Three leg interchange, Four leg interchange and multileg
interchange.
Traffic Control Measures - Traffic Signs, Road Markings, and Traffic control
aids.
Module 5 Traffic Safety : Road Safety Situation in India, Causes of road accidents –
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

influence of road, vehicle, driver and environmental factors - Pedestrian Safety,

Collection and statistical analysis of accident data, Collision and condition
diagram,
Road Safety Audit- concept and need- organizations involved- stages of road
safety audit (brief description only)

Text Books:

1.Kadiyali L.R. Traffic Engineering and Transport planning, Khanna Publishers, 2011
2. Khanna S.K and Justo C.E.G; Highway Engineering, Nem Chand Publishers, 10th Ed,2018.
3. CAO’ Flaherty, Transport planning and Traffic Engineering, Elsevier, 2006.

References
1. Roger P. Roess, William R. McShane& Elena S. Prassas, Traffic Engineering, Fourth Edition,
Prentice-Hall, 2010.
2. Pignataro L. J., Traffic Engineering – Theory and Practice, Prentice Hall, 1973.
3. C. J. Khisty and B. K. Lall, Transportation Engineering: An Introduction,Prentice- Hall India, 2002.
4. P. Chakroborty and A. Das, Principles of Transportation Engineering, PrenticeHall of India Pvt.
Ltd., 2003.
5. A. D. May, Traffic Flow Fundamentals, Prentice–Hall, 1990.
6. C.S. Papacostas, Transportation Engineering and Planning, Prentice-Hall India,2002.
7.Highway Capacity Manual (HCM), Transportation Research Board, USA, 2010.
8. Indian Highway Capacity Manual (Indo-HCM), CSIR, New Delhi, 2017
9. Relevant IRC codes

Course Content and lecture Schedule:

No. Topic Course No. of
Outcome Hrs
1 Module 1 Total:7
1.1 Fundamental parameters- speed, density, volume, travel time, CO1 2
headway, spacing, time-space diagram, time mean speed, space
mean speed and their relation. Fundamental diagrams of traffic
flow.
1.2 Single Regime models - Greenshields model, Greenberg CO1 3
logarithmic model
1.3 Multi-Regime models – Two and three regime linear models. CO1 2
2 Module 2 Total: 7
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

2.1 Need and scope of traffic regulations- Motor Vehicle Act – CO2 4
Regulation of speed- Regulation of vehicles – Regulations
concerning driver- General rules concerning traffic- parking
regulations- Enforcement of regulations.
2.2 Scope of traffic management measures – restrictions to turning CO2 3
movements – one way streets – tidal flow operations-Closing
side streets –Exclusive bus lanes.

3 Module 3 Total: 7
3.1 Capacity and Level of service (LOS): Concept- Base CO3 2
capacity, Adjusted capacity, LOS definition, Factors Affecting
Capacity and LOS, Homogeneous and heterogeneous traffic
conditions- vehicle types - Concept of PCU.
3.2 Capacity and LOS analysis –Single lane, Intermediate lane and CO3 3
two lane interurban roads- Base capacity and adjustment
factors- Indo HCM (2017) Approach

3.3 Capacity and LOS analysis of Urban roads - Base conditions- CO3 2
Adjustment factors- Indo HCM (2017) approach
4 Module 4 Total: 9
4.1 Intersections: At-grade intersections- basic forms- conflict CO4 2
points -visibility triangle- design principles- Channelization.
4.2 Roundabouts- Geometric layout, types- design elements. CO4 2

4.3 Traffic Signals - Warrants- pre-timed and traffic actuated. CO4 3

Design of signal timing at isolated intersections- Phase design-
optimum cycle time (Webster’s approach), green splitting-
pedestrian phase -phase diagrams, timing diagram.
4.4 Grade separated intersection:Grade separated intersections CO4 2
without interchange, and with interchange- Three leg
interchange, Four leg interchange and multileg interchange.
Traffic Control Measures - Traffic Signs, Road Markings,
Traffic control aids.
5 Module 5 Total: 5
5.1 Traffic Safety : Road Safety Situation in India, Causes of road CO5 3
accidents – influence of road, vehicle, driver and environmental
factors - Pedestrian Safety, Collection and statistical analysis
analysis of accident data, Collision and condition diagram,
5.2 Road safety audit- concept and need- organizations involved- CO5 2
stages of road safety audit (brief description only)
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SIXTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR
Course Code: CET332
Course Name: TRAFFIC ENGINEERING AND MANAGEMENT
Model Question Paper

Max. Marks:100 Duration: 3 hrs

PART A
(Answer all Questions: Each question carries 3 marks)

1 Differentiate time mean speed and space mean speed.

2 Explain multi regime models citing examples.
3 Suggest traffic management measures so as to avoid locking of vehicle flow due to
turning traffic.
4 Mention priority rules at intersections.
5 Explain base capacity and adjusted capacity.
6 Discuss the importance of passenger car units under heterogeneous traffic conditions.
7 How channelizing islands control speed and separate conflicts at intersections? Explain
with sketches.
8 Which locations justify grade- separated intersections?
9 What is the basic difference between collision diagram and condition diagram?
10 What is the probability of involvement of exactly 5 drivers out of the 500 drivers who are
employed in a bus operating company in an accident during a year. It has been found that
on an average 1 in 100 drivers are involved in an accident every year.
(3 x 10=30 marks)
.

PART B
(Answer one full question from each module)

11 a. The data shown below were obtained from a highway stretch. Fit these data to 7
Greenshields model and determine i) free speed ii) jam density iii) capacity and
iv) speed at maximum flow
Speed (km/h) Density (veh/km)
14.2 85
24.1 70
30.3 55
40.1 41
50.6 20
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

55 15
b. Explain single regime speed- density models 7

OR
12 a. Observers stationed at two sections XX and YY, 150m apart on a highway, 7
record the arrival times of four vehicles as shown in the accompanying table. If
the total time of observation at XX was 15 s, determine a) the time mean speed,
b) the space mean speed and c) the flow at section XX.

Vehicle Time of Arrival ( Seconds)

Section XX Section YY
A T0 T0 +7.58
B T0 + 3 T0 +9.18
C T0 +6 T0 +12.36
D T0+12 T0 +21.74
b. Using basic stream flow diagram, explain speed- density, speed- flow and flow- 7
density relationships

13 a. Mention general principles governing speed limit in urban area and rural area. 7
b. Suggest traffic management measures that can take care of the imbalance in 7
directional distribution of traffic during peak hours.
OR
14 Explain the aspects covered under regulation of vehicles and regulation 14
concerning driver in motor vehicles act.

15 a. Explain the adjustment factors mentioned in Indo HCM (2017) that are to be 7
considered in the capacity estimation of urban roads.
b. Differentiate base capacity and adjusted capacity of single lane interurban roads. 7
OR
16 a. What is level of service? What are the factors affecting capacity and level of 7
service?
b. Explain the procedure mentioned in Indo HCM (2017) for the determination of 7
base capacity and level of service of two lane two way interurban roads.

17 a. Draw a neat sketch of a full cloverleaf and show the movement of traffic. 7
b. Show conflict points at the following intersections 7
i) cross roads, both two way, ii)T-intersection, both two way roads iii) Y-
intersection, one one-way iv) Cross roads, one way roads
OR
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

18 a. Explain briefly the various design factors that are to be considered in rotary 7
intersection design.
b. Design a four phase signal timing plan for the data given below. The intersection 7
is four legged. All approaches have 3 lanes and each lane is 3.5 m width.
Saturation flow is 1800pcu/hr/lane. The equivalent hourly flows at the
intersection are as shown below: Using the Webster model, determine the
optimal cycle length for the intersection. Assume lost times equal to 3.5 s/phase,
amber interval equal to 3 s, and all red period is not provided. Also draw the
phase and timing diagram.
East bound West bound North bound South bound
L T R L T R L T R L T R
280 850 80 320 700 120 50 280 40 35 360 10

19 a. What are the different methods for maintaining accident records? Briefly explain 7
with neat sketches.
b. Explain various measures that may be taken to prevent accidents. 7
OR
20 a. Briefly explain various stages of road safety audit. 7
b. Explain any three statistical methods for analysis of accident data. 7
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Year of
MECHANICS OF FLUID Category L T P Credit
CET342 Introduction
FLOW
PEC 3 0 0 3 2019

Preamble: The general objective of this course is to expose the students to the fundamental
concepts of different types of fluid flow.

Pre-requisite: CET203 Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulics

Course outcome

CO1 Describe and apply the principles of potential flow and viscous flow
Perform the computations of turbulent flows through pipes and pipe bends by recollecting
CO2 the relevant hydraulic principles
Describe and apply the principles of the pressure and specific energy in open channel flow
CO3 for practical applications
Describe and apply the principles of unsteady flow for practical applications in pipes and
CO4 channels
CO5 Prepare physical models for performing experiments recalling the principles of fluid flow

CO-PO Mapping
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
MECHANICS OF
FLUID FLOW

CO1 3 3 1
CET342

CO2 3 3 1
CO3 3 3 1
CO4 3 3 1
CO5 3 3

Assessment pattern
Continuous Assessment Tests
Bloom’s Test 1 Test 2 End Semester Examination
Category (Marks) (Marks) (Marks)
Remember 5 5 15
Understand 10 10 15
Apply 20 20 40
Analyze 15 15 30
Evaluate
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Create
Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks
Total : 50 marks

End semester examination pattern – There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each
question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each
module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-
divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Code: CET 342

MECHANICS OF FLUID FLOW
(Course plan)

Course
No of
Module Topic outcome
Hours
addressed

Module I (8 Hours)

1.1 Fluid flow: Types of fluid flow (Review) CO1 1

1.2 Potential flow-velocity potential and stream function CO1 1

1.3 Problems on velocity potential and stream function CO1 1

1.4 Streamlines and equipotential lines, flow net-uses and CO1 1

limitations
Flow through pipes: Viscous flow - Shear stress, pressure
1.5 gradient relationship CO1 1
Laminar flow-Basic concepts, Reynold’s experiment

1.6 Laminar flow between parallel plates CO1 1

1.7 Hagen-Poiseuille equation CO1 1

1.8 Problems CO1 1

 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Module II (7 Hours)

2.1 Turbulent flow- fundamentals CO2 1

2.2 Velocity profile- computations CO2 1

2.3 Pipe roughness -friction factor- Moody's diagram; Hazen CO2 1

williems formula
2.4 Head loss due to friction in pipes-Nikuradse experiment with CO2 1
artificially roughened pipe
2.5 Reduction of carrying capacity of pipes with age CO2 1

Flow through pipe bends- application of linear momentum

2.6 CO2 1
principle

2.7 Problems on Flow through pipe bends CO2 1

Module III (7 Hours)

3.1 Open channel flow- uniform flow and critical flow CO3 1
computations- section factor
3.2 Hydraulic exponents for uniform flow and critical flow CO3 1

3.3 Computation of discharge through compound channels CO3 1

3.4 Pressure distribution in curvilinear flows- spillway crest and CO3 1

spillway buckets
3.5 Specific energy (review)- Application of Specific energy for CO3 1
channel transitions- hump and reduction in channel width
3.6 Application of Specific energy for channel transitions- reduction CO3 1
in channel width
3.7 Problems on Application of Specific energy for channel CO3 1
transitions
Module IV (7 Hours)

4.1 Rapidly varied steady flow-hydraulic jumps –tail water CO4 1

conditions -types
4.2 Uses of hydraulic jumps for energy dissipation below CO4 1
spillways- jump height curve; tail water curve
4.3 Unsteady flow through open channels- Surges in open CO4 1
channels- Positive surges and negative surges (concept only)
4.4 Positive surges – derivation of equations-continuity and CO4 1
momentum
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

4.5 Problems on Positive surges CO4 1

4.6 Unsteady flow through pipes –water hammer analysis CO4 1

4.7 Problems on water hammer analysis CO4 1

Module V (6 Hours)

5.1 Experimental hydraulics- Dimensional analysis Dimensional CO5 1

analysis-Dimensions and dimensional homogeneity
5.2 Rayleigh method-Problems CO5 1

5.3 Buckingham pi theorem- Problems CO5 1

5.4 Model Analysis-Dimensionless numbers, Similitude CO5 1

5.5 Model laws and scale ratios- Problems CO5 1

5.6 Scale effect, distorted and undistorted models CO5 1

Course Code: CET342

MECHANICS OF FLUID FLOW
Syllabus
Module I

Fluid flow: Types of fluid flow (Review) Potential flow-velocity potential, stream function,
streamlines and equipotential lines, flow net-uses and limitations
Viscous flow –Reynold’s experiment; Shear stress- pressure gradient relationship - Laminar flow
through pipes (Hagen-Poiseulle Equation), laminar flow between stationary parallel plates

Module II

Turbulent flow- Computation, velocity distribution, Head loss due to friction in pipes-Nikuradse
experiment with artificially roughened pipe, Friction coefficient for laminar and turbulent flows,
Moody’s diagram, reduction of carrying capacity of pipes with age. Hazen William’s formula.
Flow through pipe bends - application of linear momentum principle

Module III

Open channel flow-Hydraulic exponents and section factor for uniform and critical flow,
Pressure distribution in curvilinear flows- spillway crest and spillway bucket. Computation of
discharge through compound channels. Application of Specific energy for channel transitions-
hump and reduction in channel width
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Module IV

Rapidly varied steady flow-hydraulic jumps –types based on tail water conditions; Uses of
hydraulic jumps for energy dissipation below spillways- jump height curve; tail water curve
Unsteady flow through open channels – Surges- positive surges (problems) and concept of
negative surges; Transients in pipes-water hammer

Module V

Experimental hydraulics- Physical modeling-Dimensional analysis- Reyleigh’s method

Buckingham’s pi- theorem, Similitude, Model laws for viscous and open channel flows-
Reynold’s and Froude’s model law; Scale effect, distorted and undistorted models

Text Books:
1. Modi P. N. and S. M. Seth, Hydraulics & Fluid Mechanics, S.B.H Publishers, New Delhi,
2002.
2. Subramanya K., Theory and Applications of Fluid Mechanics, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1993.
3. Subramanya K., Flow in Open channels, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2009.

References

1. Streeter.V.L. Fluid Mechanics, Mc Graw Hill Publishers.

2. Bruce R Munson, Donald F Young . Fundamentals of Fluid Mechanics, John Wiley &
sons, 2011.
3. Jain A. K., Fluid Mechanics, Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 1996.
4. Arora.K.R. Fluid Mechanics, Hydraulics and Hydraulic Machines, Standard Publishers,
2005.
5. Narasimhan S., A First Course in Fluid Mechanics, University Press (India) Pvt. Ltd.,
2006.
6. Frank.M.White, Fluid Mechanics, Mc Graw Hill, 2013.
7. Mohanty.A.K. Fluid Mechanics, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2011
8. Narayana Pillai,N. Principles of Fluid Mechanics and Fluid Machines, University Press,
2011.
9. Kumar.D.N. Fluid Mechanics and Fluid power Engineering, S.K.Kataria & sons, 2013.
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Course Code: CET 342

MECHANICS OF FLUID FLOW
(Course Level Assessment Questions)

CO1 Describe and apply the principles of potential flow and viscous flow
1 Describe Reynold’s experiment
2 Show that stream lines and equi potential lines intersect orthogonally
Crude oil of dynamic viscosity 1.5 Poise and relative density 0.9 flows through a 20 mm
vertical pipe. The pressure gauges fitted at an upper point A measures 58.86 N/cm2 while
3 that fitted at another point B, 20 m below A reads 19.62 N/cm2. Is the flow laminar ? Find
the direction of flow and rate of flow.
Obtain the expression for local velocity of steady, uniform laminar flow through the space
between two stationary parallel plates. Also show that the local velocity becomes average
4
velocity at a point 0.211B from one of the plates, where B is the spacing between the plates

y3
The velocity components in a two dimensional incompressible flow are u = + 2x − x 2 y
3
5 2 x3
and v = xy − 2 y − . (i) Is the flow irrotational? (ii) Evaluate the potential function and
3
stream function

CO2 Perform the computations of turbulent flows through pipes and pipe bends
1 Explain the use and characteristics of Moody’s diagram
2 Describe the characteristics of velocity distribution in turbulent regime

3 Explain the role of surface aging in carrying capacity of commercial pipes

360 l/sec of water is flowing in a pipe. The pipe is bent by 120o. The pipe bend measures
360 mm x 240 mm and volume of the bend is 0.14 m3. The pressure at entrance is 73
4
kN/m2 and the exit is 2.4 m above the entrance section. Find the magnitude of resultant
force exerted on the bend.
A pipeline 30 cm diameter carries 300 l/s of petrol (density=600 kg/m3; dynamic
viscosity=2.9 x 10-4 Pas). Calculate (i) the friction factor (ii) shear stress at the boundary
5
(iii) shear stress and velocity at 5 cm from the pipe axis (iv) maximum velocity and
thickness of laminar sublayer Assume the pipe to be hydrodynamically rough
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Describe and apply the principles of the pressure and specific energy in open channel
CO3 flow for practical applications
1 Explain hydraulic exponents in open channel computation
2 Derive the relations for Pressure distribution in curvilinear flows
A discharge of 15 cumecs flows through a rectangular channel 3 m wide. The depth of
flow is 2 m. What is the minimum width beyond which the flow depth at upstream gets
3 disturbed ?. A smooth hump of 0.1 m is built in the channel and at this section the width is
2.8 m. Analyze the water depth at contracted section and the upstream section.
For the flow over a spillway with circular arc shown in Figure 1, obtain the value of
pressure at point 1for discharge q=5 m3/s/m for a constant flow depth of 1.5 m assuming (i)
forced vortex flow and (ii) free vortex flow

2
4
R=6 m 1
Figure 1 60o
1.5 m
0

Describe and apply the principles of unsteady flow for practical applications in pipes
CO4 and channels
1 Explain negative surges. Give examples
2 What is water hammer in pipes ?
A steel pipeline is 30 cm in diameter and has a wall thickness of 3 mm. The pipe is 1000 m
long and conveys a flow of 100 l/s (Relative density =0.82).The static head at the outlet is
3 160 m of oil. If the working stress of steel is 0.1 kN/mm2, calculate the minimum time of
closure of a downstream valve. For oil, K=109 Pa and for steel E=2.14 x1011 Pa
A horizontal rectangular channel of 3 m width and 2 m water depth conveys water at 18
4 m3/sec. If the flow rate is suddenly reduced to 2/3 of its original value, compute the height
and velocity of the surge developed in the channel
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Prepare physical models for performing experiments recalling the principles of fluid
CO5
flow
1 Describe Reyligh’s method of dimensional analysis
2 Describe scale effect in physical model studies

3 Explain similitude in hydraulic model studies

A 1:20 spillway model has a discharge of 2.25 m3/s. what is the corresponding prototype
4 discharge ? If a flood phenomenon takes 10 h to occur in the prototype, how long will it in
the model ?

The discharge Q over a small rectangular weir is known to depend upon head H over the
weir, the height of the weir P, acceleration due to gravity g, width of the weir L and
fluid properties ρ, dynamic viscosity μ an surface tension σ. Express the relationship
5 between the variables in dimensionless form

Q P L µ σ 
= f  , , 3 / 2 1/ 2 , 2 
using Buckingham π - theorem
 H H H g ρ ρgH 
5/ 2
gH
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Pages: 3

Model Question Paper

Reg No.:………………….. QP CODE:………………..

Name:………………………………………

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SIXTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: CET342

Course Name: MECHANICS OF FLUID FLOW

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 hours

Part A
(Answer all questions; each question carries 3 marks)

1. Describe Reynold’s experiment.

2. Explain the uses of flownet.
3. Describe the features of Moody’s diagram.
4. Explain the concept of application of linear momentum principle in pipe bends.
5. Define section factor for uniform flow and critical flow computations and state their uses.
6. Describe the application of specific energy concept in channel transitions.
7. Enlist the classification of hydraulic jumps based on tail water conditions.
8. Differentiate positive surges and negative surges.
9. Explain similitude in hydraulic model studies.
10. Differentiate distorted and undistorted models.

Part B
(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)
Module I
11. (a) Derive Hagen-Poiseullie equation (10Marks)

(b) Obtain the relation between mean velocity and maximum velocity of laminar flow
between parallel plates (4 Marks)

Or
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

12. (a). The velocity potential for a two dimensional flow is φ = x(2 y − 1) at P(4,5) determine
(i) the velocity and (b) stream function (10Marks)

12. (b) Show that the streamlines and equipotential lines are orthogonal to each other

(4 Marks)

Module II

13. The diameter of a pipe bend is 30 cm at inlet and 15 cm at outlet and the flow is turned
through 120o in a vertical plane. The axis at inlet is horizontal and the centre of the outlet
section is 1.5 m below the centre of the inlet section. Total volume of water in the bend is 0.9
m3. Neglecting friction, calculate the magnitude and direction of force exerted on the bend
by water flowing through it at 250 l/sec and when the inlet pressure is 0.15N/mm2

(14 Marks)

Or

14. A 300 mm diameter water supply pipe had a friction factor of 0.02 when freshly laid.
After 10 years of service, the friction factor was found to be 0.025. what friction factor can
be expected after another 15 years ? The pipe is assumed to be in rough turbulent flow
regime (14 Marks)

Module III

15. Derive the pressure distribution in curvilinear flows (a) spillway crest (ii) spillway
bucket (14 Marks)

Or

16. Uniform flow occurs in a 3m wide rectangular channel of bed slope 0.003 at a depth of
2.5 m. Due to sedimentation, the channel bed is raised at certain section. Calculate the
maximum height of the hump which will cause any change in upstream depth. If the depth
of water at upstream is raised to 2.9 m, determine the height of the hump. Take Manning’s
coefficient as 0.012 (14 Marks)

Module IV

17. In a wide tidal river, the velocity is 0.75 m/s and the depth of flow is 1.3 m. If a tidal
bore is observed to move upstream with a velocity of 4 m/s in this river, determine the
velocity and depth of flow after the bore had passed (14 Marks)

Or
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

18. A steel pipeline is 30 cm in diameter and has a wall thickness of 3 mm. The pipe is 1000
m long and conveys a flow of 100 l/s (Relative density =0.82).The static head at the outlet is
160 m of oil. If the working stress of steel is 0.1 kN/mm2, calculate the minimum time of
closure of a downstream valve. For oil, K=109 Pa and for steel E=2.14 x1011 Pa

(14 Marks)

Module V

19. (a) Explain Reyliegh’s method of dimensional analysis. State its limitations

(8 Marks)

(b) A 1:50 spillway model has a discharge of 1.25 m3/s. what is the corresponding
prototype discharge ? If a flood phenomenon takes 12 h to occur in the prototype, how long
will it in the model ? (6 Marks)

Or

20. A small sphere of density ρs and diameter D settles at a terminal velocity V in a liquid of
density ρf and dynamic viscosity μ. Acceleration due to gravity g is known to be a parameter
Express the functional relationships between these variables in the form

V ρ µ 
= f s ,  using Buckingham π - theorem (14 Marks)
gD  ρ f ρ f D gD 
 ADVANCED CIVIL ENGINEERING
Year of
CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
CET352 CONCRETE Introduction
TECHNOLOGY PEC 3 0 0 3 2019

Preamble: This course is aimed at exposing the students to the fundamentals of properties of
concrete materials, its testing procedures, various types of concretes, NDT of concrete and
mix design. After this course, students will be in a position to determine the properties of
concrete materials, testing of concrete and do a mix design based on requirement.

Prerequisite: CET309 CONSTRUCTION TECHNOLOGY& MANAGEMENT

Course Outcomes:

Course Prescribed
Description of Course Outcome
Outcome learning level
To recall the properties and testing procedure of concrete Remembering,
CO 1
materials as per IS code Understanding
Remembering,
To describe the procedure of determining the properties of
CO 2 Understanding
fresh and hardened concrete

Applying &
CO 3 To design concrete mix using IS Code Methods.
Analysing
Remembering,
CO4 To explain nondestructive testing of concrete
Understanding
Remembering,
CO5 To describe the various special types of concretes
Understanding

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes (Minimum requirement)

PO PO
PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10
11 12
CO 1 3 - - - 2 2 3 - - - - -
CO 2 3 - - - 2 2 3 - - - - -
CO 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 - - - - -
CO4 3 - - - 2 2 3 - - - - -
CO5 3 - 3 2 3
Assessment Pattern CIVIL ENGINEERING

Continuous Assessment
Bloom’s Category Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 20 20 40
Understand 20 20 40
Apply
Analyse 10 10 20
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question carries 14 marks and can have maximum 2
sub-divisions.

Course Level Assessment Questions

(Questions may be framed based on the outline given under each course outcome)
Course Outcome 1 (CO1):To recall the properties and testing procedure of concrete
materials as per IS code
1. Discuss the hydration reaction of different cement compounds.
2. List the advantages and disadvantages of artificial aggregates.
3. Explain the classification of aggregates.
4. What are mineral admixtures? Explain GGBS and Flyash.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): To describe the procedure of determining the properties of fresh
and hardened concrete

1. What are the factors affecting strength and elasticity of concrete?

2. Define creep. What are the factors affecting creep.
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
3. Why is cube strength more than cylinder strength in concrete?

Course Outcome 3 (CO3): To design concrete mix using IS Code Methods.

1. List the methods available for proportioning concrete mix.

2. Design a concrete mix for any strength from the given data.
3. Write the properties of normal distribution curve. What are its uses in quality control'?

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): To explain nondestructive testing of concrete

1. State advanced non-destructive testing methods. Explain ány one in details.

2. Explain Schmidt’s rebound hammer test to assess the strength of concrete.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): To describe the various special types of concretes

1. Write short notes on underwater concreting and mass concreting.

2. Explain step by step procedure to design the Self compacting concrete.
3. Explain basic concept of Fibre reinforced concrete. Give examples of fibres suitable
to improve
i) flexural strength
ii) impact strength
iii) shear strength
4. Explain green concrete. State the various materials used in green concrete.

Syllabus

Module 1 Concrete materials

Cement -Review of manufacturing process- chemical composition, Bogue’s compounds,
mechanism of hydration-heat of hydration-Aggregate-Review of types, sampling and testing,
artificial aggregates - Chemical Admixtures- types, uses, mechanism of action - effects on
properties of concrete - Mineral admixtures- types, chemical composition - physical
characteristics - effects on properties of concrete - Rheology – basic concepts – Bingham
model

Module 2 Mix proportioning

Mix design - nominal mix- design mix – concept of mix design - variables of proportioning -
general considerations - factors considered in the design of concrete mix- various methods of
mix design - design of concrete mix as per IS 10262-2019 - Statistical quality control of
concrete – mean strength – standard deviation – coefficient of variation – sampling - testing -
acceptance criteria
Module 3 CIVIL ENGINEERING
Properties of fresh and hardened Concrete
Properties of fresh concrete- workability-factors affecting workability - slump test-
compaction factor test- Vee Bee consistometer test- Properties of hardened concrete -
modulus of elasticity, compressive strength, split tensile strength, flexural strength- effect of
water cement ratio – maturity concept- Creep - factors affecting creep - effect of creep-
Shrinkage- factors affecting shrinkage - plastic shrinkage, drying shrinkage, autogenous
shrinkage, carbonation shrinkage.

Module 4 Durability & NDT of concrete

Durability of concrete- Factors affecting durability - permeability- cracking-reinforcement
corrosion; carbonation, chloride penetration, sulphate attack, acid attack, fire resistance; frost
damage, alkali silica reaction, concrete in sea water - Non-destructive testing of concrete-
surface hardness test- ultrasonic pulse velocity method - penetration resistance- pull-out test-
core cutting - measuring reinforcement cover.

Module 5 Special Topics in Concrete Technology

Special concretes - lightweight concrete-heavy weight concrete - high strength concrete –
high performance concrete - self compacting concrete -roller compacted concrete– fibre
reinforced concrete - polymer concrete-pumped concrete - ready mix concrete - green
concrete. Special processes and technology - sprayed concrete; underwater concrete, mass
concrete; slip form construction, prefabrication technology- 3D concrete printing
Text Books:

1. Neville A.M., ‟Properties of Concrete‟, Trans-Atlantic Publications, Inc.; 5e, 2016

2. R. Santhakumar „ Concrete Technology‟, Oxford Universities Press, 2018
3. Shetty M. S., Concrete Technology‟, S. Chand & Co., 2018

Reference Books

4. Mehta and Monteiro, Concrete-Micro structure, Properties and Materials‟, McGraw

HillProfessional 2017
5. Neville A. M. and Brooks J. J., Concrete Technology, Pearson Education, 2019
6. Lea, Chemistry of Cement and Concrete‟, Butterworth-Heinemann Ltd, 5e, 2017
Lecture Plan – Advanced Concrete Technology. CIVIL ENGINEERING

Course
No. of
Module Topic outcomes
Lectures
addressed

1 Module I : Concrete materials Total lecture hours:7

1.1 Cement -Review of manufacturing process-

chemical composition, CO1 1

1.2 Bogue’s compounds, mechanism of hydration-heat CO1

1
of hydration
1.3 Aggregate-Review of types, sampling and testing,
CO1 1
artificial aggregates
1.4 Chemical Admixtures- types, uses, mechanism of
CO1 1
action - effects on properties of concrete
1.5 - Mineral admixtures- types, chemical composition -
physical characteristics - effects on properties of CO1 1
concrete
1.6 Rheology – basic concepts CO2 1
1.7 Bingham model CO2 1

2 Module II: Mix proportioning Total lecture hours:7

2.1 Mix design - nominal mix- design mix – concept of

mix design CO3 1

2.2 Variables of proportioning - general considerations CO3 1

2.3 Factors considered in the design of concrete mix- CO3
1
various methods of mix design
2.4 Design of concrete mix as per IS 10262-2019 CO3 2
2.6 Statistical quality control of concrete – mean CO3
1
strength – standard deviation
2.7 Coefficient of variation – sampling - testing - C03
1
acceptance criteria
FIRST INTERNAL EXAMINATION
Module III : Properties of fresh and hardened Concrete Total lecture hours: 7
3.1 Properties of fresh concrete- workability-factors CO2
1
affecting workability -
3.2 Slump test-compaction factor test- Vee Bee CO2
1
consistometer test
3.3 Properties of hardened concrete - modulus of CO2
1
elasticity, compressive strength
3.4 split tensile strength, flexural strength- effect of CIVIL ENGINEERING
CO2
1
water cement ratio – maturity concept
3.5 Creep - factors affecting creep - effect of creep CO2 1
3.6 Shrinkage- factors affecting shrinkage - plastic CO2
1
shrinkage, drying shrinkage
3.7 Autogenous shrinkage, carbonation shrinkage. CO2 1
4 Module IV: Durability & NDT of concrete Total lecture hours :7
4.1 Durability of concrete- Factors affecting durability CO2 1
4.2 Permeability- cracking-reinforcement corrosion; CO2
1
carbonation,
4.3 Chloride penetration, sulphate attack, acid attack, CO2
1
fire resistance
4.4 Frost damage, alkali silica reaction, concrete in sea CO2
1
water
4.5 Non-destructive testing of concrete- surface CO4
1
hardness test
4.6 Ultrasonic pulse velocity method - penetration CO4
1
resistance
4.7 Pull-out test- core cutting - measuring reinforcement CO4
1
cover.
5 Module V:Special Topics in Concrete Technology -Total lecture hours :7
5.1 Special concretes - lightweight concrete-heavy
CO5 1
weight concrete
5.2 High strength concrete – high performance concrete CO5
1
-
5.3 self compacting concrete CO5 1
5.4 Roller compacted concrete– fibre reinforced CO5
1
concrete - polymer concrete
5.5 Special processes and technology - sprayed CO5
1
concrete; underwater concrete
5.6 mass concrete; slip form construction CO5 1
5.7 Prefabrication technology- 3D concrete printing CO5 1
Model Question Paper CIVIL ENGINEERING
QP CODE:
Reg No.:_______________ Name:__________________________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SIXTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: CET352

Course Name: ADVANCED CONCRETE TECHNOLOGY
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 hours
Part A
(Answer all questions; each question carries 3 marks)

1. What are the properties of Bogue’s compound?

2. What is the role of chemical admixtures in concrete?
3. Describe the factors considered in mixture proportioning.
4. Explain statistical quality control measures of concrete.
5. What is meant by shrinkage of concrete?
6. What are the factors affecting workability of concrete?
7. Describe the effect of fire on concrete.
8. Explain the pull-out test on concrete.
9. Write short notes on underwater concreting?
10. What are the applications of roller compacted concrete?

PART B
(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

11. (a) . Explain concrete flow behaviour using a Bingham model. (6 Marks)
(b) . Describe the influence of mineral admixtures in concrete. Explain any two
mineral admixtures in detail. (8 Marks)
OR
12. (a) Describe various tests for determining the quality of aggregate to be used for
concreting work. (7 Marks)
(b) Discuss the hydration reaction of different cement compounds. (7 Marks)

13. Design a concrete mix for the following data.

Grade of concrete: M25, cement of 43 grade, moderate exposure, Zone III sand,
compaction factor 0.9, 20mm maximum sized rounded aggregate. (14 marks)
 OR CIVIL ENGINEERING

14. (a) Write down the procedure for concrete mix design by IS method. (8 Marks)
(b) Explain different methods of mix design. (6 Marks)

15. (a) Explain the factors affecting the strength of concrete. (7 Marks)
(b) Explain the procedure of determining flexural strength of concrete under four point
bending (7 Marks)
OR
16. (a) Explain the procedure for determining modulus of elasticity of concrete. (7 Marks)
(b) Explain the term creep, its effects and factors affecting creep. (7 marks)

17. (a) Explain the sulphate attack on concrete and explain the effect of sea water in concrete.
(6 Marks)
(b) Explain any two non-destructive tests in concrete. (8 marks)
OR
18. (a). Discuss the causes of corrosion of steel in concrete. (8 Marks)
(b) What is meant by reinforcement cover? How is it measured? (6 Marks)

19. (a) Explain any two methods for testing fresh stage properties of self-compacting
concrete. (8 Marks)
(b) Explain green concrete. (6 Marks)
OR
20. (a) What is the influence of prefabrication technology on modern construction industry
(8 Marks)
(b) Describe sprayed concrete. (6 Marks)
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

ENVIRONMENTAL Year of
CET CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
IMPACT Introduction
362
ASSESSMENT PEC 3 0 0 3 2019

Preamble : This course introduces the methodologies for identifying, predicting, evaluating and
mitigating the impacts on environment due to any developmental project or activities. Students will
learn how to prepare an impact assessment report and devise an environment management plan.
Sufficient background will be provided on the environmental clearance procedures in India.

Prerequisite: NIL

Course Outcomes : After the completion of the course the student will be able

Course Prescribed
Description of Course Outcome
Outcome learning level
To appreciate the need for minimizing the environmental
CO1 Understanding
impacts of developmental activities
To understand environmental legislation & clearance Remembering,
CO2
procedure in the country Understanding
To apply various methodologies for assessing the Applying
CO 3
environmental impacts of any developmental activity &Analysing
Analysing&
CO 4 To prepare an environmental impact assessment report
Evaluating
Analysing
CO 5 To conduct an environmental audit
&Evaluating

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes (Minimum requirement)

PO PO
PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10
11 12
CO 1 - - - - - 2 2 - - - - -
CO 2 - - - - - 2 - - - - - -
CO 3 2 - - 3 2 - 3 - - - - -
CO4 - - - 2 - 2 2 3 - 3 - -
CO5 - - - 2 1 - 2 2 - 2 - -
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment
Bloom’s Category Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 15
Understand 10 10 15
Apply 15 15 35
Analyse 15 15 35
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question carries 14 marks and can have maximum 2 sub-divisions.
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Course Level Assessment Questions

CO1:To be able to appreciate the need for minimizing the environmental impacts of
developmental activities

1.Explain the evolution of EIA in India

2.Explain why EIA is needed for developmental projects.

3.What are the different ways in which development projects impact the water quality and quantity?

CO 2: To be able to understand environmental legislation & clearance procedure in the country

1.Two municipalities in Kerala plan to set up a Common Municipal Solid Waste Management
Facility (CMSWMF). Explain the procedure required for the Environmental Clearance (EC) for the
project as per the EIA Notification of 2006.(All CMSWMFs are category B projects)

2.Describe the procedure for obtaining environmental clearance according to EIA notification 2006.

3.The Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 is called an umbrella legislation. Substantiate the
statement.

CO3: To be able to apply various methodologies for assessing the environmental impacts of any
developmental activity

1.Prepare a simple checklist for assessment of socio economic impact due to the development of a
highway.

2.Explain overlay mapping as an EIA method

3.Explain how to predict the impact of a highway project on air quality

CO4: To be able to prepare an environmental impact assessment report

1.Explain the Terms of Reference (ToR) for EIA report of a highway project

2.Explain the structure of EIA report

3.Explain the importance of an environmental management plan.

CO5: To be able to conduct an environmental audit

1.Explain the need for environmental auditing

2.What are the different types of environmental audits?

3. Explain the importance of ISO 14001 standard.

 CIVIL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS

Module 1

Definition, Need for EIA, Evolution of EIA: Global & Indian scenario -Environmental legislations in
India- The Water (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Act 1974, The Air (Prevention & Control of
Pollution)Act 1981, The Environmental (Protection) Act 1986- Environmental standards for water,
air and noise quality- EIA Notification 2006

Module 2

Environmental clearance process in India: Screening, Scoping, Public Consultation, Appraisal-

Form1-Category of projects-Generic structure of EIA report- Terms of Reference (ToR) -Types of
EIA: strategic, regional, sectoral, project level- Rapid EIA and Comprehensive EIA- Initial
Environmental Examination (IEE)

Module 3

EIA methodologies: Ad hoc, checklist, matrix, network and overlay-Impact Prediction, Evaluation
and Mitigation-Prediction and assessment of the impact on water (surface water and groundwater),
air, and noise environment- assessment of ecological impactsand Socio economic Impacts.

Module 4

Environmental Management Plan (EMP): Goal and purpose- Importance of EMP- Content of an
EMP- Role of environmental monitoring program
Environment Audit: need for audit- audit types and benefits- environmental audit procedure
ISO 14001 standards: Importance, salient features - Stages in implementation- Benefits

Module 5

EIA case studies (Indian)- a highway project, a hydro electric power plant, an air port project, a
quarry mining project and a solid waste management project

Text Books:

1. Larry W Canter, “Environmental Impact Assessment”, McGraw Hill Inc. , New

York, 1995
2. Betty Bowers Marriott, Environmental Impact Assessment: A Practical Guide,
McGraw-Hill Professional, 1997
3. Environmental Impact Assessment, 2003, Y.Anjaneyulu, B.S Publications
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

References:

1. Lawrence, David P., Environmental Impact Assessment (Practical Solutions to

Recurrent Problems), Wiley International, New Jersey.
2. Ministry of Environment & Forests, Govt. of India 2006 EIA Notification
3. Jain, R.K., Urban, L.V. and Stacey, G.S., Environment Impact Analysis, Von Nostrand
Reinhold Company.

Lecture Plan- Environmental Impact Assessment

Course
No. of
Module Topic Outcomes
Lectures
addressed
1 Module 1: Total Lecture Hours -7
1.1 Definition, Need for EIA, Evolution of EIA: Global CO1 1
& Indian scenario
1.2 Environmental legislations in India- The Water CO2 3
(Prevention & Control of Pollution) Act 1974, The
Air (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Act 1981,
The Environmental (Protection) Act 1986
1.3 Environmental standards for water, air and noise CO2 1
quality
1.4 EIA Notification 2006 CO2 2
2 Module II: Total Lecture Hours- 7
2.1 Environmental clearance process in India: Screening, CO2 3
Scoping, Public Consultation, Appraisal- Form1-
Category of projects
2.2 Generic structure of EIA report- Terms of Reference CO4 1
(ToR)
2.3 Types of EIA: strategic, regional, sectoral, project CO3 1
level-
2.4 Rapid EIA and Comprehensive EIA CO3 1
2.5 Initial Environmental Examination (IEE) CO3 1

3 Module III: Total Lecture Hours-7

3.1 EIA methodologies: Ad hoc, checklist, matrix, CO3 3
network and overlay
3.2 Impact Prediction, Evaluation and Mitigation- CO3 2
Prediction and assessment of the impact on water
(surface water and groundwater), air, and noise
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

environment
3.3 assessment of ecological impacts and Socio CO3 2
economic Impacts
4 Module IV: Total Lecture Hours- 7
4.1 Environmental Management Plan (EMP): Goal and CO4 2
purpose- Importance of EMP- Content of an EMP
4.2 Role of environmental monitoring program CO4 1
4.3 Environment Audit: need for audit- audit types and CO5 2
benefits- environmental audit procedure

4.4 ISO 14001 standards: Importance, salient features - CO5 2

Stages in implementation- Benefits

5 Module V: Total Lecture Hours- 7

5.1 EIA case studies (Indian)- a highway project CO1, CO4 2
5.2 Hydro electric power plant, air port project CO1, CO4 3
5.3 Quarry mining project, solid waste management CO1, CO4 3
project
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

Reg No.:_______________ Name:__________________________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
SIXTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION

Course Code: CET362

Course Name: ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
Part A
(Answer all questions; each question carries 3 marks)

1. Explain the need for EIA

2. Why environmental (protection) act, 1986 is called an umbrella act?
3. Discuss screening of projects
4. What is rapid EIA?
5. What is ad hoc method for impact assessment?
6. How to predict the impact of a proposed food industry on the water quality of a nearby river
7. Explain the benefits of an environmental audit
8. What is ISO 14001 standard?
9. What are the impacts of a highway project on local air quality
10. Discuss the environment monitoring program for a quarry mining industry.

PART B
(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

11. (a) Discuss environmental standards for water, air and noise (6 Marks)
(b) Discuss evolution of EIA in India (8 Marks)
OR
12. (a) DiscussAir (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Act 1981 (5 Marks)
(b) Explain salient features of EIA notification 2006 (9 Marks)

13. (a) Discuss environmental clearance process in India (10 Marks)

(b) What is Form-1 ? (4 Marks)
OR
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

14. (a) What is Initial Environmental Examination? (5 Marks)

(b) Explain different types of EIA (9 Marks)

15. (a) Discuss in detail EIA methodologies (10 Marks)

(b) How can air quality modelling help in assessing the impact on air (4 Marks)
OR
16. (a) Explain the steps to assess the impacts on the ecological environment
due to a project (7Marks)
(b) Explain the steps involved in assessment of impacts on the water environment.
(7 Marks)

17. (a) What are the different types of Environmental Audit? (5 Marks)
(b) Discuss the content of an environment management plan .(9 marks)
OR
18. (a) Discuss the salient features of an Environmental Monitoring Plan (5 Marks)
(b) Explain in detail the procedure for conducting an environmental audit (9 Marks)

19. Explain environmental clearance procedure for an airport (14 Marks)

OR
20. Discuss how to assess the impacts of a hydro electric project (14 Marks)
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
Year of
FUNCTIONAL DESIGN OF Category L T P Credit
CET372 Introduction
BUILDINGS
PEC 3 0 0 3 2019

Preamble: The general objective of this course is to provide an insight to the students to various
aspects of functional design of buildings and innovative construction methods.

Pre-requisite: CE204 Construction Technology

Course outcome : After the course, the student will able to:

CO1 Develop an understanding of acoustical design and noise control techniques

CO2 Understand elemental concepts of natural and artificial lighting designs
Know the principles involved in the design of buildings for thermal comfort and influence
CO3
of climate on design of buildings
Have basic concept for electrical load calculation, plumbing design, HVAC load
CO4
Calculation, functioning of elevators and escalators and rough cost estimation.
CO5 Acquire knowledge of innovative construction concepts

PO PO PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO1 PO1 PO12
Functional Design of

1 2 0 1
CO1 3 3
Buildings
CET372

CO2 3 3
CO3 3 3
CO4 3 3
CO5 3 3

Assessment pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests

Bloom’s Test 1 Test 2 End Semester Examination
Category (Marks) (Marks) (Marks)
Remember 5 5 15
Understand 10 10 15
Apply 20 20 40
Analyze 15 15 30
Evaluate
Create
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15marks
Total : 50marks

End semester examination pattern – There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each
question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each
module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-
divisions and carry 14marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

(Questions may be framed based on the outline given under each course outcome)

Course Outcome 1 (CO1)

1. Develop an understanding of acoustical design and noise control techniques
2. Applications of acoustics
3. Explain the acoustical considerations for offices, hospitals and industrial buildings

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Explain the purposes of lighting
2. Explain the basic concepts of natural and artificial lighting
3. Explain the different methods used for the design of natural lighting
4. Explain the different methods used for the design of artificial lighting

Course Outcome 3 (CO3)

1. Evaluate the principles involved in the design of buildings for thermal comfort
2. Explain the influence of climate on design of buildings
3. Compute solar radiation on different surfaces
4. Describe thermo physical properties of buildings

Course Outcome 4 (CO4)

1. Describe the basic concepts for electrical load calculation of structures
2. Explain the basic criteria for plumbing design
3. Calculation of HVAC load
4. Explain the functioning of elevators and escalators
5. Understand the rough cost estimation
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 5 (CO5)

1. Understand traditional techniques in Tropical climate with vernacular buildings in Kerala
2. Explain the concepts of green building
3. Describe concepts for intelligent buildings
4. Explain innovative construction methods

Course Code: CET 372

FUNCTIONAL DESIGN OF BUILDINGS
Syllabus

Module I

Acoustical / Sonic Environment and acoustical comfort: Sound, Nature of sound- Behavior of
sound in enclosed spaces-Concept of Geometric Acoustics-Reflection of sound and their
applications- Absorption of sound-Sound absorption coefficient-Human Audibility range-
Reverberation & Reverberation Time Calculation- Flanking paths- Sound absorption-materials
and fixings- Reverberation-Sabine’s formula-Eyrings modification.-Basic design of the elements
for the required degree of sound insulation- Air and structure born noises-equivalent noise
levels-day and night equivalent.

Acoustics, applications: Measures of noise control- Source-path and receiving end. TL value
and computation of TL value, Acoustical defects- acoustical design of auditoriums and small
lecture halls-Acoustical considerations of offices, hospitals and Industrial buildings.

Module II

Natural lighting: Visual task requirements, Units of Light, Light, Vision and Buildings,
Standards of Lighting and Visual comfort-The sky as a source of light, Daylight factor, Daylight
penetration- Calculation of daylight factor. Design of side-lit windows-BIS and CBRI methods-
skylights

Artificial lighting: Artificial lighting- illumination requirements-lux meter – lamps and

luminaries – polar distribution curves– Color temperature and color rendering index- glare -
Design of artificial lighting – lumen method – point by point method. Basic idea of street
lighting and outside lighting
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Module III

Thermal comfort: Factors affecting thermal comfort- effective temperature- thermal comfort
indices-ET-CET Charts- Bioclimatic chart- Psychrometry and Psycrometric chart.

Earth-Sun relationship: Sun’s apparent movement with respect to the earth. Solar angles-
Computation of solar radiation on different surfaces-solar path diagram-shadow-throw concept
and design of shading devices

Thermal design of buildings: Thermo physical properties of building materials and thermal
control: passive and active building design- Steady and periodic heat flow through building
envelope.

Design approaches: Climate conscious designs- Climatic zones in India- orientation and shape
of buildings in different climatic zones- Passive solar-Active solar and Active approaches.
Requirements of buildings in tropical areas-Thermal insulation

Module IV

Functional elements: Concept for electrical load calculation of structures- basic criteria for
plumbing design – basic concept of HVAC load calculation – Basic concept of functioning of
elevators and escalators- basic cost estimation.

Functional protection: Causes of fire, Mechanism of fire spread in buildings, classification of

fire-High temperature effects and combustibility of building materials and structure- Fire alarm
system, and means of escape-Firefighting installations.

Module V

Functionality as per Vastusastra: Basic concepts- Governing criteria of functionality- Energy

pattern- understand traditional techniques in Tropical climate with vernacular buildings in Kerala
as case study.

Innovative concepts of functionality: Concept of green building- case studies on low energy
and green buildings-Concepts of Intelligent building- Thirsty concrete- Blue roads- self healing
concrete
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Text Books and References:

1. Knudsen V.O. and Harris C.M., Acoustical Design in Architecture, John Wiley,1980

2. M David Egan , Architectural Acoustics, J.Ross Publishing,2007

3. Marshall Long, “Architectural Acoustics”, Second Edition, Academic Press, Waltham, USA,
2014

4. Bureau of Indian standards, Handbook on Functional Requirement of Buildings – SP:41(S and

T)-1987
5. Pritchard, D.C., "Lighting", Longman Scientific & Technical, Harlow,1995.
6. Benjamin Evans, "Daylight in Architecture", McGraw - Hill Book Company, Newyork,1981.
7.Koenigseberger, Manual of tropical Housing and Building Part I – Climatic design, Orient
Longman,2011
8. AjithaSimha.D, Building Environment, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi,1985
9. Jain. V.K., "Design and Installation of Services in Building complexes &High Rise
Buildings", Khanna Tech. Publishers, New Delhi,1986.
10. National Building Code of India (NBC2016)
11. Wayne Forster and Dean Hawkes, “Energy Efficient Buildings: Architecture, Engineering,
and Environment”. W.W. Norton Company Inc.2002.

12. Bureau of Energy Efficiency, India. Design Guidelines for Energy Efficient Multi-Storey
Buildings,2014.
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Course
No of
Module Topic outcome
Hours
addressed

Module I (8 Hours)

1.1 Acoustical / Sonic Environment and acoustical comfort: Sound, CO1 1

Nature of sound- Behavior of sound in enclosed spaces
1.2 Concept of Geometric Acoustics-Reflection of sound and their CO1 1
applications- Absorption of sound-Sound absorption coefficient-
Human Audibility range-Reverberation & Reverberation Time
1.3 CO1 2
Calculation- Flanking paths. Sound absorption-materials and
fixings. Reverberation-Sabine’s formula-Eyrings modification.
Basic design of the elements for the required degree of sound
1.4 CO1 1
insulation- Air and structure born noises-equivalent noise
levels-
day and night equivalent
Acoustics, applications: Measures of noise control- Source-path
1.5 CO1 1
and receiving end. TL value and computation of TL value,
Acoustical defects-
Acoustical design of auditoriums and small lecture halls.
1.6 Acoustical considerations of offices, hospitals and Industrial CO1 2
buildings.
Module II (6 Hours)

2.1 Natural lighting: Visual task requirements, Units of Light, Light, CO2 1
Vision and Buildings
Standards of Lighting and Visual comfort-The sky as a source of
2.2 CO2 1
light, Daylight factor, Daylight penetration-Calculation of
daylight
factor.
2.3 Design of side-lit windows-BIS and CBRI methods-skylights CO2 1

2.4 Artificial lighting: Artificial lighting- illumination requirements- CO2 1

lux meter – lamps and luminaries – polar distribution curves
Color temperature and color rendering index- glare - Design of
2.5 artificial lighting – lumen method – point by point method. Basic CO2 2
idea of street lighting and outside lighting
Module III (8Hours)
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

3.1 Thermal comfort: Factors affecting thermal comfort- effective CO3 1

temperature
3.2 Thermal comfort indices-ET-CET Charts- Bioclimatic chart- CO3 1
Psychrometry and Psycrometric chart.
3.3 Earth-Sun relationship: Sun’s apparent movement with respect CO3 1
to the earth. Solar angles
3.4 Computation of solar radiation on different surfaces-solar path CO3 1
diagram-shadow-throw concept and design of shading devices
Thermal design of buildings: Thermo physical properties of
3.5 building materials and thermal control- Passive andactive CO3 1
building design- Steady and periodic heat flow through building
envelope.
3.6 Design approaches: Climate conscious designs- Climatic zones CO3 2
inIndia-orientationandshapeofbuildingsindifferentclimatic
zones
3.7 Passive solar-Active solar and Active approaches. Requirements CO3 1
of buildings in tropical areas-Thermal insulation
Module IV (7 Hours)

4.1 Functional elements: Concept for electrical load calculation of CO4 1

structures
4.2 Basic criteria for plumbing design CO4 1

4.3 Basic concept of HVAC load calculation CO4 1

Functional protection: Causes of fire, Mechanism of fire spread

4.4 in buildings, classification of fire-High temperature effects and CO4 2
combustibility of building materials and structure- Fire alarm
system, and means of escape. Firefighting installations
Basic concept of functioning of elevators and escalators and
4.5 CO4 2
basic cost estimation ofservices.

Module V (6Hours)

5.1 Functionality as per Vastusastra: Basic concepts- Governing CO5 1

criteria of functionality - Energy pattern
5.2 Understand traditional techniques in Tropical climate with CO5 2
vernacular buildings in Kerala as case study
5.3 Innovative concepts of functionality: Concept of green building- CO5 2
case studies on low energy and green buildings-
Concepts of Intelligent building- Thirsty concrete- Blue roads-
5.4 CO5 1
self healing concrete
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

Reg. No.:_______________ Name:__________________________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SIXTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: CET372

Course Name: FUNCTIONAL DESIGN OF BUILDINGS

Max.Marks: 100 Duration: 3hours

Part A
(Answer all questions; each question carries 3 marks)

1. Write briefly about the audibility range of human beings. (3 Marks)

2. Discuss any three common acoustical defects seen in an auditorium. (3 Marks)
3. What are the advantages and disadvantages of sky lighting? (3 Marks)
4. Briefly describe polar distribution curves (3 Marks)
5. What are the thermal insulating materials used to maintain comfortable conditions inside a
building? (3 Marks)
6. What do you understand by the following (i) Solar Constant (ii) Solar Azimuth
(iii) Solar Altitude (3 Marks)
7. Write short note on "Handling capacity of Lifts” (3 Marks)
8. Briefly describe firefighting installations (3 Marks)
9. Describe self healing concrete. (3 Marks)

10. List out the advantages of self healing concrete. (3 Marks)

PART B
(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module – 1
11. (a) TL value of a 16m2 solid wall is 45 dB. If a hole of 2 cm2 is drilled through it, find the reduction
in TL value? (10 Marks)
(b) Discuss how the TL value of a separating wall varies with its mass. (4 Marks)
12. (a) Explain how sound intensity varies with distance from a point source
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

I. In free field
II. In a reverberant field (8 Marks)

(b) What you mean by Acoustical Day Time and Acoustical Night Time. Explain the concepts of
Leqand Ldn? (6Marks)

Module – 2

13. (a) Explain the procedure of design of Artificial lighting by Lumen Method. (7 Marks)
(b) A point source of light has an intensity 2000 candela in the vertically downward direction. The
intensity reduces with the angle and reaches 1000 cd at the horizontal direction (90degrees with
vertical). If the source is mounted 4m above the working plane, find the illumination due to this
light source at points (i) directly under the lamp (ii) at 3m away in the same plane.
(7 Marks)

14. (a) Define the different components of daylight factor? (6 Marks)

(b) What do you understand by the concepts Passive solar design, Active solar design and active
design? (8 Marks)
Module – 3
15. (a) Explain the considerations to be made in achieving thermal comfort in hot & dry and Warm
and humid regions? (7 Marks)
(b) Explain the concept of shadow angles and shadow throws. How shadow throws are used in the
design of shading devices? (7 Marks)

16. (a) Explain the concept of comfort zone based on Bio-climatic chart (7 Marks)
(b) What is Psychrometry? What are the usual input parameters to a Psychrometric chart? What
are the various informations we get from a Psychrometric chart? (7 Marks)

Module – 4
17. Explain the features, operation arrangements, location and types of Elevators in public buildings.
(14 Marks)
18. Explain the high temperature effects and combustibility of building materials and structures
(14Marks)
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Module – 5
19. (a) Explain the concepts of green building. (7 Marks)
(b) Describe LEED and GRIHA ratings for the evaluation of green buildings. (7 Marks)

20. Describe the modern construction materials and its merits (14 Marks)
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER VI
MINOR
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
Year of
ESTIMATION, CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
CET382 Introduction
COSTING AND
VAC 3 1 0 4 2019
VALUATION

Preamble: The course introduces the various types of estimation, specification writing, analysis of
rate and various methods to determine the valuation of building. It enables the students to prepare
the detailed estimate of various items of work related to civil engineering construction. This course
trains the student to find out the valuation of building by various methods.

Prerequisite: Building drawing

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

Course Prescribed
Description of Course Outcome
Outcome learning level
CO1 Explain the specifications for various items of work Understanding
associated with building construction

Analyse the unit rates of different items of work associated

CO2 Applying
with building construction

Prepare the approximate estimate of building

Applying
CO3
Prepare detailed estimates of buildings and the bar bending
CO4 Applying
schedules for R.C.C works

Describe various principles and methods of valuation

CO5 Understanding

CO6 Determine the valuation of buildings by different methods Analyse

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO1 PO1 PO1
0 1 2
CO1 3 - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO2 3 - - - - - - - - 3 -
CO3 3 2 - - - - - - - - 3 -
CO4 3 2 - - - - - - - - 3 -
CO5 3 2 - - - - - - - - - -
CO6 3 2 - - - - - - - - - -
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Assessment Pattern
Continuous Assessment
End Semester
Bloom’s Category Tests
Examination
1 2
Remember
Understand 20 10 35
Apply 30 10 40
Analyse 30 25
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration
150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10marks
Continuous Assessment Test(2numbers) : 25
marksAssignment/Quiz/Courseproject : 15marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain
10 questions with 2 questions from modules 1 to 3 and 4 questions from module 4, having 3
marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from
each module of which student should answer any one. Each full question carries 16 marks from
module 1, 2 and 4 and 22 marks from module 3 and can have maximum 2 sub- divisions.

Note: For analysis of rate and cost estimation, unit rate and labour requirement should be given
along with the questions in the question paper. No other charts, tables, codes are permitted in the
Examination Hall. If necessary, relevant data shall be given along with the question paper.
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Course Level Assessment Questions

CO1: Explain the specifications for various items of work associated with building construction

1. Write the detailed specification of earth work in excavation

2. Differentiate general specification and detailed specification with suitable

example

CO2: Analyse the unit rates of different items of work associated with building construction

1. Explain DAR and DSR.

2. Develop rate analysis for DSR item No.5.3, Reinforced cement concrete work
with 1:1.5:3 (3 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) in beams, suspended
floors, roofs having slope up to 15° landings, above plinth level up to floor five
level, excluding the cost of centering, shuttering, finishing and reinforcement.
Material: 20mm Aggregate 0.57m3@₹1300/m3, 10mm 0.28m3@ ₹1300/m3,
coarse sand (Zone III) 0.425m3@₹1200/m3, Portland cement
400kg@₹5700/tonne.
Labour : Mason 0.24@₹467/day, Beldar 2.75@₹368/day, Bhisti
0.90@₹407/day, Coolie 1.88@₹368/day
Carriage provisions: Stone aggregate below 40mm 0.85m3@₹103.77, Portland
cement 0.40tonne@₹5700/tonne.
Hire Charges for concrete mixer 0.08@₹800/day, Vibrator needle type
₹0.08@350/day
Sundries (LS) 14.30@₹1.73. Adopt water charges, contractor profit and
overheads as per the CPWD DSR2018 provisions.

CO3: Prepare the approximate estimate of building

1. Differentiate plinth area estimate and cubic content estimate

2. Prepare the approximate estimate of building project with total plinth area of all
building is 800sqm from the following data
a) Plinth area rate₹. 45000 per sqm
b) Cost of water supply @7.5% of cost of building
c) Cost of sanitary and electrical installations each @ 7.5% of cost of
building
d) Cost of architectural features @ 1% of cost of building
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

e) Cost of roads and lawns @5% of cost of building

f) Cost of PS and contingencies @4% of cost of building
Determine the total cost of building project

CO4: Prepare detailed estimates of buildings and the bar bending schedules for R.C.C works

1. Explain bar bending schedule. State its uses

2. Write the unit of measurement of (i) Carpentry fittings (ii) Pointing of Brick wall
3. Calculate the quantity of RCC and Prepare a bar bending schedule of the slab of
size 330cm x 550cm (internal dimensions) shown in the figure. (All dimensions
are in centimeters)

4. Prepare detailed estimate for the following items of work for the construction of
residential building shown below
a) RRM for foundation and basement
b) RCC works
c) Inside and outside plastering
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

CO5: Describe various principles and methods of valuation

1. Explain how depreciation in building is worked out.

2. Discuss about the different types of values and the term obsolescence

3 Discuss the importance of valuation in civil engineering.

CO6: Calculate the value of buildings by different methods

1. A building is situated by the side of a main road of Mumbai city on a land of

500sqm.The built up portion is 20m x 15 m. The building is first class type and
provided with water supply, sanitary and electrical fittings, and the age of the
building is 30 years. Workout the valuation of the property.

2. A three storied building is standing on a plot of land measuring 800sqm. The

plinth area of each storey is 400sqm.There is an RCC framed structure and
thefuture life may take as 70 years. The building fetches a gross rent of
₹.18000per month, Work out the capitalized value of the property on the basis of
6% netyield. For sinking fund 3% compound interest may be assumed. Cost of
the land may be taken as ₹. 10000 per sqm. The other data may assume suitably
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

3. Workout the valuation of a commercial building with the following data: Cost of
land for life-time period of building is ₹.5,20,000/-. Gross income per year is
₹.8,50,000/-Expenses required per year: (a) staff salary, electric charges, municipal
taxes including licenses fees, stationery and printing etc. is 20% of the gross
income. (b) For repair and maintenance of lift, furniture etc. @ 5% of their capital
cost of ₹.10,50,000/- (c) sinking fund for the items considered in capital cost,
whose life is 25years @4% after allowing 10% scrap value. (d) Insurance premium
is ₹.25, 000/- per year. Take year’s purchase @8% and annual repair of the
building @2% on gross income.

SYLLABUS

MODULE 1. General introduction- Quantity surveying- Basic principles, Types of Estimates-

purposes, Specifications-General &detailed specification for building materials and execution of
major item of work (Earth work excavation, masonry, concrete, finishing) of building work with
reference to CPWD specifications-Method of measurement with reference to IS1200.

MODULE 2. Analysis of rates, Introduction to the use of CPWD schedule of rates as per latest
DSR and Analysis of rate as per latest DAR, Overhead charges. Analysis of rates for Earth work in
excavation for foundation, mortars, reinforced cement concrete Works, finishing work, masonry
work, stone works, flooringwith reference to latest DSR and latest DAR .Types of tender, contracts,
General and important conditions of contract, contract document(concept only). Duties and roles of
client, architect/engineer, contractor and local bodies.

MODULE 3. Detailed Estimate- Preparation of detailed measurement and abstract of estimate using
Centreline method &Long wall short wall(separate wall) method for RCC single storey building,
(students may answer the question by using any of the two methods)Septic tank and Soak Pit,
preparation of Bar Bending Schedule– lintel, beams, slabs, RCC column footings.

MODULE 4. Valuation – explanation of different technical terms, purpose. Depreciation – methods

of calculating depreciation – straight line method, constant percentage method, sinking fund method
and quantity survey method, obsolescence.

Principles of valuation of open land- comparative method, abstractive method, belting method,
valuation based on hypothetical building schemes. Methods of valuation of land with building –
rental method, direct comparison of capital cost, valuation based on profit, depreciation method.
Free hold and leasehold properties, Forms of rent, Rent fixation- Methods.
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Text Books:
1. B. N. Dutta, Estimation and Costing in Civil Engineering, UBS publishers
2. Rangwala, Estimation Costing and Valuation,Charotar publishing house pvt. ltd
3. Dr. S. Seetha Raman, M.Chinna Swami, Estimation and Quantity Surveying, Anuradha
publications Chennai.
4. M Chakraborthy,Estimating, Costing, Specification and valuation, published by the author,
21 B, Babanda Road, Calcutta 26

References:
1. B S Patil, Civil Engineering Contracts and Estimates, university press
2. V N Vazirani& S P Chandola, Civil Engineering Estimation and Costing, Khanna
Publishers
3. IS 1200-1968; Methods of Measurement of Building &Civil Engineering Works
4. CPWD DAR 2018 and DSR 2018 orlatest
Lecture Plan

Course
No. of
Module Topic Outcomes
Lectures
addressed
1 Module I: Total lecture hours: 7
1.1 Introduction, estimation, purpose of estimation
CO3 1

1.2 Types of estimates, simple problems of approximate CO3 2

estimate
1.3 Specification, objectives, principles of specification CO1 1
writing, design of ideal specification
1.4 Types of specifications CO1 1
1.5 Detailed specification of excavation, PCC& RCC,
CO2 2
mortars, brick works.
2 Module II: Total lecture hours: 6
2.1 Analysis of rate, need, factors affecting, Introduction
CO2
to the use of CPWD DSR and DAR,overhead charges 1

2.2 Analysis of rates for earth works, PCC, RCC Works,

CO2 3
finishes, masonry works, stone works,flooring, with
reference to latest DSR and DAR.(Required data for
rate analysis will be provided in the question paper.)
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

2.3 Tender, types, Contract,types,factors affecting,

contract document, General and important conditions CO2 2
of contact.Duties and roles of client,
architect/engineer, contractor and local bodies
3 Module III: Total lecture hours: 16
3.1 Different methods of detailed estimation- center line
method and long wall short wall method. CO4 2

3.2 Preparation of detailed measurement and abstract of

estimatefor RCC single storey buildings- CO4 8
Excavation for foundation, Foundation and
basement, DPC, Masonry in superstructure, RCC,
Plastering, Painting, Flooring, Woodwork.
3.3 Estimation of Septic tank and soak pit CO4 2

3.4 BBS of lintel, beam, slab and column footing CO4 4

4
Module IV: Total lecture hours:16
4.1 Valuation-purpose, different forms of values CO5 1
4.2 Capitalized value, years purchase, sinking fund, CO5 3
Gross income, net income, outgoings –simple
problems
4.3 Depreciation – methods of calculating depreciation –
CO5 3
straight line method, constant percentage method,
sinking fund method, and quantity survey method-
problems,obsolescence

4.4 Methods of valuation of open land – comparative

CO5,CO6 3
method, abstractive method, belting method,
valuation based on hypothetical building schemes-
Problems based on this
4.5 Methods of valuation of land with buildings – rental
CO5,CO6 4
method, direct comparison with capital cost,
valuation based on profit, depreciation method-
Problems based on this
4.6 Free hold and leasehold properties, Forms of rent,
CO6 2
Rent fixation- Methods. Simple problems based on
this
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

Reg.No.: Name:

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SIXTH SEMESTER B.TECH. DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code: CET382
Course Name: ESTIMATION, COSTING AND VALUATION
Max.Marks:100 Duration: 3Hours

PART A
Answer all questions; each question carries 3 marks. (10×3 marks = 30 marks)

1. a) Differentiate revised estimate and supplementary estimate

b) What are the principles of specification writing?

c) Explain the use of data book and schedule of rates

d) What are the important points to be noted while preparing contract document?

e) In a simply supported beam of depth 450mm is provided with a 3, 20mm diameter bar at
bottom, in this one bar is provided as bendup bar near both the supports. 10mm stirrups
are provided with top and bottom cover 25mm. Calculate the additional length provided
for bend up in both end. If the (i) bendup angle is 45o and (ii) bendup angle is 30o.
f) Write the unit of measurement of (i) DPC using waterproofing compound (ii) Iron work
for window (iii) Water proof Painting above roof slab
g) Differentiate book value and market value

h) Differentiate depreciation and obsolescence

i) Explain how will you find out the valuation of land by hypothetical building scheme
j) Explain the depreciation method of valuation

PART B
Answer one full question from each module (Assume any missing data suitably)

Module I

2. a) Prepare approximate estimate of a public building having plinth area equal to1800 sq.m.
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

i. Plinth area rate as ₹. 35,000 / sq. m.

ii. Special architectural treatment = 3% of cost of building.
iii. Water supply and sanitary installation = 5% of cost of building.
iv. Electric installation =14% of cost of building.
v. Other services = 5% of cost of building.
vi. Contingencies = 3% of overall cost of building.
vii. Supervision charges = 8% of overall cost of building. (10marks)
b) Differentiate detailed estimate and preliminary estimate. What are the documents to be
accompanied with detailed estimate? (6marks)

OR
3. Differentiate general specification and detailed specification with suitable example(16marks)

Module II
4. a) What are the factors affecting the rate of a particular item of work. (6 marks)
b) Develop unit rate analysis for Providing and laying in position cement concrete of
specified grade excluding the cost of centering and shuttering - All work up to plinth level
1:1½:3 (1 Cement: 1½ coarse sand (zone-III) : 3 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal
size)
Details of cost for 1 cum.
MATERIAL: Stone Aggregate (Single size) 20 mm nominal size 0.57 m3@₹1350/m3,
Stone Aggregate (Single size): 10 mm nominal size 0.28 m3@₹1350/m3, Coarse sand (zone
III)0.425 m3@₹1350/m3, Portland Cement (0.2833 cum) 0.40 tonne@₹4940/tone
LABOUR: Mason (average) 0.1/day @ ₹709/day, Beldar 1.63/day @ ₹558/day,Bhisti
0.70/day @ ₹617/day
HIRE CHARGES: Concrete Mixer 0.25 to 0.40 cum with hooper 0.07/day @ ₹800/day
Vibrator (Needle type 40mm) 0.07/day @ ₹370/day
CARRIAGE CHARGES: Stone aggregate below 40 mm nominal size 0.85
m @₹103.77/m , Coarse sand 0.425 m3@₹103.77/m3, Portland cement 0.40
3 3

tonne@₹92.24/tone
Sundries: 14.3LS @₹2.00/LS (10marks)

OR

5. a. Explain the different types of contracts (8 marks)

b.What are the general and important conditions of contract? (8 marks)

Module III

6. Prepare the detailed estimate of the following items of the building. Refer Fig. No. 1
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

(22 marks)
i. Excavation for foundation.
ii. RR masonry in foundation and plinth (1:6)
iii. Brick Masonry in superstructure (1:6).
iv. Mosaic tile flooring.

OR

7. Prepare the detailed estimate of following items of septic tank shown below (22 marks)
a) Earth work in excavation
b) Cement concrete 1:2:4
c) R.C.C work 1:1 ½:3
d) Plastering in C.M 1:3
e) Brick masonry
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

Module IV

8. a) A concrete mixer was purchased at ₹.8000/-. Assuming salvage value to be ₹.1000,

after5years, calculate depreciation for each year adopting (a) Straight line method (b)
Constant percentage method and (c) Sinking fund method considering 6% interest.
(8 marks)
b) A lease-hold property is to produce a net income of ₹.1,20,000/- per annum for the next
60years. What is the value of the property? Assume that the land lord desires a return of
6% on his capital and the sinking fund to replace the capital is also to accumulate at 6%.
What will be the value of the property if the rate of interest for redemption of capital is
3%? (8 marks)
OR
9. a) A property consists of a south facing plot of land, having south-east and north sides in
due directions, which measures 60m, 180m and 80m respectively. It consists of an old
two storied building, having a total cubical content of 2840 cubic metres. Assuming
prime cost of construction of the building as ₹.20000/- per cubic metre and allowing
10% old materials value only for the building, what would you recommend as the fair
value of the property, if the front belt land (depth of front belt being 25m) be estimated
at ₹.9000/- per sqm? (8 marks)
b) The owner of a building gets a net annual rent of ₹.85,500. The future life of building is
estimated to be 12 years. But if recommended repairs are carried out immediately at an
estimated cost of ₹.3, 00,000, it is expected to last for at least 30years. Assuming rate
of interest as 8%, determine whether it is economical to carry out the recommended
repairs to the building or leave it as it is. (8 marks)
 GEOTECHNICAL Year of
CATEGORY L T CIVIL ENGINEERING
P CREDIT
CET INVESTIGATION & Introduction
384 GROUND IMPROVEMENT
VAC 4 0 0 4 2019
TECHNIQUES

Preamble: Goal of this course is to expose the students to various methods of soil exploration, to
recognize weak soils based on the soil investigation reports and to analyze suitable remedial measures
to improve the properties of weak soils. After this course, students will be able to recognize practical
problems in real-world situations and respond accordingly.

Prerequisite : CET283 Introduction to Geotechnical Engineering

Course Outcomes: After completion of the course the student will be able to:

CO 1 Understand soil exploration methods

CO 2 Explain different methods of ground improvement techniques with and without
addition of other materials
CO 3 List various types, functions and practical applications of Geosynthetics
CO 4 Describe the application of reinforcement function of geosynthetics in retaining
structures like Reinforced Earth Retaining Walls, Gabions and Soil nailing
CO 5 Solve the field problems related to geotechnical engineering by applying ground
improvement techniques

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes (Minimum requirement)

PO PO PO
PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9
10 11 12
CO 1 3 - - - - - - - - - - -
CO 2 2 3 - - - - - - - - - -
CO 3 3 - - - - - - - - - -
CO 4 2 3 - - - - - - - - - -
CO5 2 2 3

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester

Bloom’s Category
Test 1 (Marks) Test 2 (Marks) Examination (Marks)
Remember 20 20 40
Understand 20 20 40
Apply 10 10 20
Analyse
Evaluate
 Create CIVIL ENGINEERING

Mark Distribution

Total Marks CIE Marks ESE Marks ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) Pattern :

Attendance : 10 Marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 Marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 Marks

End Semester Examination (ESE) Pattern : There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contains 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students
should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should
answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

(Questions may be framed based on the outline given under each course outcome)
Course Outcome 1 (CO1):
1. Understand Soil Investigation and Soil Exploration methods
Course Outcome 2 (CO2):
1. Explain different methods of ground improvement techniques without addition of any
materials viz. surface compaction & deep compaction
2. Explain different methods of ground improvement techniques with addition of other materials
viz. grouting and lime stabilization
Course Outcome 3 (CO3):
1. List various types of Geosynthetics
2. List functions of Geosynthetics
3. List practical applications of Geosynthetics

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Explain reinforced earth retaining walls
2. Explain Gabions
3. Explain Soil Nailing

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Explain solutions of suitable ground improvement techniques for various practical situations
 SYLLABUS CIVIL ENGINEERING

Module 1
Site investigation and soil exploration: Introduction and practical importance –
objectivesPlanning of a sub-surface exploration program – Reconnaissance – Preliminary
investigation - Detailed investigation - methods of subsurface exploration – direct methods - Open
pits and trenches - Semi direct methods – Borings - Auger boring – Shell and Auger Boring - Wash
boring, percussion drilling and rotary drilling – advantages and disadvantages -Guidelines for
choosing spacing and depth of borings [I.S. guidelines only] - Sampling - disturbed samples,
undisturbed samples and chunk samples - Types of samplers – Split spoon sampler – Thin-walled
sampler – Piston sampler - Rotary sampler – Core Recovery and Rock Quality Designation
Module 2
Sounding and Penetration Tests - Standard Penetration Test – Procedure - Corrections to be applied
to observed N values – Numerical examples - Factors influencing the SPT results and precautions
to obtain reliable results – Merits and drawbacks of the test - Correlations of N value with various
engineering and index properties of soils - Static Cone Penetration Test (SCPT) and Dynamic Cone
Penetration Test (DCPT) – Brief Procedure - Merits/drawbacks - Boring log - soil profile-
Location of Water table - Geophysical methods : Seismic Refraction method and Electrical
Resistivity method – Brief Procedure - Merits/drawbacks
Module 3
Ground Improvement Techniques : Introduction – Objectives - Soil improvement without the
addition of any material : Shallow and Deep Compaction - Shallow compaction – Rollers - Deep
Compaction - Dynamic compaction - Compaction piles - Blasting technique - Vibro compaction–
Vibroflotation - Terra probe method - Vibro replacement - sand piles and stone columns -
Preloading techniques – sand drains

Module 4
Soil improvement by adding materials : Grouting – materials - Grouting systems : One shot and two
shot systems - Modes of grouting - Main types of grouting : Permeation Grouting, Compaction
Grouting and Jet Grouting – Practical Applications - Grouting Plant and equipment - Grouted
columns – Curtain and blanket grouting – Practical applications - Lime stabilization –Mechanism-
optimum lime content-lime fixation point

Module 5
Soil improvement using Geosynthetics : Materials of Geosynthetics - Types of Geosynthetics -
Types of Geotextiles and Geogrids - Functions of Geosynthetics - Practical applications -
Introduction to reinforced earth – principles – reinforcing materials - Reinforced earth retaining
walls – components – construction sequence – practical applications - Gabions – Introduction -
practical applications - Soil Nailing – Introduction – practical applications
Text Books: CIVIL ENGINEERING
1. Ranjan G. and A. S. R. Rao, Basic and Applied Soil Mechanics, New Age International, 2002.
2. Purushotham S. Raju, Ground Improvement Technique, Laxmi Publications

References:
1. Shashi K. Gulhati and Manoj Dutta, Geotechnical Engineering, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
CompayLimited,New Delhi, 2008
2. Venkatramaiah, Geotechnical Engg, Universities Press, 2000.
3. Arora K. R., Geotechnical Engineering, Standard Publishers, 2006.
4. Moseley, Text Book on Ground Improvement, Blackie Academic Professional, Chapman &
Hall, 2004
5. Boweven R., Grouting in Engineering Practice, Applied Science Publishers Ltd
6. Sivakumar Babu, G. L., An introduction to Soil Reinforcement and Geosynthetics, Universities
Press (India) Private Limited, 2006
7. Jewell R.A., Soil Reinforcement with Geotextiles, CIRIA Special Publication, Thomas Telford
8. Donald .H. Gray & Robbin B. Sotir, Bio Technical & Soil Engineering Slope Stabilization,
John Wiley
9. Rao G.V. & Rao G.V.S., Engineering with Geotextiles, Tata McGraw Hill
10. Korener, Construction & Geotechnical Methods In Foundation Engineering, McGraw Hill
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule: CIVIL ENGINEERING
Outcomes
Module Contents Hours
Addressed

1 Module 1 9
1.1 Site investigation and soil exploration: Introduction and practical CO 1 1
importance - objectives
1.2 Planning of a sub-surface exploration program – Reconnaissance – CO 1 1
Preliminary investigation

1.3 Detailed investigation - methods of subsurface exploration – direct CO 1 1

methods - Open pits and trenches
1.4 Semi direct methods – Borings - Auger boring – Shell and Auger CO 1 2
Boring - Wash boring, percussion drilling and rotary drilling –
advantages and disadvantages
1.5 Guidelines for choosing spacing and depth of borings [I.S. guidelines CO 1 1
only]
1.6 Sampling - disturbed samples, undisturbed samples and chunk samples CO 1 1

1.7 Types of samplers – Split spoon sampler – Thin-walled sampler – CO 1 2

Piston sampler - Rotary sampler – Core Recovery and Rock Quality
Designation

2 Module 2 9
2.1 Sounding and Penetration Tests - Standard Penetration Test – CO 1 1
Procedure
2.2 Corrections to be applied to observed N values – Numerical examples CO 1 1

2.3 Factors influencing the SPT results and precautions to obtain reliable CO 1 1
results – Merits and drawbacks of the test

2.4 Correlations of N value with various engineering and index properties CO 1 1

of soils

Static Cone Penetration Test (SCPT) and Dynamic Cone Penetration CO 1 2

2.5
Test (DCPT) – Brief Procedure - Merits/drawbacks

2.6 Boring log - soil profile- Location of Water table CO 1 1

2.7 Geophysical methods : Seismic Refraction method and Electrical CO 1 2

Resistivity method – Brief Procedure - Merits/drawbacks
3 Module 3 9
3.1 Ground Improvement Techniques : Introduction - Objectives CO 2 1

3.2 Soil improvement without the addition of any material : Shallow and CO 2 1
Deep Compaction
 3.3 Shallow compaction - Rollers CIVIL ENGINEERING
CO 2 1

3.4 Deep Compaction - Dynamic compaction CO 2 1

3.5 Compaction piles CO 2 1
3.6 Blasting technique CO 2 1
3.7 Vibro compaction– Vibroflotation - Terra probe method CO 2 1
3.8 Vibro replacement - sand piles and stone columns - Preloading CO 2 2
techniques – sand drains

4 Module 4 9
4.1 Soil improvement by adding materials : Grouting - materials CO 2 1

4.2 Grouting systems : One shot and two shot systems - Modes of grouting CO 2 1

4.3 Main types of grouting : Permeation Grouting, Compaction Grouting CO 2 & 3

and Jet Grouting – Practical Applications CO 5

4.4 Grouting Plant and equipment CO 2 1

Grouted columns – Curtain and blanket grouting – Practical CO 2 & 1
4.5
applications CO 5
Lime stabilization –Mechanism-optimum lime content-lime fixation CO 2 1
4.6
point

5 Module 5 9
5.1 Soil improvement using Geosynthetics : Materials of Geosynthetics CO 3 1

5.2 Types of Geosynthetics - Types of Geotextiles and Geogrids CO 3 1

5.3 Functions of Geosynthetics - Practical applications CO 3 & 1

CO5
5.4 Introduction to reinforced earth – principles – reinforcing materials CO 4 1

5.5 Reinforced earth retaining walls – components – construction sequence CO 4 & 2

– practical applications CO5

5.6 Gabions – Introduction - practical applications CO 4 & 1

CO5
5.7 Soil Nailing – Introduction – practical applications CO 4 & 1
CO5
 Model Question Paper CIVIL ENGINEERING
QP CODE:
Reg No.:_______________ Name:__________________________
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
SIXTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: CET 384

Course Name : GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION & GROUND IMPROVEMENT
TECHNIQUES
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 hours
Part A
(Answer all questions; each question carries 3 marks)

1. Explain Objectives of soil exploration

2. List out the factors, which affect the spacing between the bore holes
3. Discuss the merits and demerits of SPT in the sub-surface investigation
4. Discuss any one method of determining the ground water table.
5. Explain Compaction piles in sand
6. Explain Significant depth of influence in Deep compaction.
7. Explain One Shot system and two shot system in grouting
8. Explain optimum lime content and lime fixation point
9. Differentiate between Woven and Non-woven geotextiles.
10. Explain the principle of reinforced earth.

PART B
(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module – 1
11. (a) Give guidelines, which enable the determination of the depth of exploration (5 Marks)
(b) Explain Wash boring methods of site exploration with neat sketch. What are the advantages
and disadvantages of this method. (9 Marks)
12. (a) Distinguish between thin-wall and thick-wall samplers (5 Marks)
(b) Explain Auger boring and Shell & Auger boring methods of site exploration with neat
sketches. What are the advantages of these methods. (9 Marks)
Module – 2
13. (a) Explain Static Cone Penetration Test. (5 Marks)
(b) What is Standard Penetration Test? Explain the test setup and the procedure of conducting the
test. What are the corrections to the observed SPT (N) value? (9 Marks)
14. (a) Explain Dynamic Cone Penetration Test. (5 Marks)
(b) Explain Seismic Refraction Method of exploration. What are its limitations? (9 Marks)
 Module – 3 CIVIL ENGINEERING
15. (a) Explain the dynamic compaction process for granular soils. (7 Marks)
(b) Explain Vibroflotation with neat sketch. What are the practical applications? (7 Marks)
16. (a) Explain Sand Piles and Stone Columns. (7 Marks)
(b) Explain Preloading Techniques with neat sketch. What are the advantages and disadvantages?
(7 Marks)
Module – 4
17. (a) Explain Grouting Plant and Equipment (5 Marks)
(b) Explain Compaction Grouting. What are its practical applications? (9 Marks)
18. (a) Explain Lime stabilization method. (5 Marks)
(b) Explain jet grouting method. What are its practical applications? (9 Marks)

Module – 5
19. (a) What are the functions of geosynthetics? (5 Marks)
(b) Explain Gabions and Soil Nailing. What are its practical applications? (9 Marks)
20. (a) List different types of geosynthetics. (5 Marks)
(b) Explain the components of Reinforced Earth Retaining Walls with neat sketch. What are the
practical applications of reinforced earth? (9 Marks)
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
Year of
CET ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
Introduction
386 AND SAFETY VAC 3 1 0 3 2019

Preamble: The course is designed to build environmental health literacy among students and
encourages them to take safety measures against various environmental hazards. It motivates
the students in maintaining and improving the quality of the environment and empower
learners to take appropriate actions to reduce the environment pollution.

Pre-requisite: Nil

Course outcome : After the course, the student will able to:

CO1 Understand the Toxicology and Occupational Health associated with industries.
Identify chemical and microbial agents that originate in the environment and can impact
CO2 human health.
CO3 Describe various measures to ensure safety in Construction industry.
CO4 Explain the effect of air and water pollution on environment.

CO5 Describe the safety measures against various environmental hazards.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
Environmental Health

CO1 3 2 2 1
And Safety
CET 386

CO2 3 2 1

CO3 3 2 2

CO4 3 2 2

CO5 3 2 2

Assessment pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests

Bloom’s End Semester Examination
Test 1 Test 2
Category (Marks)
(Marks) (Marks)
Remember 15 15 30
Understand 20 20 40
Apply
Analyze 15 15 30
Evaluate
Create
Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:
CIVIL ENGINEERING

Attendance : 10marks
Continuous Assessment Test(2numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15marks
Total : 50 marks

End semester examination pattern – There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part
A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each
question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each
module of which student should answer anyone. Each question can have maximum 2
sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment

Course
Qn. outcome
Question Marks
No (CO)
Assessed
Part A
1 What are the socio- economic reasons in safety? 3 CO1

2 Define industrial hygiene. 3 CO1

3 Define noise. What are the compensation aspects of 3 CO2

noise?
4 Explain about the biohazard control program. 3 CO2

5 Discuss the possible electrical injuries in a construction

industry. 3 CO3

6 What are the hazards due to radiation? 3 CO3

7 What are the criteria air pollutants? 3 CO4

8 Describe the Depletion of Ozone Layer. 3 CO4

9 What are the benefits of safety inspection? 3 CO5

10 Discuss the role of an individual in conservation of 3 CO5

natural resources.
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
Part B
(Answer ANY ONE FULL question from each
module)

Module I
Briefly explain about occupational related diseases
11 found in the industries. 14 CO1

Write the short notes on :

12 (i) Silicosis (ii) Asbestosis (iii) Anthracosis 14 CO1
(iv) Anthrax.
Module II

13(a) Write briefly about the classification of biohazardous 7 CO2

agents.

13(b) What are the precautionary measures for chemical 7 CO2

hazards?

14 Write short notes on : 14 CO2

(i)Vapour (ii) Fog (iii) Dust (iv) Fumes.

Module III

15 Explain effects of radiation on human body and the 14 CO3

methods of radioactive waste disposal.

16(a) What are the requirements for safe work platform? 7 CO3

16(b) Discuss about the scaffolding inspections. 7 CO3

Module IV

17 Describe the effect of air pollution on environment. 14 CO4

18 Describe the effect of water pollution on environment. 14 CO4

Module V

19 (a) What is First aid? Explain CPR. 7 CO5

19 (b) What are the important points to be considered in 7 CO5

carrying out workplace inspection?
Explain the first aid measure to be taken during i)gas
20 (a) poisoning, ii)heart attack, iii)chemical splash and 10 CO5
iv)electric shock.

20 (b) Briefly explain the elementary first aid 4 CO5

Model Question Paper CIVIL ENGINEERING

Reg.No.:………………….. QP CODE:………………..

Name:………………………

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SIXTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: CET 386

Environment Health and Safety

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 hours

Part A
(Answer all questions; each question carries 3 marks)

1. What are the socio- economic reasons in safety?

2. Define industrial hygiene.
3. Define noise. What are the compensation aspects of noise?
4. Explain about the biohazard control program.
5. Discuss the possible electrical injuries in a construction industry.
6. What are the hazards due to radiation?
7. What are the criteria air pollutants?
8. Describe the Depletion of Ozone Layer.
9. What are the benefits of safety inspection?
10. Discuss the role of an individual in conservation of natural resources.

Part B
(Answer one full question from each module; each question carries 14 marks)

Module I

11. Briefly explain about occupational related diseases found in the industries. (14 Marks)
OR
12. Write the short notes on : (14 Marks)
(i) Silicosis
(ii) Asbestosis
(iii) Anthracosis
(iv) Anthrax.

Module II
 CIVIL
13. (a) Write briefly about the classification of biohazardous agents.(7 ENGINEERING
Marks)
(b) What are the precautionary measures for chemical hazards? (7 Marks)
OR
14. Write short notes on :(14 Marks)
(i)Vapour(ii) Fog (iii) Dust (iv) Fumes.

Module III

15. Explaineffects of radiation on human body and the methods of

radioactive waste disposal. (14 Marks)

OR
16. (a) What are the requirements for safe work platform? (7 Marks)
(b) Discuss about the scaffolding inspections.(7 Marks)

Module IV

17. Describe the effect of air pollution on environment. (14 Marks)

OR
18. Describe the effect of water pollution on environment.(14 Marks)

Module V

19. (a) What are the important points in carrying outworkplace inspection?(7 Marks)
(b) What is First aid? Explain CPR. (7 Marks)
OR
20. (a)Explain the first aid measure to be taken during gas poisoning,(10 Marks)
heart attack, chemical splash and electric shock.
(b) Briefly explain the elementary first aid (4 Marks)
 Course Code: CET 386
CIVIL ENGINEERING
Environmental Health And Safety

Module I
Introduction to Occupational Health And Toxicology : Safety at work – Socio –
Economic reasons. Introduction to health and safety at various industries. occupational
related diseases-Musculoskeletal disorders, hearing impairment, carcinogens, silicosis,
asbestosis, pneumoconiosis – Toxic materials and substances used in work, exposure limits,
toxicological investigation, Industrial Hygiene, Arrangements by organisations to protect the
workers.

Module II

Chemical hazards-dust, fumes, vapour, fog, gases, Methods of Control. Biological hazards-
Classification of Biohazardous agents– bacterial agents, viral agents, fungal, parasitic agents,
infectious diseases, control of biological agents at workplaces. Noise, noise exposure
regulation and control.

Module III

Safety in Construction industry - Scaffolding and Working platform, Welding and Cutting,
Excavation Work, Concreting, control measures to reduce the risk. Electrical Hazards,
Protection against voltage fluctuations, Effects of shock on human body. Radiation Hazards,
Types and effects of radiation on human body, disposal of radioactive waste.

Module IV

Air Pollution - air pollutants from industries, effect on human health, animals, Plants and
Materials - depletion of ozone layer-concept of clean coal combustion technology.
Water Pollution - water pollutants-health hazards - effluent quality standards. Waste
Management -waste identification, characterization and classification, recycling and reuse.

Module V

Safe working environment - The basic purpose and benefits of safety inspection, First-aid
appliances, Shelters, rest rooms and lunch rooms, use of personal protective equipment, Role
of an individual in conservation of natural resources, Methods for controlling water pollution,
role of individual in prevention of pollution.

Text Books:

1. Environmental and Health and Safety Management by By Nicholas P. Cheremisinoff and

Madelyn L. Graffia, William Andrew Inc. NY, 1995.
2. Effective Environmental, Health, and Safety Management Using the Team Approach by
Bill Taylor, Culinary and Hospitality Industry Publications Services 2005.
3. The Facility Managers Guide to Environmental Health And Safety CIVIL ENGINEERING
by Brian Gallant,
Government Inst Publ., 2007.
4. R.K.Jain and Sunil S.Rao , Industrial Safety , Health and Environment Management
Systems, Khanna publishers , New Delhi (2006).
5. Mackenzie L Davis, Introduction to Environmental Engineering, McGrawhill Education
(India).

References:

1. Slote. L, Handbook of Occupational Safety and Health, JohnWilleyand Sons, NewYork.

2. Heinrich H.W, Industrial Accident Prevention, McGrawHillCompany,NewYork,1980.
3. S.P.Mahajan, “Pollution control in process industries”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Company, New Delhi, 1993.
 Course Code: CET 386
CIVIL ENGINEERING
Environmental Health And Safety
Course content and Schedule of Lecture (sample)

Course
No of
outcome
Module Topic
addressed Hours

Module I (9 Hours)

1.1 Introduction to Occupational Health And Toxicology. CO1 1

1.2 Safety at work – Socio – Economic reasons. CO1 1

1.3 Introduction to health and safety at various industries. CO1 1

Occupational related diseases-Musculoskeletal disorders, hearing

1.4 CO1 1
impairment

Occupational related diseases - carcinogens, silicosis, asbestosis,

1.5 CO1 1
pneumoconiosis.

1.6 Toxic materials and substances used in work. CO1 1

1.7 Exposure limits, toxicological investigation. CO1 1

1.8 Industrial Hygiene. CO1 1

1.9 Arrangements by organisations to protect the workers. CO1 1

Module II (9 Hours)

2.1 Chemical hazards. CO2 1

2.2 Dust, fumes, vapour, fog, gases. CO2 1

2.3 Methods of Control. CO2 1

2.4 Biological hazards. CO2 1

2.5 Classification of Biohazardous agents. CO2 1

Bacterial agents, viral agents, fungal, parasitic agents, infectious

2.6 CO2 1
diseases.

2.7 Control of biological agents at workplaces. CO2 1

2.8 Noise. CO2 1

2.9 Noise exposure regulation and control. CO2 1

 CIVIL ENGINEERING
Module III (8 Hours)

Safety in Construction industry- Scaffolding and Working

3.1 platform. CO3 1

3.2 Welding and Cutting, Excavation Work, Concreting. CO3 1

3.3 Control measures to reduce the risk. CO3 1

3.4 Electrical Hazards. CO3 1

3.5 Protection against voltage fluctuations. CO3 1

3.6 Effects of shock on human body, Radiation Hazards CO3 1

3.7 Types and effects of radiation on human body. CO3 1

3.8 Disposal of radioactive waste. CO3 1

Module IV (9 Hours)

4.1 Air Pollution - air pollutants from industries. CO4 1

4.2 Effect on human health, animals. CO4 1

4.3 Plants and Materials - depletion of ozone layer. CO4 1

4.4 Concept of clean coal combustion technology. CO4 1

4.5 Water Pollution - water pollutants. CO4 1

4.6 Health hazards - effluent quality standards. CO4 1

4.7 Waste Management-waste identification. CO4 1

4.8 Characterization and classification. CO4 1

4.9 Recycling and reuse. CO4 1

Module V (8 Hours)

5.1 Safe working environment. CO5 1

The basic purpose and benefits of safety inspection. CO5

5.2 1

First-aid appliances. CO5

5.3 1

Shelters, rest rooms and lunch rooms. CO5

5.4 1

Use of personal protective equipment. CO5

5.5 1
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

CO5
5.6 Role of an individual in conservation of natural resources. 1
CO5
5.7 Methods for controlling water pollution. 1
CO5
5.8 Role of individual in prevention of pollution. 1
 CIVIL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER VI
HONOURS
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
Year of
FINITE ELEMENT CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
CET394 Introduction
METHODS
VAC 3 1 0 4 2019

Preamble: This course provides the fundamental concepts of finite element method and its
applications in structural engineering. As a natural development from matrix analysis of
structures learnt earlier, the student is encouraged to appreciate the versatility of this method
across various domains, also as the basis of many structural analysis softwares. This course
introduces the basic mathematical concepts of the method and its application to simple
analysis problems.
Prerequisite: CET302Structural Analysis II

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

Course Prescribed learning

Description of Course Outcome
Outcome level

Understand the basic features of boundary value Remembering,

CO1
problems and methods to solve them. Understanding

Understand the fundamental concept of the finite

element method and develop the ability to generate
CO2 Understanding,Applying
the governing FE equations for systems governed
by partial differential equations.
Get familiar with the basic element types and shape
CO3 functions so as to identify and choose suitable Analysing, Applying
elements to solve a particular problem.
Understand the concept of isoparametric elements Understanding,
CO4
and applyit for problemsin structural engineering. Applying
Apply numerical integration procedures as a tool to Understanding,
CO5
solve mathematical models in FEM. Applying

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes (Minimum requirement)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - - -
CO2 3 3 2 1 - - - - - - - -
CO3 3 3 1 1 - - - - - - - -
CO4 3 3 1 - - - - - - - - -
CO5 3 3 1 1 - - - - - - - -

Assessment Pattern
 Continuous Assessment CIVIL ENGINEERING
Bloom’s Category Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 05 05 10
Understand 10 10 20
Apply 20 20 40
Analyse 15 15 30
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration
150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question carries 14 marks and can have maximum 2
sub-divisions.
Course Level Assessment Questions CIVIL ENGINEERING

CO1: Understand the basic features of boundary value problems and methods to
solve them.
1. What are boundary value problems? What are the physical and mathematical
significances of boundary conditions in structural mechanics problems?
2. Using the Galerkin method obtain an approximate solution to the following
boundary value problem.
u ′′ ( x ) + u ( x ) + =
x 0 0 < x <1
= u ( 0 ) 0= u (1) 0
(a) Assume a quadratic polynomial as a trial solution.
(b) Assume a cubic polynomial as a trial solution.
3. Find a one-parameter approximate solution of the nonlinear equation
2
d 2u  du 
−2u 2 +=  4 for 0 < x < 1,
dx  dx 
subject to the boundary conditions u(0) = 1 and u(1) = 0, and compare it with the
exact solution u = 1 − x2. Use the least-squares method.

CO2: Understand the fundamental concept of the finite element method and
develop the ability to generate the governing FE equations for systems
governed by partial differential equations.
1. Derive the governing differential equation of a uniform bar subjected to axial
vibrations.

2. What are field variables and forcing vectors in finite element analysis? Give
examples from various applications.

3. Derive the element stiffness equations for an axial deformation problem, using
variational approach.

4. (a) Obtain the weak form of the following boundary value problem.
d 2u du
x2 2
+ 2x xu + 4 0
−= 1< x < 3
dx dx
du ( 3)
=u (1) 1 = − 2u ( 3) 2
dx
(b) With the weak form obtained in (a), use Rayleigh-Ritz method to obtain an
approximate solution of the above BVP. Use a linear polynomial trial solution.
CO3: CIVIL so
Get familiar with the basic element types and shape functions ENGINEERING
as to identify
and choose suitable elements to solve a particular problem.

1. What are shape functions? What are their advantages in finite element analysis?
2. Obtain the shape functions for a 4-noded bar element using Lagrange polynomials.

3. Write the elasticity relations for axisymmetric elements.

4. For the CST element in figure, x-coordinate at P is 3 and N2 is 0.4 at P.
Determine:
(a) the y-coordinate at P
(b) N1 and N3 at P.

5. Get the explicit shape functions for the rectangular element shown in Figure 3,
using Lagrange formulae.

4
3
( 3,2 )

2
1

( 0, 0 ) ( 3,0 )

CO4: Understand the concept of isoparametric elements and apply it for problems
in structural engineering.
1. Find the axial deformation of a mild steel square bar of side 3cm and length 2m,
using two linear isoparametric axial elements.
2. Derive the shape functions for an isoparametric Constant Strain Triangle element.

3. Find the isoparametric mapping for the CST element shown.

 CIVIL ENGINEERING

4. What are the advantages of coordinate mapping?

5. What are superparametric, subparametric and isoparametric elements?
6. Illustrate the influence of node numbering on Jacobian, by using a linear triangular
isoparametric element.
7. For the axisymmetric triangular elements in Figure, for the loaded edge,

(a) determine the nodal surface traction vector in x-direction.

(b) determine the nodal surface traction vector in y-direction

CO5: Apply numerical integration procedures as a tool to solve mathematical

models in FEM.
1. Evaluate the following integrals using Gauss quadrature:
0.8 2
dx
=(a ) I ∫=
e −2 x tan xdx (b) I
0.2 −2
∫ 1+ x 2

1 1 1 1
=(c) I ∫=
∫ ( t 3 + s 2 )dsdt (d ) I
−1 −1
∫ ∫ x sin ( x + y )dxdy
−1 −1
2

2. What are the essential features of numerical integration using Gauss quadrature?
3. Obtain the two-point Gauss quadrature points and weights from first principles
4. How to determine the number of Gauss points to evaluate an integral exactly?
 SYLLABUS CIVIL ENGINEERING

MODULE I – 9 hrs.
Introduction - Boundary value problems; Introduction to approximate numerical solutions
for solving differential equations.

MODULE II – 9 hrs.
Formulation techniques: Element equations using variational approach- Element equations
using weighted residual approach - the axial element example.

MODULE III – 9 hrs.

Basic elements: Interpolation and shape functions – convergence requirements; CST, LST,
bilinear rectangular elements, solid elements.

MODULE IV – 9 hrs.
Isoparametric Formulation: coordinate mapping - One dimensional bar element; Two
dimensional isoparametric elements - CST, LST, bilinear quadrilateral elements - Plain stress,
plain strain problems.

MODULE V– 9 hrs.
Development of stiffness matrix for beam elements; Introduction to higher order elements;
Introduction to axisymmetric elements.
Numerical Integration: Gauss quadrature

Text Books:
1. Desai, C.S., Elementary Finite Element Method, Prentice Hall of India.
2. Chandrupatla, T.R., and Belegundu, A.D., Introduction to Finite Elements in Engineering,
Prentice Hall of India.

References:
1. Cook, R.D., et al, Concepts and Applications of Finite Element Analysis, John Wiley.
2. Bathe, K.J., Finite Element Procedures in Engineering Analysis, Prentice Hall of India.
3. Gallaghar, R.H., Finite Element Analysis: Fundamentals, Prentice Hall Inc.
4. Rajasekaran, S., Finite Element Analysis in Engineering Design, Wheeler Pub.
5. Krishnamoorthy, C.S., Finite Element Analysis Theory and Programming, Tata McGraw
Hill.
6. Zienkiewicz, O.C., and Taylor, R.L., The Finite Element Method, Vol. I and II, McGraw
Hill.
7. Bhatti, Asghar, Fundamental Finite Element Analysis and Applications: with Mathematica
and
Matlab Computations
Lecture Plan –Structural Analysis II CIVIL ENGINEERING
Course
No. of
Module Topic Outcomes
Lectures
addressed
1 Module I: Total lecture hours: 9
1.1 General introduction – brief review of matrix methods,
applications and versatility of FEM CO1 1

1.2 Introduction to Boundary value problems; approximate

numerical solutions for solving differential equations - CO1 3
Least squares method
1.3 Collocation method, Galerkin method - examples CO1 5
2 Module II: Total lecture hours: 9
2.1 Formulation techniques: Variational approach and
CO2
weighted residual approach – initial concepts and 1
differences
Element equations using variational approach 3
2.2 Element equations using weighted residual approach CO2 3
2.3 The axial element example in detail CO2, CO3 2
3
Module III: Total lecture hours: 9

3.1 Basic elements: Interpolation and shape functions CO3 2

3.2 Convergence requirements; CST element CO3 3
3.3 LST, bilinear rectangular elements, solid elements. CO3 4
4
Module IV: Total lecture hours: 9

4.1 Isoparametric Formulation: coordinate mapping - One

dimensional bar element CO4 2

4.2 Two dimensional isoparametric elements – CST element CO4 3

4.3 LST, bilinear quadrilateral elements - Plain stress, plain
CO4 4
strain problems.
5 Module V: Total lecture hours: 9
5.1 Development of stiffness matrix for beam elements CO3, CO4 2
5.2 Introduction to higher order elements CO3, CO4 2
5.3 Introduction to axisymmetric elements. CO3, CO4 2
5.4 Numerical Integration: Gauss quadrature CO5 3
MODEL QUESTION PAPER CIVIL ENGINEERING

Reg.No.:_______________ Name:__________________________
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
SIXTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code: CET394
Course Name: FINITE ELEMENT METHODS
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A
Answer all questions; each question carries 3 marks.

1. a) What are field variables and forcing vectors in finite element analysis? Give examples
from various applications.
b) What are boundary value problems? What are the physical and mathematical
significances of boundary conditions in structural mechanics problems?
c) List the essential properties of shape functions.
d) Briefly explain the essential features of weighted residual methods to solve partial
differential equations.
e) Write down the brief general procedure in finite element analysis.
f) What are shape functions? What are their advantages in finite element analysis?
g) What are the advantages of coordinate mapping?
h) What are superparametric, subparametric and isoparametric elements?
i) What are axisymmetric elements? Explain.
j) How to determine the number of Gauss points to evaluate an integral exactly?
(10×3 marks = 30 marks)

PART B
Answer one full question from each module; each full question carries 14 marks.

Module I
2. Using the Galerkin method obtain an approximate solution to the following boundary value
problem.
u ′′ ( x ) + u ( x ) + =
x 0 0 < x <1
= u ( 0 ) 0= u (1) 0
(a) Assume a quadratic polynomial as a trial solution.
(b) Assume a cubic polynomial as a trial solution.
(2×7=14 marks)
3. Find a one-parameter approximate solution of the nonlinear equation
 2 CIVIL ENGINEERING
d 2u  du 
−2u 2 +=  4 for 0 < x < 1,
dx  dx 
subject to the boundary conditions u(0) = 1 and u(1) = 0, and compare it with the exact
solution u = 1 − x2. Use the least-squares method.
(14 marks)

Module II

4. Derive the element stiffness equations for an axial deformation problem, using variational
approach. (14 marks)

5 (a) Obtain the weak form of the following boundary value problem.
d 2u du
x2 2
+ 2x xu + 4 0
−= 1< x < 3
dx dx
du ( 3)
=u (1) 1 = − 2u ( 3) 2
dx
(b) With the weak form obtained in (a), use Rayleigh-Ritz method to obtain an
approximate solution of the above BVP. Use a linear polynomial trial solution.

(2×7=14 marks)

Module III

6. For the CST element in figure, x-coordinate at P is 3 and N2 is 0.4 at P. Determine:

(a) the y-coordinate at P
(b) N1 and N3 at P.

(2×7=14 marks)
7. Get the explicit shape functions for the rectangular element shown in Figure 3, using
Lagrange formulae.
 4
3 CIVIL ENGINEERING
( 3,2 )

2
1

( 0, 0 ) ( 3,0 )

(14 marks)

Module IV

8. Illustrate the influence of node numbering on Jacobian, by using a linear triangular

isoparametric element.
(14 marks)
9. Get the explicit isoparametric shape functions for the quadrilateral element shown in
Figure 4. Check the validity of isoparametric mapping.

3
4
( 2, 2 )
( 0,1)

(1,0 )
( 0,0 ) 1 2

(14 marks)

Module V

10. For the axisymmetric triangular elements in Figure, for the loaded edge,

(a) determine the nodal surface traction vector in x-direction.

(b) determine the nodal surface traction vector in y-direction.
(2×7=14 marks)
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
11. Evaluate the following integrals using two-point Gauss quadrature:
2 6 2
( x2 + y 2 ) dx
(a) I ∫=
∫ xy e dxdy (b) I
1 4
∫ 1 + x2
−2
(2×7=14 marks)
*********
 Year of
CET EARTH DAMS AND EARTH CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
Introduction
396 RETAINING STRUCTURES
VAC 4 0 CIVIL
0 ENGINEERING
4 2019

Preamble: Goal of this course is to impart to the students, in-depth knowledge about the fundamentals
of earth dams and Earth pressure theories. After this course, students will be able to analyze stability
of earth dams and various types of retaining structures.

Prerequisite: CET 305 : GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING II

Course Outcomes: After completion of the course the student will be able to:

Course
Description of Course Outcome
Outcome
CO 1 Understand the fundamentals of earth dams
CO 2 Analyze slope stability of earth dams
CO 3 Explain the basic concepts & theories of Earth pressure
CO 4 Calculate earth pressure for different types of retaining structures
CO 5 Design Rigid and Flexible Retaining Walls applying the earth pressure theories

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes (Minimum requirement)

PO PO PO
PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9
10 11 12
CO 1 3 - - - - - - - - - - -
CO2 2 2 3 - - - - - - - - -
CO 3 3 - - - - - - - - - - -
CO 4 2 3 - - - - - - - - - -
CO 5 2 2 3 - - - - - - - - -

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester

Bloom’s Category
Test 1 (Marks) Test 2 (Marks) Examination (Marks)
Remember 10 10 20
Understand 15 15 30
Apply 25 25 50
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark Distribution
CIVIL ENGINEERING

Total Marks CIE Marks ESE Marks ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) Pattern :

Attendance : 10 Marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 Marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 Marks

End Semester Examination (ESE) Pattern : There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contains 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students
should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should
answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

(Questions may be framed based on the outline given under each course outcome)
Course Outcome 1 (CO1):
1. Understand the fundamentals of earth dams
2. Understand the types of earth dams
3. Understand the parts of earth dams like central and inclined cores, filters
4. Understand the seepage analysis of earth dams
Course Outcome 2 (CO2):
1. Analyze slope stability of earth dams

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. Explain the basic concepts of Earth pressure
2. Explain Rankine’s and Coulomb’s theories of Earth pressure
3. Explain Graphical method using Rebhan’s method
Course Outcome 4 (CO4):
1. Calculate earth pressure for different types of retaining structures using Rankine’s and
Coulomb’s theories, Graphical Method, Trial wedge method
2. Calculate earth pressure for rigid and flexible retaining walls
3. Calculate earth pressure on Braced cuts and coffer dams

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

 1. Design of gravity retaining wall &cantilever retaining walls applying the earth pressure
theories
2. Design of cantilever sheet piles CIVIL ENGINEERING
3. Design of anchored sheet piles
4. Design of Coffer Dams

SYLLABUS

Module 1
Earth dams – types of dams - Selection of type of dam based on material availability - Foundation
conditions and topography - Design details – crest, free board, upstream and downstream slopes,
upstream and downstream slope protection – central and inclined cores - Types and design of filters -
Seepage analysis and control – seepage through dam and foundations – control of seepage in earth
dam and foundation
Module 2
Construction techniques of earth dams – methods of construction - Quality control Instrumentation –
measurement of pore pressures - Determination of phreatic line - Stability analysis – critical stability
conditions - Desired values of factor of safety for different loading conditions of dam - Evaluation of
stability by Swedish Slip Circle Method and sliding wedge method under critical conditions
Module 3
Earth pressure theories – Rankine‘s and Coulomb’s earth pressure theories for cohesionless and
cohesive backfills – Computation of earth pressures for various cases – inclined – with surcharge –
submerged and partly submerged – stratified backfills - Rigid retaining structures – active and
passive earth pressures against gravity retaining walls – Numerical Problems - Computation of earth
pressures by Trial wedge method –A mathematical approach for completely submerged and partly
submerged backfills - Numerical Problems - Importance of capillarity tension in earth pressure

Module 4
Graphical methods of earth pressure computation – trial wedge method for coulomb‘s and Rankine‘s
conditions, for regular and irregular ground and wall conditions -Rebhan‘s construction for active
pressure - Friction circle method - Logarithmic spiral method - Design of gravity retaining wall –
cantilever retaining walls - Numerical Problems - Flexible retaining structure – type and methods of
construction – design strength parameters

Module 5
Safety factor for sheet pile walls – Computation of earth pressures against cantilever sheet piles in
cohesionless and cohesive soils – Numerical Problems - Anchored sheet piles – free earth method –
fixed earth method – Rowe‘s moment reduction method - Stability of sheet piling - Diaphragm walls
and coffer dams – types of diaphragm walls and their construction techniques in various soil types -
Earth pressure on braced cuts and coffer dams – Design of coffer dams

Text Books :
1. Tschebotarioff G P, Foundations, Retaining and earth structures, 2nd edition, Mcgraw Hill
Pub., 1973
References:
1. Clayton, Milititsky and Woods, Earth Pressure And Earth-Retaining Structures, Taylor and
Francis, 1996 CIVIL ENGINEERING
2. Huntington, Earth pressure on retaining walls, John Wiley and Sons, 1957
3. Prakash, Ranjan and Saran, Analysis and Design of Foundations and Retaining
structures,SarithaPrakashan, Meerut, 1977
4. Bowles, Foundation Analysis and Design, 1968.
5. Jones, Earth Reinforcements and Soil structures, 1996
7. IS : 7894 – 1975, Indian Standard Code of Practice for Stability Analysis of Earth Dams
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule:

Module Contents Hours

1 Module 1 9

1.1 Earth dams – types of dams CO 1 1

1.2 Selection of type of dam based on material availability CO 1 1
1.3 Foundation conditions and topography CO 1 1
1.4 Design details – crest, free board, upstream and downstream slopes, CO 1 2
upstream and downstream slope protection – central and inclined
cores
1.5 Types and design of filters CO 1 2
1.6 Seepage analysis and control – seepage through dam and foundations CO 1 2
– control of seepage in earth dam and foundation
2 Module 2 9
2.1 Construction techniques of earth dams – methods of construction CO 1 1
2.2 Quality control Instrumentation – measurement of pore pressures CO 1 1
2.3 Determination of phreatic line CO 1 1
2.4 Stability analysis – critical stability conditions CO 1, 2
CO 2
Desired values of factor of safety for different loading conditions of CO 1, 1
2.5
dam CO 2
Evaluation of stability by Swedish Slip Circle Method and sliding CO 1, 3
2.6
wedge method under critical conditions CO 2
3 Module 3 9
3.1 Earth pressure theories – Rankine‘s and Coulomb’searth pressure CO 3 2
theories for cohesionless and cohesive backfills – Computation of
earth pressures for various cases – inclined – with surcharge –
submerged and partly submerged – stratified backfills
3.2 Rigid retaining structures – active and passive earth pressures against CO 3, 2
gravity retaining walls – Numerical Problems CO 4
 3.3 Computation of earth pressures by Trial wedge method – A CO 3 2
mathematical approach for completely submerged and partly
submerged backfills CIVIL ENGINEERING
3.4 Numerical Problems CO 3, 2
CO 4
3.5 Importance of capillarity tension in earth pressure CO 3 1

4 Module 4 9

4.1 Graphical methods of earth pressure computation – trial wedge CO 3, CO 2

method for coulomb‘s and Rankine‘s conditions, for regular and 4
irregular ground and wall conditions -Rebhan‘s construction for active
pressure

4.2 Friction circle method - Logarithmic spiral method CO 3 2

4.3 Design of gravity retaining wall – cantilever retaining walls - CO 5 3

Numerical Problems

Flexible retaining structure – type and methods of construction – CO 3 2

4.4
design strength parameters

5 Module 5 9

5.1 Safety factor for sheet pile walls – Computation of earth pressures CO3, CO 2
against cantilever sheet piles in cohesionless and cohesive soils – 4
Numerical Problems

5.2 Anchored sheet piles – free earth method – fixed earth method – CO 3, 2
Rowe‘s moment reduction method CO 4

5.3 Stability of sheet piling CO 3, 1

CO 5

5.4 Diaphragm walls and coffer dams – type of diaphragm walls and their CO 3 2
construction techniques in various soil types

Earth pressure on braced cuts and coffer dams – Design of coffer dams CO 3, 2
5.5
CO 5
Model Question Paper
QP CODE:
CIVIL ENGINEERING
Reg No.:_______________ Name:__________________________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

FOURTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: CET396

Course Name : EARTH DAMS AND EARTH RETAINING STRUCTURES

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 hours

Part A
(Answer all questions; each question carries 3 marks)

1. Explain types of dams

2. Explain downstream slope protection measures
3. Explain the instrumentation for quality control of dams
4. Explain critical stability conditions of dams
5. Explain critical depth for an unsupported cut in cohesive soil.
6. List the assumptions of Coulomb’s theory of earth pressure
7. Differentiate between rigid and flexible retaining structures
8. Explain the methods of construction of flexible retaining structures
9. How to check the stability of sheet piling?
10. List the types of Diaphragm walls

PART B
(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module – 1
11. (a) Explain the basic design studies necessary for design of an earth dam. (7 Marks)
(b) Explain about the seepage through Dam and foundation. (7 Marks)
12. (a) Discuss in detail the Terzgahi’s filter criteria for its design. (7 Marks)
(b) Explain the control of seepage in earth dam. (7 Marks)
Module – 2
13. (a) Explain construction techniques of an earth dam. (7 Marks)
(b) Explain Swedish Slip Circle method of stability analysis. (7 Marks)
14. (a) Explain methods of construction of an earth dam. (7 Marks)
(b) Explain Sliding Wedge method of stability analysis. (7 Marks)
 Module – 3
15. (a) Explain Trial wedge method of earth pressure. (5 Marks)
CIVIL ENGINEERING
(b) Compute the total lateral earth thrust exerted by a layered backfill of height 10m if the wall has
a tendency to move away from the backfill. The upper layer of thickness 4 m has angle of
internal friction 32° and unit weight 19 kN/m3. The lower layer has angle of internal friction
28°, cohesion 20kPa, and unit weight 18 kN/m3. The backfill also supports a uniform surcharge
of intensity 10kN/m2. Also find the point of application. (9 Marks)
16. (a) Explain the importance of capillary tension in computation of earth pressure (5 Marks)
(b) For a layered backfill behind a 10m high retaining wall with a smooth vertical backfill, Draw
the active earth pressure distribution and its magnitude and point of application : (9 Marks)

Sl. No. Depth Backfill Properties

1. 0–3m c = 30kN/m2, φ = 0°, γ = 19kN/m3
2. 3–6m c = 0kN/m2, φ = 32°, γ = 18kN/m3
3. 6 – 10 m c = 50kN/m2, φ = 0°, γ = 17kN/m3

Module – 4
17. (a) Explain design strength parameters of a flexible retaining wall. (5 Marks)
(b) The retaining wall having 6m height having back of wall is inclined at +ve batter angle of15°
and ground surface has an upward inclination of 20° retains a backfill with following
properties : γ= 19kN/m3, φ = 34°, δ = 20°.
(i) Determine the total active thrust by Rebann’s graphical construction.
(ii) A surcharge of 50kN/m2 is acting on the backfill. What is the magnitude of total active
thrust? (9 Marks)

18. (a) Explain Logarithmic Spiral method. (5 Marks)

(b) A trapezoidal masonry retaining wall 1.5m wide at the top and 5m wide at its bottom is 5m
high. The vertical face is retaining soil (φ = 30°) at a surcharge angle of 15° with the
horizontal. Unit weights of soil and masonry are 20kN/m3 and 24kN/m3.The coefficient of
friction at the base of the wall is 0.40. Check the stability of the retaining by applying
necessary checks if the soil bearing capacity is 90kN/m2. (9 Marks)

Module – 5
19. (a) Explain the step by step procedure for design of a diaphragm wall. (7 Marks)
(b) Describe the stability checking of sheet pile wall using fixed and free earth support methods.
CIVIL ENGINEERING (7 Marks)
20. (a) What are different types of coffer dams? (5 Marks)
(b) An anchored sheet pile is to support a mass of cohesion less soil up to height of 6m above
ground level with horizontal anchor toes spaced at 1m intervals and located at 1.0m below the
ground surface. If the unit weight of the soil is 21kN/m3 and its angle of internal friction is 30°,
determine the minimum depth of embedment of the sheet pile for stability. (9 Marks)
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
ENVIRONMENTAL Year of
CET CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
POLLUTION Introduction
398
MODELLING VAC 3 1 0 4 2019

Preamble : This course introduces various approaches for environmental pollution modeling.
Students will learn how to develop a verified and validated model. The mathematics behind various
environmental pollution models with their uncertainties will be discussed.

Prerequisite: NIL

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able

Course Prescribed
Description of Course Outcome
Outcome learning level
CO1 To appreciate the mathematical modelling approach Understanding
To learn how to build a model to represent physical Understanding,
CO2
transport of pollutants in environment Applying
To simulate pollution transport scenarios in water, air and Applying ,
CO 3
noise environment Analysing
CO 4 To interpret the modelling results for decision support Analysing

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes (Minimum requirement)

PO PO
PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10
11 12
CO 1 3 - - - - - - - - - - -
CO 2 3 - - - - - - - - - - -
CO 3 - 2 - 2 - - - - - - - -
CO4 - 2 - 2 - - - - - - - -

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment
Bloom’s Category Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 15
Understand 10 10 15
Apply 15 15 35
Analyse 15 15 35
Evaluate
Create
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question carries 14 marks and can have maximum 2 sub-divisions.

Course Level Assessment Questions

CO1:To appreciate the mathematical modelling approach

1 Discuss the classification of mathematical models

2 Explain how advection-diffusion equation is useful for modelling contaminant
transport in ground water

3 How gaussian dispersion model is useful for air pollution modelling of point
sources?

CO 2: Tolearn how to build a model to represent physical transport of pollutants in

environment

1 Explain model building procedure

2 What is the flow equation for the following situation?

 CIVIL ENGINEERING
3 Discuss how salinity intrusion is modeled

CO3: To simulate pollution transport scenarios in water, air and noise environment

1 The SO2 concentration from 700 MW coal fired power plant has to be estimated.
It burns 5% sulphur coal at the rate of 350KG / MW H. Stack height is 150m and
plume rise is 50m.The wind speed at stack height is 6 m/s and neutral stability
condition exists. Calculate the ground level concentration at 2 km downwind
distance, given that σy= 80m and σz= 120m.

2 The initial BOD of a river just below a sewage outfall is 25 mg/L. The oxygen
deficit just upstream from the outfall is 2 mg/L. The deoxygenation rate
coefficient kd is 0.4/day, and the reaeration rate coefficient kr is 0.7/day. The
river is flowing at a speed of 30 km /day. (a) Find the critical distance
downstream at which DO is a minimum (b) Find the minimum DO
3 Water levels in two wells far from shoreline are 50 cm and 1.0 m respectively.
The wells are separated by a distance of 1 km. Hydraulic conductivity of the
aquifer is 10m/d. Thickness of aquifer is 50m. Calculate the length of saltwater
wedge and position of interface. Density of salt water can be taken as
1.025 g/cm 3

CO4: To interpret the modelling results for decision support

1 Explain how gaussian dispersion model help in predicting the impact of a

proposed coal power plant in a locality

2 A chemical spill occurs above a sloping, shallow unconfined aquifer consisting

of medium sand with K=1 m/d and a porosity of 30%. Several monitoring wells
are drilled in order to determine the regional hydraulic gradient. The hydraulic
head from a well drilled near the spill location yielded a value of 5m. At a
distance of 200m down the slope another well yielded a hydraulic head of 1m.
Do you need to worry about safe drinking water availability in the well 200 m
down the slope?
3 The distance from the base of a pumping well to the freshwater-saltwater
interface is 100 m, the pumping rate is 3000 m3/day, and the hydraulic
conductivity is 10 m/d. What’s the maximum permitted pumping rate for the
well?
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
SYLLABUS

Module1

Role of models in environmental pollution studies- objectives of modelling-modelling principles-

types of models-classification of mathematical models-deterministic, stochastic, continuous, discreet,
static, dynamic, linear and non-linear-model building framework-model calibration, validation,
verification and sensitivity analysis-model scales, error and uncertainty -distributions in modelling
data of environmental pollutant concentrations- log-normal, Weibull, and gamma
Module 2

Air pollution modelling: Transport and dispersion of air pollutants- estimating concentrations from
point sources –Dispersion Modelling- Gaussian Plume Model – determination of dispersion
parameters, atmospheric stability-box models- line source model-area source model-puff model

Module 3

Water quality modeling: historical development of water quality models; rivers and streams water
quality modelling– low flow analysis – pollutant transport-advection, diffusion and dispersion––
Modelling lake water quality-mass balance for well mixed lakes-models for dissolved oxygen;
Streeter Phelps model- sediment transport modelling

Module4

Groundwater modelling: use of ground water models-ground water flow modeling-Darcy's law-
ground water flow equations for homogenous, heterogenous, isotropic and anisotropic conditions-
mass transport of solutes,advection diffusion equation,favorable conditions for contaminant transport-
modelling parameters and boundary conditions, seawater intrusion – basic concepts and modeling-
Ghyben–Herzberg formula-popular ground water models

Module5

Environmental noise - noise generation mechanisms- need for noise modelling- modelling inputs-
sound propagation factors- Equivalent Continuous Sound Pressure Level (Leq)-noise mapping
methodology-modelling traffic noise-CoRTN and RLS90 models

Text Books

1. Gilbert M Masters Wendell P Ela, Introduction to Environmental Engineering & Science,

Pearson,2013
2. Steven C.Chapra, Surface Water Quality Modeling, The McGraw-Hill Companies,Inc., New
York, 1997.
3. Todd David Keith, Ground water Hydrology, Fourth edition, John Wiley and Sons, New
York, 2004..
4. C.P Kumar, Ground water assessment and modelling, Createspace Independent Pub, 2015
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
References

1. Seinfeld and Pandis, Atmospheric chemistry and physics, Wiley 2016

2. Marcello Benedini, George Tsakiris, Water quality modelling for rivers and streams,Springer
2013
3. Mary Anderson William Woessner Randall Hunt, Applied ground water modelling, Academic
Press, 2015
4. Enda Murphy Eoin King, Environmental Noise Pollution, Elsevier, 2014

Lecture Plan- Environmental Impact Assessment

Course
No. of
Module Topic Outcomes
Lectures
addressed
1 Module 1: Total Lecture Hours -9
1.1 Role of models in environmental pollution studies- CO1 1
objectives of modelling-modelling principles-
1.2 types of models-classification of mathematical CO1 2
models-deterministic, stochastic, continuous,
discreet, static, dynamic, linear and non-linear-
1.3 model building framework-model calibration, CO2 3
validation, verification and sensitivity analysis-model
scales, error and uncertainty -
1.4 distributions in modelling data of environmental CO1,CO2 3
pollutant concentrations- log-normal, Weibull, and
gamma

2 Module II: Total Lecture Hours- 9

2.1 Air pollution modelling: Transport and dispersion of CO2 1
air pollutants
2.2 estimating concentrations from point sources – CO2, CO3, 4
dispersion modelling- Gaussian Plume Model – CO4
determination of dispersion parameters, atmospheric
stability
2.3 box models- line source model-area source model- CO2, CO3, 4
puff model CO4

3 Module III: Total Lecture Hours-9

3.1 Water quality modeling: historical development of CO1,CO2 1
water quality models
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
3.2 Rivers and streams water quality modelling– low CO2, CO3 2
flow analysis – pollutant transport-advection,
diffusion and dispersion
3.3 Modelling lake water quality-mass balance for well CO2, CO3 2
mixed lakes
3.4 models for dissolved oxygen; Streeter Phelps model- CO2, CO3,CO4 3
3.5 sediment transport modelling CO2, CO3,CO4 1
4 Module IV: Total Lecture Hours- 9
4.1 Groundwater modelling: use of ground water models- CO1,CO2 3
ground water flow modeling-Darcy's law-ground
water flow equations for homogenous, heterogenous,
isotropic and anisotropic conditions-
4.2 mass transport of solutes, advection dispersion CO2,CO3,CO4 3
equation, favorable conditions for contaminant
transport-modelling parameters and boundary
conditions

4.3 seawater intrusion – basic concepts and modeling- CO2,CO3,CO4 3

Ghyben–Herzberg formula, popular ground water
models
5 Module V: Total Lecture Hours- 9
5.1 Environmental noise - noise generation mechanisms- CO2 3
need for noise modellingnoise mapping
methodology-
5.2 modelling inputs-sound propagation factors - CO2 3
Equivalent Continuous Sound Pressure Level (Leq)-
5.3 modelling traffic noise-CoRTN and RLS90 models CO3 3
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
Model Question Paper

Reg No.:_______________ Name:__________________________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
SIXTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION

Course Code: CET398

Course Name: ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION MODELLING
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
Part A
(Answer all questions; each question carries 3 marks)

1. Why do we need models in environmental studies?

2. A model can never represent the reality. Explain
3. What are the assumptions used in a box model?
4. Explain how atmospheric stability influence dispersion of air pollutants?
5. Explain Streeter-Phelps model
6. How modeling lake water quality is different from modeling river water quality?
7. Explain the role of Darcy's law in ground water modelling
8. Explain Ghyben-Herzberg relation
9. What are the parameters influencing propagation of environmental noise?
10. What you mean by Equivalent Continuous Sound Pressure Level ?
PART B
(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

11. (a) Why do we need models? Explain with an example (5 Marks)

(b) Discuss various types of models used in environmental science (9 Marks)
OR
12. (a) Reliability of a model does not necessarily increase with model complexity. Why?
(5 Marks)
(b) Discuss the model building framework (9 Marks)

13. (a) An air sampling station is located at an azimuth of 203o from a cement plant at a distance of
1500 meters. The cement plant releases fine particulate matter at the rate of 94.5 g/s from a 30
meter high stack. What is the contribution from the cement plant to the ambient particulate
 CIVIL ENGINEERING
matter concentration at the sampling station when the wind is from 30 o at 3 m/s. Given that
σy= 150m and σz= 87m (9 Marks)
(b) What is plume rise? How it influences air quality modelling? (5Marks)
OR
14. (a) How stability parameters used in Gaussian model are determined? (5 Marks)
(b) Discuss in detail various air quality models and their use (9 Marks)

15. (a) Briefly discuss the historical development of water quality models (9 Marks)
(b) What input data are needed for sediment transport modelling (4 Marks)
OR
16. (a) The initial BOD of a river just below a sewage outfall is 25 mg/L. The oxygen deficit just
upstream from the outfall is 2 mg/L. The deoxygenation rate coefficient kd is 0.4/day, and the
reaeration rate coefficient kr is 0.7/day. The river is flowing at a speed of 30 km /day.
(i) Find the critical distance downstream at which DO is a minimum
(ii) Find the minimum DO (9Marks)
(b) Explain low flow analysis (5 Marks)

17. (a) An aquifer has a cross section with a horizontal width of 265m, and a vertical thickness below
the water table of 42m. The water table is 36 m below the ground surface. Each day 3340 m3
of water is discharged through the cross section. The aquifer rock has an effective porosity of
27.1%. Find the Seepage velocity through the aquifer (5 Marks)
(b) Discuss the basic mechanisms that drives the contaminant transport in ground
water (9 marks)
OR
18. (a) What are the contaminant, soil and site properties and their combinations that
are critical in the transport of contaminants to ground water (5 Marks)
(b)The distance from the base of a pumping well to the freshwater-saltwater interface is 100 m,
the pumping rate is 3000 m3/day, and the hydraulic conductivity is 10 m/d.
(i) What will be the position of the interface?
(ii) What’s the maximum permitted pumping rate for the well? (9 Marks)

19. (a) Discuss the need for environmental noise modelling (5 Marks)
(b) Explain noise mapping methodology (9 Marks)
OR
20. (a) Explain the noise generation mechanisms (5Marks)
(b) Discuss how traffic noise can be modelled? (9 Marks)